PHYSICS

MODULE - 7
INDEX
S.No. Chapter Name Page No.
4. Moving Charges and Magnetism 1 - 46
5. Magnetism and Matter 47 - 84
6. Electromagnetic Induction 85 - 119
7. Alternating Current 120 - 169
8. Electromagnetic Waves 170 - 192
Moving Charges and Magnetism 1

MOVING CHARGES
AND MAGNETISM
Chapter 04
Percentage of Questions in Last 34 Years’ in NEET / AIPMT from this Chapter

Percentage • Magnetic Force, Motion of a charged particle in

A 32%
E (8%)

combined electric and magnetic field

• Force on a current carrying conductor in a uniform magnetic

%) B field, Magnetic field due to a current element, Biot-Savart law 27%
A (32%) (16 Magnetic field on the axis of a circular current loop
D

C • Moving Coil Galvanometer 17%

C (17%)
• Force between two parallel currents,
D Solenoid & toroid, Ampere's circuital law 16%
B (27%)

E • Torque on a current loop 48%

WHAT DO YOU WANT TO KNOW? 4.10.2 Circular Current loop as a magnetic

dipole
4.1 INTRODUCTION
4.9 FORCE BETWEEN TWO PARALLEL
4.2 MAGNETIC FORCE CURRENTS, THE AMPERE
(Effect of Magnetic Field on a Moving charges)
4.10 TORQUE ON CURRENT LOOP, MAGNETIC
4.2.2 Magnetic Field, Lorentz Force
DIPOLE
4.2.3 Magnetic force on a current
4.10.1 Torque on a rectangular current loop
4.3 MOTION IN A MAGNETIC FIELD in a uniform magnetic field
4.4 MOTION IN COMBINED ELECTRIC AND 4.11 THE MOVING COIL GALVANOMETER
MAGNETIC FIELDS
4.12 SYNOPSIS
4.4.1 Velocity Selector
4.13 MISCELLANEOUS Questions from NCERT
4.5 MAGNETIC FIELD DUE TO A CURRENT
ELEMENT, BIOT-SAVART LAW 4.14 NCERT Exemplar Questions
4.6 MAGNETIC FIELD ON THE AXIS OF A 4.15 ASSERTION-REASON & STATEMENT
CIRCULAR CURRENT LOOP BASED Questions from NCERT

4.7 AMPERE’S CIRCUITAL LAW 4.16 MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS

4.17 ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
4.8 THE SOLENOID AND THE TOROID
4.8.1 The Solenoid 4.18 ANSWER KEY
4.8.2 The Toroid
 2 Moving Charges and Magnetism
G al v an omet er t o Magnetic field due to Direction of magnetic field-Depends Magnetic field due to
ammeter conversion : a straight current upon the direction of current. Right a solenoid. Inside a
Low resistance or carrying conductor of hand thumb rule - Thumb points in the long solenoid B = µ0nI
shunt connected in indefinite length direction of current. Curling of fingers At a point on one end
parallel represents direction of magnetic field.
 Ig  µ 0I µ nI
S G B B 0
 I  Ig  2R 2
 
Magnetic field Space in the
surrounding of a magnet or any
Galvanometer t o Biot-savart’s law current carrying conductor in
voltmeter conversion magnetic field due to which its magnetic influence Ampere’s Circuital Law
: High resistance in cu r ren t car ry i n g can be experienced
series element  Bdl   I
0

V  0 Idl sin 
R G dB 
Ig 4 r 2
MOVING CHARGES Magnetic field due to a
AND MAGNETISM toroid inside the turns
B = µ0nI
Magnetic field due to a current
carrying circular loop

Force acting on a
Motion of a charged particle in charged particle moving
On the axis of At the centre of a uniform magnetic field in a uniform magnetic
circular loop circular loop follows a circular path, radius field
 0 NIa 2 NI F = qVB sin 
mv sin    
B B r F  q(V × B)
2( r 2  a 2 ) 3 / 2 2R Bq

Torque experienced by a Force between two Force on a conductor Lorentz force

current carrying loop in parallel current carrying carrying current in a F = q (E + V × B)
a uniform magnetic field conductors uniform magnetic field    
T = MB sin  n̂  2I I F = I B lsin  F = qE + q(V × B)
  F 0 . 1 2
M×B 4 r F = i(l × B)

4.1 P.No.: 132

 In electrostatics, we limited our discussions to static electric fields characterized by Moving charges and
Magnetism. We now focus our attention on static magnetic fields, which are characterized by . There are
many similarities between electric and magnetic fields. The analogy between electric and magnetic fields
will help us to know that most of the equations we have derived for the electric fields may be readily used to
obtain corresponding equations for magnetic fields, if the equivalent analogous quantities are substituted.
This way it does not appear as if we are learning new concepts.
 A definite link between electric and magnetic fields was established by Oersted. We already know that
electrostatic field is produced by static charges. If charges are moving, a magnetic field is produced i.e. a
magnetic field is produced by a current flow. This current flow may be due to magnetization currents as in
permanent magnets, electron beam currents as in vacuum tubes, or conduction currents as in current carry-
ing wires. In this chapter, we consider magnetic fields in free space due to direct current.
 For centuries, electricity and magnetism had been taken as two distinct powers, and now they are connected.
Charges at rest generate electric fields and charges in motion, in addition, generate magnetic fields. These
two fields are different manifestations of a single phenomenon electromagnetism.
 Our study of magnetostatics is not a dispensable luxury but an indispensable necessity. The development of
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 3
the motors, transformers, microphones, compasses, telephone bell ringers, television focussing controls, ad-
vertising displays, magnetically levitated high speed vehicles, memory stores, magnetic separators etc. in-
volve magnetic phenomena and play an important role in our everyday life.
MAGNETIC FIELD INDUCTION :
 Magnetic field induction is said to be exist at a point if a side way deflecting force (over and above any electric
force) is exerted on a moving

charge at that point. In a magnetic field, the strength of the field at a point is
generally denoted by B which is called magnetic field vector, flux density or magnetic field induction.
 In terms of the force acting on a moving charge particle, the strength of the magnetic field is defined as the
ratio of magnitude of maximum force to the product of the magnitude of charge with velocity,

 Fmax
i.e. B  and the direction of the field is the direction of motion of the charge if it experiences no side way
qv
deflection force in the field.
 In terms of pole concept at a point it can be defined as the force experienced by a unit test north pole assumed
to be placed at that point,

 F
i.e. B 
m0
(m0 = pole strength, pole strength  in magnets is equivalent to amount of charge in electric dipole)
 In terms of magnetic intensity H (amp/m), B can be expressed as,
   µr is the relative permeability

NOTE
B   H  (0 r ) H where µ0 and µ are the permeabilities of vacuum of the medium and,
and medium respectively. µ deals with the degree of For air, µr = 1.0000004
For vacuum, µr = 1
concentration of lines of force in a specimen.

Units of magnetic field induction :

 Its S.I. unit is newton/amp-metre = weber/m2 = tesla and its dimensional formula is [MT–2A–1].
 Its C.G.S. unit is gauss (G), 1 tesla = 104 gauss.

MAGNETIC LINES OF FORCE

Magnetic field can be represented by lines, called lines of induction just as the electric field is represented by electric
lines of force. B is related to its lines of induction in the following ways.
 The tangent at any point on the magnetic field line gives the direction of magnetic field at that point.
 The number of lines per unit area, normal to the area at a point gives an idea about the magnitude of the magnetic
field vector at that point. This field is large if the lines are closer and is small if they are far apart.
 Magnetic field is said to be uniform if the magnetic induction has the same magnitude and the same direction
at all the points in the region.

4.5 P.No.: 143

Shortly after Oersted’s discovery that a current produces a magnetic field, Biot and Savart firstand then Ampere
through experiments, established the basic experimental laws relating the magnetic induction B to the currents.
BIOT SAVART’S LAW
Biot savart’s law states that the magnetic field intensity dB produced at a point P as shown in the figure, by
the differential current element, ‘idl’ is proportional to the product ‘idl’ and the sine of the angle  between the
element and the line joining P to the element and is inversely proportional to the square of the distance ‘r’ between
P and the element.
 The magnetic field induction at a point P due to the small element of length dl,
 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism

idl sin  idl sin  i

dB  2 or dB  (constant)
r r2
idl P
 0  7
 In S.I., constant     10 tesla (T) 
 4  r (direction perpendicular
to the plane and inward)
0 idl sin  i
 Therefore, dB 
4 r2

  0 idl  r   (Biot-Savart's Law)
 In vector form, dB  3  Bnet   dB
4 r
The direction of magnetic field can be obtained by right hand cross product rule or right hand palm rule.
  
Note: The direction of dl  r is also given by the Right Hand Screw rule: Curl your right hand fingers from dl
  
towards r through smaller angle, then the direction of thumb gives the direction of dl  r . If fingers curl clockwise
 
then the direction of dl  r will be perpendicular to the plane containing the two vectors and away from you ( 
 
Type). If the fingers curl anti-clockwise then the direction of dl  r will be perpendicular to the plane and towards
you (  Type).


An element d  xiˆ is placed at the origin and carries a large current I = 5 A (figure). What is the magnetic
field on the y-axis at a distance of 0.3 m, x = 0.5 cm.

y
  Idl sin 
| dB | 0 P
4 r2
0.5 m
0 Tm
d  x  5  103 m, I  5A, r  0.3 m  y,  107 ,   90 , sin   1 x
4 A x
 10  5  5  10
7 3
25
| dB |  2
  108 T
9  10 9
The direction of the field is in the +z-direction.

Comparison Between the Biot Savart Law of Magnetism and Coloumb’s Law of Electrostatics

 A current element Idl produces a magnetic field whereas a charge dq produces an electric field.
 Both show an inverse square law dependence on distance.
 Both show a linear relationship between source and field. ( E  q, dB  Idl )
The difference appears in the direction of the field:
 The electric field due to a charge is radial, the magnetic field due to a current element is circular around the
current element.
 An electric field may be due to a single charge or due to a distribution of charges. A magnetic field can only
be due to a current distribution.
Moving Charges and Magnetism 5

4.6 P.No.: 145

The magnetic field induction at the point P due to a small current element,

 0 idl  r
dB 
4 r 3 q

0 idl r sin 900 q

dB 
q q
4 r3
q q

0 idl q
4 r 2
q
 idl
dB  0
4 ( R  x 2 )
2

Therefore the net magnetic field induction at the point due to the whole ring,
B   dB sin 

0 i sin  The magnetic field lines due to the circular

 dl
4 ( R 2  x 2 )  current carrying coil are circular at the points
where the coil meets the horizontal plane. The
0 i R curvature of magnetic field lines decreases as
 2 2
2 R we move from these points towards the centre
4 ( R  x ) ( R  x 2 )
2
of the coil. At the centre they become straight.

 R   iR 2
sin   B 0 2
 ( R 2  x 2 )  2 ( R  x 2 )3 2

0 NiR 2
If there are N turns in the coil then B 
2 ( R 2  x 2 )3 2
The direction of magnetic field on the axis will be along the axis and away of the centre, if the directions seen
in the coil is in anticlockwise sense and vice-versa.
Bmax
R R
 0 Ni  A B
For centre, x  0 ; B   
 2R  P Q
Re
Field

sul

In the figure points P and Q are the points of inflexion,

tan

B
t

 d 2 B   A
fie

 2   0  , the magnetic field varies linearly with

ld

 dx   x
–(R/2) O +(R/2) R
distance near these points. This fact is used to produce
uniform magnetic field. For this two identical coils The magnetic field due to the coil can also be expressed

(connected in series) carrying the same current in the as,  m
NOTE

2M
B 0
same direction are placed exactly parallel to each other 4p ( R 2  x 2 )3/ 2
such that their separation, is equal to the radius R. A
Where M = Ni(pR ) is a magnetic moment of the coil.
2

set of such two coils is named as Helmholtz coils and

is used in Helmholtz Galvanometer.
 6 Moving Charges and Magnetism
MAGNETIC FIELD INDUCTION DUE TO A CURRENT CARRYING ARC AT ITS CENTRE
Magnetic field induction at the centre due to the element,

 0 i dl  r
dB 
4 r3
0 i dl r sin 900
dB  a
4 r3
0 i dl

4 r 2
Therefore the net magnetic field induction due to the complete arc,
 i  i
B   dB  0 2  dl  0 2 r
4 r 4 r
0 i
B  (where  must be in radian)
4 r
If current in the arc is in clockwise sense, then the direction of magnetic field at centre will be perpendicular
to the plane of arc and inward ( Type) and vice-versa.

0 i
For complete loop,  = 2 ; therefore B  .
2r
0 i
For semi-circle,  =  ; therefore B  .
4r

Find magnetic field induction due to a circular coil connected to a cell, at its centre.

The net magnetic induction at the centre due to the two arcs ABC and ADC is,
B = B1 – B2
0 i1  (i  i1 )
   0  (2   ) [ is expressed in radian]
4 r 4 r
0  i1 (i  i1 )  B

4 r  r
(2   )  ...(i)
 
Since the potential difference across both the segments is same,
therefore, i1R1 = (i – i1)R2.
Where R1 and R2 are the resistances of the two segments.
q
If l1 and l2 are the lengths of the two segments, then, A C
R1  l1 ; R2  l2 (Since  and A are same)
D
 i1l1 = (i – i1)l2 ; i1 r = (i – i1) r (2 – )
Putting in equation (i) we get, B = 0.
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 7

Find magnetic field induction at the centre due to the current carrying wire frame as shown in the figure.

B
In figure, magnetic field induction at the centre will be the vector sum of the
fields due to the four individual parts. A
B2 = B4 = 0 (point along the length) f
Since the direction of the magnetic field induction due to the two curved C
parts 1 and 3 is same and perpendicularly inward, therefore, O D
0 i  i E
Bnet  B1  B3  (2   )  0 
4 a 4 b
0i  2    
Bnet    
4  a b

01 (1) 2R (2) 3R/2

(3) 2R (4) R/2
1. When equal current is passed through two coils, equal 5. A cube made of wires of equal length is connected to a
magnetic field is produced at their centres. If the ratio battery as shown in the figure. The magnetic field at
of number of turns in the coils is 8 : 15, then the ratio of the centre of the cube is:
their radii will be;
(1) 1 : 1 (2) 15 : 8
(3) 8 : 15 (4) 1 : 2
2. A current ‘i’ flows in a thin wire in the shape of a regular
polygon with ‘n’ sides. The magnetic induction at the
centre of the polygon when n   is; (R is the radius
of its Circumcircle) 12 0i 6 0i
(1) 2 L (2) 2 L
0 ni  0 ni 
(1) tan (2) tan
2R 6 2R n 6 0i
(3) (4) zero
L
 0i
(3) (4) zero 6. A current of ‘i’ ampere is flowing in an equilateral
2R
triangle of side ‘a’. The magnetic induction at the
3. A uniform circular wire loop is connected to the centroid will be;
terminals of a battery. The magnetic field induction at
the centre due to ABC portion of the wire will be; (length 0i 5 2  0i
(1) 3 3 a (2)
of ABC = l1, length of ADC=l2) 3 a
9  0i 3  0i
(3) (4)
2 a 2 a
7. The magnetic induction at the centre O in the figure
shown is;

0 il1l2 0 il2
(1) (2) R2
2 R (l1  l2 ) 2 2R 2 (l1  l2 )
R1
O
 0 i (l1  l2 )
(3) (4) zero  0i  1 1   0i  1 1 
2 R l1l2      
(1) (2)
4  R1 R21  4  R1 R21 
4. The radius of a circular current carrying coil is R. At
what distance from the centre of the coil on its axis, the  0i  0i
(3) ( R1  R2 ) (4) ( R1  R2 )
intensity of magnetic field will be 1/(2 2) times that at 4 4
the centre ?
 8 Moving Charges and Magnetism
8. The magnetic inductino at the centre O is;
BY BY
I (1) 1 (2) 2
BX BX

a BY 1 BY 1
O (3)  (4) 
b BX 2 BX 4

 0i 0i 30i 0i 10. In a bent wire shown in figure, a current I is passed. Find
(1)   (2)   the value of B at the common centre;
2a 2b 8a 8b
b
30i 0i 30i 0i a
(3)   (4)  
8a 8b 8a 8b
9. Two circular coils X and Y have equal number of turns
and carry equal currents in the same sense and subtend
same solid angle at point O. If the smaller coil X is 0 I(b  a)(2  )  0 Ia (2  )
(1) (2)
midway between O and Y, then if we represent the 4ab 4b
magnetic induction due to bigger coil Y at O as BY and
 0 Ia (2  ) 0Iab
that due to smaller coil X at O as BX. (3) (4)
Y 4b 4
X
d
O

4.7 P.No.: 147

 The line integral of the magnetic induction, around any closed path, is equal to µ0 times the net current across
the area bounded by this path. It is called Ampere’s circuital law also named as Ampere’s law. It plays the
same role in magnetostatics that Gauss’ law plays in electrostatics.
 
  dl  0i
B
In Ampere’s law the magnetic field B is due to the currents,
NOTE

Where ‘i’ is the algebraic sum of the currents enclosed by the loop as well as, present outside the loop.
If the current enclosed is not perpendicular to the plane
enclosed within the loop and normal to the
of loop, then we consider the component of current density
plane of the loop. Ampere’s law is a perpendicular to the plane of loop.
fundamental law, it is applicable for the
closed loops only, which may be real or imaginary but they must be planar. The loop may have any shape or
size.

 If the direction of dl on the loop is taken in anticlockwise sense, then the current normal to the plane and
coming out of the plane is considered positive while the current flowing into the plane as negative and if the

dl is in the clockwise sense then the current normal to the plane and flowing into the plane is considered positive
and other coming out of the plane as negative.

Applications of Ampere’s Law


 Like Gauss’s law Ampere’s law can be used to compute B in case where by symmetry, we can see that has
 
the same magnitude at all points of a closed curve of simple shape so that the line integral 
 B  dl is easily
evaluated.
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 9
Magnetic field induction due to an infinitely long current carrying wire
 
 Applying Ampere’s circuital law, 
dl B
 B  dl  0i. Line of force
(Ampere's loop) B
Since it is taken in anticlockwise sense, therefore dl
i r r
the current normal to the plane of the loop and
B i Line of
coming out of the loop is considered positive. force
Therefore, dl
B dl
 B dl cos   i0
Top view

B
 dl  0i
 B 2 r  0 i


0 i
B
2π r

4.8 P.No.: 151

4.8.1 P.No.: 151

 Let us consider a closed rectangular path ‘abcd’ in which the side ‘ab’ is parallel to the axis of the solenoid
and sides ‘bc’ and ‘da’ are very long so that side ‘cd’ is very far from the solenoid and the field at this side
is negligibly small.

 A nearly uniform magnetic field can be produced using solenoids. A solenoid is a helical winding of a conducting
wire with neighbouring turns closely spaced (figure). When a current is passed through it, the resulting magnetic
field is the vector sum of the fields produced by neighbouring turns as shown in the figure. The wire is coated
with an insulating material, so that the current flows along the length of the wires only, even when the successive
turns touch each other. From the figure we see that the field within the solenoid is nearly uniform. At a point
in between the turns on the surface of the solenoid the field is zero. The field at any point outside the solenoid
is zero since at this point the field due to the upper part of the solenoid is nearly cancelled by the field due
to the lower part of the solenoid. As the successive turns become closer and closer the magnetic field produced
approaches that produced by a bar magnet.
Applying Ampere’s law to the rectangular path ‘abcd’,
 
  dl  0 nli
B
where ‘n’ is the number of turns per unit length and
‘l’ is the length of the side ‘cd’,
b
  c   d   a  
a
  dl   B  dl   B  dl   B  dl  0 nli
B
b c d
c
  a  
but  B  dl   B  dl  0
b d
 10 Moving Charges and Magnetism
 
(Because along bc and da, B is at right angles to dl ) c d
dl l dl
d
  
and   dl  0 as B is zero at far off point.
c
B

Therefore we get, b  a
b
  b b dl
 B  dl  0 n l i   Bdl cos 0  0 nl i  B  dl  0 nl i
a a a

Bl  0 nli  B  0 ni

4.8.2 P.No.: 152


ds
 One can think of a toroid as a solenoid wrapped around with its ends connected. 
Thus, the magnetic field is completely confined inside the toroid and the field I B
a
points in the azimuthal direction (clockwise due to the way the current flows, r
as shown in figure.)
I
 The toroid consists of N turns which are closely spaced. Magnetic field lines b
are in the form of closed rings as shown by the dotted circle (Ampere’s loop).
Applying Ampere’s law, A toroid with N turns
  dl B If the toroid is thin, such that
 B  dl  0 (iN ) a  b  c = R (say) then the
r b number of turns per unit length.
 B dl cos 0  0 Ni
0
a N
n
2p R
B 2 r  0 Ni B = µ0 ni
 N  Thus for a thin toroid the field
B  0   i (for a  r  b) may be approximated as uniform.
 2 r 

MAGNETIC INDUCTION DUE TO AN INFINITELY LONG CYLINDRICAL WIRE WITH

THE HELP OF AMPERE’S LAW
The current is symmetrically distributed over its cross section.
Case-1
Field inside the wire (r < R),
Considering an Ampere’s loop of radius ‘r’. R  dx
  dl
Applying Ampere’s circuital law,  
 B  dl  0i ' B x
R 
where i' is the current enclosed within the loop,  B
dl
 Bdl cos 0  0 i '  B  dl  0i '
0
r

B  2 r   0i '
Top view
If the current density is uniform, then, i' = j r2.
0 jπ r 2 
B
Therefore, r  R   Br  R  0 jr
2π r 2
   
In vector form, Br  R  0 ( j  r )
 2
where r is the position vector of the point with respect
to the axis of the cylinder.
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 11
 On the axis of cylinder, r = 0. So, Baxis = 0. B
dl
0
 On the surface of cylinder, r = R. So, Bsurface = jR .
2 r
Case-2
R
Field on or outside the cylinder (r  R)
Applying Ampere’s circuital law for the loop of radius ‘r’,
 
  dl  0i (where ‘i’ is the net current through the cylinder)
B
B dl B
 i
B
 dl  0i  B r  0i  Br  R  0 Bmaxi
inside
2 r
If the current density is uniform then, i = j (R2). outside

0 j  R 2  jR 2
Therefore, Br  R  or Br  R  0
2 r 2 r
 
 0 R 2 j  r
In vector form, Br  R  r = R distance
2 r2 Variation of B with r.

MAGNETIC FIELD INDUCTION DUE TO A MOVING CHARGE

 A static charge produces electric field only, while a moving charge produces the electric as well as the magnetic
field induction.
 Suppose we have an infinitesimal current element in the form of a cylinder of cross-sectional area A and length
ds consisting of n charge carriers per unit volume, all moving at a common velocity v along the axis of the
cylinder. Let I be the current in the element, which we define as the amount of charge passing through any
cross-section of the cylinder per unit time. We see that the current I can be written as

nAq | v |  I
 The total number of charge carriers in the current element is simply dN = nAds, so that the magnetic field

dB due to the dN charge carriers is given by
 µ0 (nAq | v |)ds  rˆ µ0 (nAds )qv  rˆ µ0 (dN )qv  rˆ
dB   
4 r2 4 r2 4 r2
where r is the distance between the charge and the field point P, 
 v
r
the unit vector rˆ  points from the source of the field (the charge)
r
to P. The differential length vector is defined to be parallel to v . In q

case of a single charge, dN = 1, the above equation becomes q r P
 µ qv  rˆ
B 0
4 r 2
 Electric field produced at the same point, at the same instant by the moving charge is given by

1 q
E
4 0 r 2

B 1
Therefore,  0 0 v sin  but c
E  0 0
 12 Moving Charges and Magnetism

1
or 0 0  (where ‘c’ is the speed of light in vacuum) Electric field and magnetic field

NOTE
c2 produced by moving charge at any
instant are always perpendicular
B v sin  to each other.
Hence  . Therefore B  E.
E c2

Find magnetic field induction due to a circulating charge

v +q
w
Magnetic field induction at the centre O produced by a
r
circulating point charge, is given by r
  
 q (v  r ) O
B0  0
4 r3
 qv r sin 90
B0  0
4 r3
0 q v 0 q
B0  2 or B0  (v = r)
4 r 4 r

Find magnetic field induction on the axis of a spinning charged ring

The moving charge caused by the rotation of the ring constitutes the current is given by,

i  ƒq  q
2
If the linear charge density of the ring is  then,
q  (2 R )

Hence i 2 R   R
2
This problem reduces to, B at a point on the axis of a w
circular coil carrying current ‘i’, therefore,
q(l)
0 iR 2 0  R R 2
B 
2 ( R 2  x 2 )3 2 2 ( R 2  x 2 )3 2
x P
0 R 3 R
B
2 ( R  x 2 )3 2
2

0
For the centre of the ring, x = 0, therefore B  .
2

4.10.2 P.No.: 160

The magnetic induction produced by a small current loop is similar to that of a bar magnet, therefore a current
carrying planar loop behaves like a magnetic dipole.
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 13
A loop as a magnet
 The pattern of the magnetic field is comparable with the magnetic field produced by a bar magnet.

I
S N
B

II I
 The side I (the side from which it emerges out) of the loop acts as ‘NORTH POLE’ and side II (the side
in which it enters) acts as the ‘SOUTH POLE’. It can be verified by studying force on one loop due to a
magnet or a loop.

F
I
F The loop and The two loops
S N the magnet attract each
B B attract each other.
other
S N S N S N

MATHEMATICALLY
M
0 NIR 2 2
    IN  R 
Baxis   2 0    for x  R N
2( R 2  x 2 )3/ 2  4   x
3

 m
It is similar to Baxis due to magnet  2  0  3 S
 4  x S
Magnetic dipole moment of the loop
M = INR2
N
M = INA for any other shaped loop.
Unit of M is Amp . m2. M
Unit of m (pole strength) = Amp . m ( in magnet M = ml)
 The magnetic dipole moment (magnetic moment) of a flat (planar) current i
loop is defined as the product of the current and the area enclosed by it.
A
i.e. M = iA
If the loop contains N turns, then, M = NiA.
 
In vector form, M  Ni A .

 In the loop if the current is in the anticlockwise sense, then the area vector A (hence the magnetic moment)
is normal to the plane of loop and outward. If the current in the loop is in clockwise sense, then the direction
of area vector (hence the magnetic moment) is normal to the plane of loop and into the plane.
w
MAGNETIC MOMENT OF A CIRCULATING POINT CHARGE + +q (m)
 Rate of flow of charge (current) through any point, i = ƒq. r
where ‘ƒ’ is frequency of revolution and ƒ =  / 2.
 The circulating charge is equivalent to a circular current carrying
loop and its magnetic moment is given by,
 14 Moving Charges and Magnetism

  1
M  iA  ƒ q r 2   2
 q r    q r
2

 2   2

RELATION BETWEEN MAGNETIC MOMENT & ANGULAR MOMENTUM OF

CIRCULATING CHARGE
 For a point charge- w

1 + +q (m)
2
Magnetic moment, M  q r ...(i) r
2
2
Angular momentum, L  I   L  mr  ...(ii)
 From equations (i) and (ii), we get
M q q    q 
 or M    L or M   L This formula is applicable not only for a point
L 2m

NOTE
 2m   2m  charge but also for distributed charges, but the
 The direction of the magnetic moment is in the nature of distribution of charge and that of
direction of the angular momentum if the charge is mass should be identical.
positive and if the charge is negative, then the magnetic moment will be in the direction opposite to that of
angular momentum.
02 point lying in the straight line AC where magnetic
field is zero, is given by;
11. A charge ‘q’ describes a circular orbit of radius R
A B C
with a uniform speed ‘v’. The magnetic field at the
centre is; i i 2i

0 qv 0 qv 5 cm 5 cm
(1) (2) (1) between A & B at a distance of 3.2 cm from B.
2R 8R
(2) between B & C at a distance of 3.2 cm from A.
0 qv 0 qv (3) between A & B at a distance of 3.2 cm from A.
(3) (4)
4R 2 2R 2 (4) between B & C at a distance of 1.3 cm from B.
12. If an electron revolves around a nucleus in a circular 16. A wire is drawn as shown in the figure and carries a
orbit of radius R with frequency ‘n’, then the magnetic current ‘i’ The magnetic field at the centre O of the
field produced at the centre of the nucleus will be circular part has;
0en 0en i
(1) (2)
2R 4R R
O
40en 40e
(3) (4) i i
R Rn
13. In a toroid the number of turns per unit length is (1) its magnitude 0i (1  1/  ) / 2 R .
1000 and current through it is (1/4) ampere. The (2) its magnitude 0i (1  1/  ) / 2 R .
magnetic field produced inside (in weber/m2) will bel
(3) its direction inward.
(1) 10 –2 (2) 10 –3
–4
(4) its direction outward.
(3) 10 (4) 10 –7
Y 17. A current ‘i’ flows along the length of an infinitely
14. Two long straight conductors with long, straight, thin-walled pipe. Then;
i2
currents i1 and i2 are placed along
(1) The magnetic field at all points inside the pipe
X and Y axes. The equation of X is the same, but not zero.
locus of points of zero magnetic (0,0) i1
(2) The magnetic field at any point inside the pipe
induction is; is zero.
(1) y=x (2) y = i2x/i1 (3) The magnetic field is zero only on the axis of
the pipe.
(3) y = i1x/i2 (4) y = x/i1 i2
(4) The magnetic field is different at different points
15. Three infinitely long conductors A, B and C carrying inside the pipe.
current as shown in the figure. The position of the
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 15

18. The resistances of three parts is M, then the resultant magnetic moment of the two
of a circular loop are as shown R B coils will be;
in the figure. The magnetic O
2R (1) M (2) 2 M
field at the centre O is; 1200
I (3) 3M (4)
120
0
2M
0I 0I R C 20. A thin disc of radius R and mass M has charge ‘q’
(1) (2)
6a 3a uniformly distributed on it. It rotates with angular
velocity . The ratio of magnetic moment and angular
2 0 I
(3) (4) zero momentum for the disc is;
3 a (1) q/2M (2) R/2M
19. If the planes of two identical concentric coils are (3) q2/2M (4) 2M/q
perpendicular and the magnetic moment of each coil

4.2 P.No.: 134

 A moving charged particle in an external magnetic field experiences a

v sin q
force and this force is given by v
  
F  q (v  B )  F  qvB sin   F  q(v sin  ) B  F  qv( B sin  )
 Thus the force is equal to the product of the magnitude of charge, magnitude
of the field vector and magnitude of the component of the velocity
perpendicular to the field or is equal to the product of the magnitude of +q q v cos q
charge, magnitude of velocity and the magnitude of component of the field
Moving charge B
perpendicular to the velocity vector.

The direction of the force is perpendicular to both the velocity of the particle and to the
NOTE

magnetic field thus always is a sideways force. It will be in the direction (v × B), if the
charge is positive and opposite to (v × B) if the charge is negative.

Magnetic forces do not work

 The work done by the magnetic force on a moving charge is zero since the displacement (velocity) is always
perpendicular to the force,
        
W   F  ds   F  v dt   (qv  B)  v dt  0 (Since v  B  v  [ v B v ]  0 )
By work energy theorem,
1 2
Wnet = change in K.E. (K); 0 = K ; K  mv  constant
2
Hence the magnetic force can only change the direction of the charged particle’s velocity vector, but it cannot
change the speed or kinetic energy.

Noticeable Facts
 
 The magnetic force F acting on a charged particle vanishes if (i) v = 0, (ii) B = 0, or (iii) v and B are either
parallel or antiparallel ( = 0° or 180°).

4.2.2 Magnetic Field, Lorentz Force P.No.: 134

 If a charged particle moves through a region in which both an electric field and a magnetic field are present,
the resultant force is given by
   
F  qE  q(v  B )
 16 Moving Charges and Magnetism

 The relation is known as Lorentz relation and F as Lorentz force.
 If the Lorentz force on a charged particle is zero in a region where E and B are not zero, then,
   
qE  q(v  B)  0
    mv p 2mK
E  v  B  0 R   
  qB 
qB qB
 Thus if the condition E  B  v is satisfied then the charged particle moves undeviated.
  
 If vector B, v and E all the three are co-linear then the magnetic force on the charged particle will be zero
and only electric force will act so the acceleration of the particle,

 qE
a
m
Hence the particle will pass through the field following a straight line path parallel to the field with the change
only in the magnitude of the velocity.

Right Hand Rules for Determining the Direction of the Magnetic Force Acting on a Moving Charged particle
 
 Figure reviews to right–hand rules for determining the direction of the cross product v  B and determining

the direction of FB . The rule in Figure depends on our right-hand rule for the cross product. Point the four
 
fingers of your right hand along the direction of v with the palm facing B and curl them toward B . The extended
  
thumb, which is at a right angle to the fingers, points in the direction of v  B . Then F is in the direction of
your thumb if q is positive and opposite to the direction of your thumb if q is negative.
 
FB B


v

v


FB

B (a) (b)

 An alternative rule is shown in figure (b). Here the thumb points in the direction of v and the extended fingers
 
in the direction of B . Now, the force FB on a positive charge extends outward from your palm. The advantage
of this rule is that the force on the charge is in the direction that you would push on something with your hand
outward from your palm. The force on a negative charge is in the opposite direction.

4.3 P.No.: 137

Case - 1
 If the particle enters the field at an angle 90°.
In this case, the particle moves on a circular path and the magnetic
force on the charge particle provides it the necessary centripetal
force for circular motion. Therefore,
Moving Charges and Magnetism 17

mv 2
F
R
mv 2
qvB 
R R
F
mv p
 R  ...(i) v
qB qB q(m)
where R is the radius of circular path and p is its linear momentum.
Now if K is the kinetic energy of particle, then
1 2K
K  mv 2  v 
2 m
2mK
So, from eqs. (i), R 
qB
mv p 2mK
Hence, R   
qB qB qB
v qB Thus the time period is independent of the speed of
 Angular speed of the particle,     
NOTE

r m the particle and the radius of the circular path, and

2 r 2 m it depends on the field B and the specific charge
 Time period of the motion, T  T  (q/m) of the charged particle.
v qB
Case - 2
 If the charged particle enters the field at an angle other than 0°, 90° or 180°, then its velocity can be resolved
along and perpendicular to the field.
 The particle moves with constant velocity v cos  along the field (as no magnetic) force acts on it and simultaneously,
it is also moving with velocity v sin  perpendicular to the field due to which it will describe a circular motion
for which the centripetal force is provided by the magnetic force as,
m(v sin  )2
q (v sin  ) B 
r y
mv sin 
r (where ‘r’ is the radius of the circular path)
qB
v sin 

2 r v
Time period of the circular motion, T 
v sin   r
v c os B

2  mv sin   2 m x
=  T 
v sin   qB  qB
The linear distance moved by the particle along the direction z
of magnetic field in one rotation.
P = (v cos ) T
2 m 2 mv cos
 (v cos  ) 
qB qB
2   component of linear momentum parallel to the field 
P
qB
 18 Moving Charges and Magnetism

A charged particle enters a magnetic induction at the point A and leaves it at B as shown in the figure. To
calculate the leaving angle  and distance AB.

Since the path inside the field is a circle therefore the normals drawn
to the velocities will meet at the centre. From the geometry of the figure. 900 B
 = 45° and AB = 2r sin 45°
450
r 2 O
450
2 (mv )

qB 900 A
Since it completes a quarter circle in the field therefore the time for the 450
motion in the field will be
T 2 m
t 
4 4qB 3/2
0
45
m
t O
2qB 450
If the direction of the field is reversed, then the angle subtended by the path
at O will be 3/2. Hence the time for which the particle is in the field, will be,
3 3 2 m
t'  T 
4 4 qB

DEFLECTION OF A CHARGED PARTICLE IN A FIELD OF FINITE WIDTH

The angle between the two tangents is equal to the angle between
thetwo normals. Therefore the angular deflection  from the A
0
triangle OPB is given by 90
d  900 B
sin    
r 90 0

 mv 
where ‘r’ is radius of circular path in the magnetic field r   . O
 qB 
d

What should be the speed of charged particle so that it can’t collide with the upper wall? Also find the coordinate
of the point where the particle strikes the lower plate in the limiting case of velocity.
y
wall

q, m d
B v

(0, 0)
x
Moving Charges and Magnetism 19

(i) The path of the particle will be circular larger the R3

v'
velocity, larger will be the radius. For particle not
to strike R < d

C3 C2 C1
mv qBd
 d v
qB m

qBd
(ii) For limiting case v 
m
R = d
 Coordinates of the point where the particle strikes = (– 2d, 0, 0) 2d

A particle of mass m and charge q is released from the origin in a region occupied by electric field E and magnetic
field B,
B  B0 ˆj , E  E0iˆ
Find the speed of the particle.

Since the magnetic field does not perform any work, therefore, whatever has been gained in kinetic energy
it is only because of the work done by electric field. Applying work energy theorem.
WE = K
1 2qE0
qE0  mv 2  0 or v
2 m

12 P.No.-137
 The magnetic field induction B set up by the moving charge q1 at the location of charge q2, at any instant
is given by
  q v  r
B1  0 1 1 3
4 r

where r is the instantaneous position vector of the charge q2 w.r.t. charge q1.
 v2
The magnetic force Fm on the charge q2 is given by,,
q2
   v1
Fm  q2 (v2  B1 )  B1
r
   q1
  q (v  r ) 0 q1q2   
3  2
Fm  q2 v2  0 1 13  v  (v1  r )
4 r 4 r
0 q1q2  qq
Fm  3
v1v2 r sin   Fm  0 1 2 2 v1v2 sin 
4 r 4 r
The electrical force at the same instant between the two charged particles is given by,
1 q1q2
FE 
4 0 r 2
 20 Moving Charges and Magnetism
Comparing the magnetic and the electrical forces between the two charges,
Fm F vv
 0 0 v1v2 sin   m  1 22 sin 
FE FE c

1
where c  is the speed of light in vacuum.
0 0

Fm v1v2
If  = 90° then, F  c 2
E

Therefore at any instant the magnetic force between two moving charges is much smaller than the electric
force between them.

4.4 P.No.: 140

4.4.1 P.No.: 140

 By combining the two fields, particles which move with a certain velocity can be selected. This was the principle
used by J.J. Thomson to measure the charge-to-mass ratio of the electrons. In figure the schematic diagram
of Thomson’s apparatus is depicted.
 The electrons with charge q = – e and mass m are emitted from the cathode C and then accelerated toward
slit A. Let the potential difference between A and C be VA – VC = V. The change in potential energy is
equal to external work done in accelerating the electrons :
U = Wext = qV = – eV. +
By energy conservation,
the kinetic energy gained is A + + + + + + + ++
C × × × × × × × × × ×
mv 2 – × × × × × × × × × ×
K = – U = .  × × × × × × × × × ×
2 v × × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × × ×
Thus, the speed of the
electrons is given by

2eV
v
m
 If the electrons further pass through a region where there exists a downward uniform electric field, the electrons,
being negatively charged, will be deflected upward. However, if in addition to the electric field, a magnetic
field directed into the page is also applied, then the electrons will experience an additional downward magnetic
 
force  ev  B . When the two forces exactly cancel, the electrons will move in a straight path. From equation,
we see that when the condition for the cancellation of the two forces is given by eE = evB. Which implies
E
v
B
E
 In other words, only those particles with speed v  will be able to move in a straight line. Combining the
B
e E2
two equations, we obtain 
m 2(V ) B 2
 By measuring, E, V and B, the charge-to-mass ratio can be readily determined. The most precise measurement
to date is e/m = 1.758820174 × 1011 C/kg.
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 21
the proton deviates from the initial direction of its
03 motion is;
v
21. A proton, a deuteron and an -particle having the

same kinetic energy are moving in circular trajectories B
in a constant magnetic field. If rp, rd and r denote
respectively the radii of the trajectories of these +e
particles, then;
(1) r = rp < rd (2) r > rd > rp d=10cm
(3) r = rd > rp (4) rp = rd = r (1) 15° (2) 30°
22. A charged particle moves in a gravity free space where (3) 45° (4) 60°

an electric field of strength E and a magnetic field 26. A proton moves with a speed of 5.0 × 106 ms–1 along
 the x-axis. It enters a region where there is a magnetic
of induction B exist. Which of the following field of magnitude 2.0 tesla directed at an angle of 30º
statement(s) is/are correct? to the x-axis and lying in the xy plane. The magnitude
 
(1) If E  0 and B  0 , velocity of the particle of the magnetic force on the proton is
remains constant. (1) 0.8 × 10–13 N (2) 1.6 × 10–13 N
 (3) 4.0 × 10–13 N (4) 8.0 × 10–13 N
(2) If E  0 , particle can not trace a circular path.
 27. A proton is travelling along the X-direction with
(3) If E  0 , kinetic energy of the particle remains velocity 5 × 10 6 m s –1 . The magnit ude of force
constant. experienced by the proton in a magnetic field
(4) None of these. 
B  (0.2iˆ  0.4kˆ) tesla is :
23. A charged particle ‘q’ enters a region of uniform
(1) 3.2 × 10–13 N (2) 5.3 × 10–13 N
B (out of the page) and is deflected by a distance ‘d’ 13
(3) 3.2 × 10 N (4) 6.3 × 10–13 N
af te r travell in g a ho rizon ta l dist anc e ‘a ’. T he
magnitude of the momentum of the particle is; 28. A charged particle is projected along the direction of
uniform magnetic field, then its velocity

qB  a 2  B (1) increases (2) decreases
(1)  d
2 d  d (3) remains unchanged (4) none of these
(2) qBa/2 29. A electron moves with a speed of 2 × 105 m/s along the
(3) zero a 
positive x-direction in a magnetic field B  (iˆ  4 ˆj  3kˆ)
(4) not possible to be determined as it keeps changing.
24. H+, He+ and O++ all having the same kinetic energy tesla. The magnitude of the force (in Newton)
pass through a region in which there is a uniform experienced by the electron is
magnetic field perpendicular to their velocity. The (1) 1.18 × 10–13 (2) 1.28 × 10–13
masses of H+, He+ and O2+ are 1 amu, 4 and 16 (3) 1.6 × 10 –13
(4) 1.72 × 10–13
amu respectively. The; 30. A proton, a deuteron and an -particle are projected
(1) H+ will be deflected most. perpendicular to the direction of a uniform magnetic
(2) O2+ will be deflected most. field with same kinetic energy. The ratio of the radii of
(3) He+ and O2+ will be deflected equally. the circular paths described by them is
(4) All will be deflected equally. (1) 1: 2 : 2 (2) 1: 2 :1
25. A proton accelerated by a potential difference 500
KV moves though a transverse magnetic field of 0.51 (3) 2 : 2 :1 (4) 2 :1:1
T as shown in the figure. The angle  through which

4.2.3 P.No.: 135


 We have just seen that a charged particle moving through a magnetic field experiences a magnetic force FB .
Since electric current consists of a collection of charged particles in motion, when placed in a magnetic field,
a current-carrying wire will also experience a magnetic force.
 22 Moving Charges and Magnetism
DERIVATION
 To calculate the force exerted on the wire, consider a segment of wire of length
A
l and cross-sectional area A, as shown in Figure. The magnetic field points into × × × × × ×
the page, and is represented with crosses (X). × × × × × ×

The charges move at an average drift velocity vd . Since the total amount of × × × × × ×
× × l v
× d ×
B × ×
charge in this segment is QTotal  q(nAl ), where n is the number of charges per FB
× × × q× × ×
unit volume, the total magnetic force on the segment is × × × × × ×
      
FB  Qtotal vd  B  qnAl (vd  B)  I (l  B) × × × × × ×

where I is nqvdA and l is a length vector directed along the direction of the electric current.

 A current carrying wire placed in a magnetic field experiences a force, and the force acting on a small element
of the wire is given by
  
dF  i (dl  B) or dF  idlB sin 
dl
where  is an angle between the current element q
and the magnetic field induction. B
Net force on the wire, i
 
F   dF =  iB sin  dl
Above formula is always applicable whether the wire be straight or curved and the field be uniform or
non-uniform.

q
1. If the wire is straight and the magnetic field
induction is uniform, 
i B
dF  idlB sin 
or F   dF  iB sin   dl
F  ilB sin 
Where ‘l’ is length of the wire. The direction of the force will be in the direction
NOTE

    
In vector form, F  i (l  B) (dl × B) of or it can be obtained with the help of
Fleming’s left hand rule or right hand palm rule.
2. If the magnetic field induction is uniform and
 
wire is not straight ( dl and B are coplanar).
  
dF  i (dl  B ) S
  
F   i (dl  B)
q
dl
B
 
 i  (dl  B ) i
  
F  i  (S  B)
Moving Charges and Magnetism 23
 
where  dl  S If a current carrying conductor in the

NOTE
form of a planar loop of any arbitrary
Thus the magnetic force acting on a current carrying wire of shape is placed in a uniform field,
arbitrary shape placed in a uniform magnetic field induction is then,     
same as would act on straight segment joining the two end points FNet  0 as  dl  S  0
of the wire.

A conducting bar of length l is placed on a frictionless inclined plane

which is tilted at an angle  from the horizontal, as shown in figure. 
A uniform magnetic field is applied in the vertical direction. To prevent the bar B
from sliding down, a voltage source is connected to the ends of the bar with
current flowing through. Determine the magnitude and the direction of the current
such that the bar will remain stationary.

q
s
For equilibrium
IlB cos   mg sin 


mg sin 
I
lB cos

A current (I) carrying circular wire of radius R is placed in a magnetic t

field B perpendicular to its plane. Find the tension T along the I
circumference of the wire. T T cos dq
T sin dq R

For small element portion, dq I

2Td = 2RIBd B
R
T = IRB T sin dq
T T cos dq

4.9 P.No.: 154

 We have already seen that a current-carrying wire produces a magnetic field. In addition, when placed in a
magnetic field, a wire carrying a current will experience a net force. Thus, we expect two current-carrying
wires to exert forces on each other. Consider two parallel wires separated by a distance a and carrying currents
I1 and I2 in the +x-direction, as shown in figure.

B2
l

F21

I1

I2
 24 Moving Charges and Magnetism

 The magnetic force F12 , exerted by wire 2 on wire 1 may be computed as follows. Using the result from the
previous example, the magnetic field lines due to I2 going in the +x-direction are circles concentric with wire
2, with the field pointing in the tangential direction. Thus, at an arbitrary point on wire 1, we have

B2    µ0 I 2 / 2 a  ˆj which points in the direction perpendicular to wire 1, as depicted in figure. Therefore,

    µI
F12  I1l  B2  I 2 (liˆ)    0 2 ˆj    µ0 I1 I 2l kˆ

 2 a  2 a

 Clearly F12 points toward wire 2. The conclusion we can draw from this simple calculation is that two parallel
wires carrying currents in the same direction will attract each other. On the other hand, if the currents flow
in opposite directions, the resultant force will be repulsive.

Definition of Ampere
 This is used to formally define the unit ‘ampere’ of electric current. If two parallel, long wires, kept 1 m
apart in vacuum, carry equal currents in the same direction and there is a force of attraction of 2 × 10–
7 newton per metre of each wire, the current in each wire is said to be 1 ampere.

dF
 2  107 N/m
dl

A long horizontal wire AB, which is free to move in a vertical plane and carries a steady current of 20 A,
is in equilibrium at a height of 0.01 m over another parallel long wire CD which is fixed in a horizontal plane
and carries a steady current of 30 A, as shown in figure. Show that when AB is slightly depressed, it executes
simple harmonic motion. Find the period of oscillation.
A B

C D

Let m be the mass per unit length of wire AB. At a height x about the wire CD, magnetic force per unit length
on wire AB will be given by
µ0i1i2 Fm B I1 = 20A
Fm  (upwards) ...(i)
2 x Fg
X = d = 0.01
Wt. per unit of wire AB is C D I2 = 30A
Fg = mg (downwards)
At x = d, wire is in equilibrium
0 i1i2
i.e., Fm  Fg   mg
2 d
µ0i1i2 mg
  ...(ii)
2 d 2 d
When AB is depressed, x decreases therefore, Fm will increase, while Fg remains the same. Let AB is displaced
by dx downwards. Differentiating equation (i) w.r.t. x, we get
µ0 i1i2
i.e., Fm  Fg   mg ...(iii)
2 d
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 25
i.e., restoring force, Fm  – dx
Hence the motion of wire is simple harmonic. From eqs. (ii) and (iii), we can write
 mg 
dFm     .dx (x = d)
 d 

g
 Acceleration of wire, a      dx
d

dx disp.
Hence period of oscillations, T  2  2
a acc.

d 0.01
 T  2  2
g 9.8
 T = 0.2 s

4.10 P.No.: 157

4.10.1 P.No.: 157

 If the area vector of the loop makes an angle  with the field lines and the torque (moment of couple) acting
on it is given by F' N
Torque () = Force × perpendicular distance,
 = Fb sin  b F
= (ilB) b sin  i N, R
i
= iB (lb) sin  M F q
 b
= iB A sin 
q R
B q
In vector form, b sin q
l
   i O
  i( A  B) F M, P

   A F
 M B
P
or  = MB sin  F'
 A current loop in a magnetic field always tends to turn so that its plane is perpendicular ( = 0) to the field
lines.
This is the required result and from this it is clear that :
 Torque will be minimum ( = 0) when sin  = min = 0, i.e.,  = 0º, i.e. 180º i.e., the plane of the coil
is perpendicular to magnetic field i.e. normal to the coil is collinear with the field [figure (A) and (C)]
 Torque will be maximum (= BINA) when sin  = max = 1, i.e.,  = 90º i.e. the plane of the coil is parallel
to the field i.e. normal to the coil is perpendicular to the field. [figure(B)].
 By analogy with dielectric, magnetic dipole in a field, in case of current–carrying in a field.
  dU
U   M  B with F   and W = MB (1 – cos )
dr
 The values of U and W for different orientations of the coil in the field are shown in figure.
 26 Moving Charges and Magnetism

M A
D C B C D
B B
M

A B C B A
M
B
q = 0° (M is parallel to B) q = 90° (M is parallel to B) q = 180° (M is antiparallel to B)
t = 0 = min t = MB = min t=0
W = 0 = min W = MB W = 2MB = max
U = – MB = min U=0 U = MB = max
Stable equilibrium No equilibrium Unstable equilibrium
(A) (B) (C)
 Instruments such as electric motor, moving coil galvanometer and tangent galvanometers etc. are based
on the fact that a current carrying coil in a uniform magnetic field experiences a torque (or couple).

If a loop from its stable equilibrium position ( = 0) is displaced through an angle  which is very small and
set free then it starts to oscillate and its time period of oscillations can be obtained.

Restoring torque () on the loop,  = MB sin 

or angular acceleration,
Torque (moment of couple)
NOTE
 MB sin 
  is independent of the shape
moment of inertia ( I ) I of the loop.

 MB 
   (If  is very small sinqq)
 I 
Comparing it with the condition of angular SHM.
We get angular frequency,   MB / I

Therefore time period of oscillations, T  2  2 I

 MB

04 (1) 2N, normal to the side towards centre of the

triangle.
31. A wire is bent in the form of an equilateral triangle (2) 2N, normal to the side away from the centre of
of side 100cm and cames a current of 2A. It is placed the triangle.
in a magnetic field of induction 2.0T directed
(3) 4N, normal to the side towards centre of the
perpendicular into the plane of paper. The direction
triangle.
and magnitude of magnetic force acting on each side
(4) 4N, normal to the side away from the centre of
of the triangle will be;
the triangle.
32. A conducting wire bent in the form of a parabola y2
= 2x carries a current i = 2A as shown in the figure.
This wire is placed in a uniform magnetic field

B  4kˆ tesla. The magnetic force on the wire is (in
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 27
newton); 36. A horizontal metal wire is carrying an electric current
y(m) from the north to the south. Using a uniform magnetic
i
field, it is to be prevented from falling under gravity.
A The direction of this magnetic field should be towards the
O (1) north (2) south
2.0 x(m)
B
(3) east (4) west
37. Two long parallel wires separated by 0.1 m carry
currents of 1 A and 2A respectively in opposite
(1) 16iˆ (2) 32iˆ
directions. A third current-carrying wire parallel to both
(3) 32iˆ (4) 16iˆ of them is placed in the same plane such that it feels no
33. A rectangular loop carrying a current ‘i’ is situated net magnetic force. It is placed at a distance of
near a long straight wire such that the wire is parallel (1) 0.5 m from the 1st wire, towards the 2nd wire.
to one of the sides of the loop and is in the plane of (2) 0.2 m from the 1st wire, towards the 2nd wire.
the loop. If steady current 'i' is established in the wire (3) 0.1 m from the 1st wire, away from the 2nd wire.
as shown in the figure,the loop will; (4) 0.2 m from the 1st wire, away from the 2nd wire.
i i 38. Two long current carrying thin wires, both with current
I, are held by insulating threads of length L and are in
equilibrium as shown in the figure, with threads making
an angle  with the vertical. If wires have mass l per
unit length then the value of i\I is (g = gravitational
(1) rotate about an axis parallel to the wire. acceleration)
(2) move away from the wire.
(3) move towards the wire.
(4) remain stationary.  L
34. Two thin long parallel wires separated by a distance
‘ b’ a re c arryin g a cu rre nt ‘ i’ a mp . ea ch . Th e
magnitude of the force per unit length exerted by one I I
wire on the other is; gL gL
(1) 2 tan  (2) tan 
 0i 2
 0i 2 0 0
(1) 2 (2)
b 2b gL gL
(3) tan  (4) 2sin 
 0i 0i 0  0 cos 
(3) (4)
2b 2b2 39. Two parallel wires 1 m apart carry currents of 1 A and 3
35. Two very long, straight, parallel wires carry steady A respectively in opposite directions. The force per
currents ‘i’ and –i respectively. The distance between unit length acting between these two wires is
the wires is ‘d’. At a certain instant of time, a point (1) 6 × 10–7 N m–1 attractive
charge ‘q’ is at a point equidistant from the two wires, (2) 6 × 10–5 N m–1 attractive
in the plane of the wires. Its instantaneous velocity
(3) 6 × 10–7 N m–1 repulsive
‘v’ is perpendicular to this plane. The magnitude of
the force due to the magnetic field acting on the (4) 6 × 10–5 N m–1 repulsive
charge at this instant is; 40. Two straight wires each 10 cm long are parallel to one
another and separated by 2 cm. When the current
0iqv 0iqv
(1) (2) flowing in them is 30 A and 40 A respectively, the force
2d d experienced by either of the wires is
20iqv (1) 1.2 × 10–3 N (2) 12 × 10–3 N
(3) (4) zero
d (3) 11.2 × 10 N–3
(4) 10.2 × 10–3 N

4.11 P.No.: 163

 Galvanometer is represented as follow:

G
 It consists of a pivoted coil placed in the magnetic field of a permanent magnet. Attached to the coil is a
spring. In the equilibrium position, with no current in the coil, the pointer is at zero and spring is relaxed.
 28 Moving Charges and Magnetism
When there is a current in the coil, the magnetic field exerts a torque on the coil that is proportional to
current. As the coil turns, the spring exerts a restoring torque that is proportional to the angular displacement.
Thus, the angular deflection of the coil and pointer is directly proportional to the coil current and the device
can be calibrated to measure current.
 When coil rotates the spring is twisted and it exerts an opposing torque on the coil.
 There is a resistive torque also against motion to damp the motion. Finally in equilibrium
 magnetic =  spring  BINA sin  = C
But by making the magnetic field radial  = 90º.
 BINA = C 

Here, B = magnetic field, A = area of the coil,  current, C = torsional constant, N = number of turns,  =
angle through which the coil rotates.

Current Sensitivity
The ratio of deflection to the current i.e. deflection per unit current is called current sensitivity (CS) of the
 BNA
galvanometer CS  
I C
 Shunt : The small resistance connected in parallel to galvanometer coil, in order to control current flowing
through the galvanometer, is known as shunt.
 Merits of shunt
 To protect the galvanometer coil from burning.
 Any galvanometer can be converted into ammeter of desired range with the help of shunt.
 The range an ammeter can be changed by using shunt resistance of different values.
 Demerits of shunt : Shunt resistance decreases the sensitivity of galvanometer.

AMMETER
 A shunt (small resistance) is connected in parallel with galvanometer to convert it into ammeter. An ideal
ammeter has zero resistance
Ig, Rg

 Ammeter is represented as follow : A G B

S
Whole system is
known as Ammeter

IG, RG
I IG
A A B A A B

I – IG S
If maximum value of current to be measured by ammeter is  then
G . RG = ( – G)S
 G .RG
S =  
G

 G  RG
S= when  >> G.

Moving Charges and Magnetism 29
where,  = Maximum current that can be measured using the given ammeter.
For measuring the current the ammeter is connected in series.
In calculation it is simply a resistance.
Resistance of ammeter A

RG .S
RA = R  S
G

forS << RG   RA = S

What is the value of shunt which passes 10% of the main current through a galvanometer of 99 ohm ?

I Rg Ig
As in figure Rgg = ( – g)S G
  
 99 × =    10  × S
10  
 S = 11 . (I – Ig) S

Find the current in the circuit (a) and (b) and also determine percentage error in measuring the current
through an ammeter.
2 2

10 V 10 V A 0.5 

(a) (b)

10 10
ln (a) I  5A; ln (b) I '  4A
2 2.5
i i'
Percentage error is   100  20%
i
Here we see that due to ammeter the current has reduced. A good ammeter has very low resistance as
compared with other resistors, so that due to its presence in the circuit the current is not affected.

Find the reading of ammeter. Is this the current through 6  ?

3
3 6 A
Req  1  3 
36

Current through battery, I  18  6 A 6

3 18 V 1
So, current through ammeter  6  6  4 A
9
No, it is not the current through the 6  resistor.
 30 Moving Charges and Magnetism
* Ideal ammeter is equivalent to zero resistance wire for calculating potential difference across it is zero.

VOLTMETER
 A high resistance is put in series with galvanometer. It is used to measure potential difference across a
resistor in a circuit.
R
A A B
Whole system is
known as voltmeter
IG , R G R
A V B A G B

V
 For maximum potential difference V  I G  R  I G RG  R   RG
IG
V
If RG  R  RS 
IG
 For measuring the potential difference a voltmeter is connected across that element. (parallel to that element
it measures the potential difference that appears between terminals ‘A’ and ‘B’.)
 For calculation it is simply a resistance
Resistance of voltmeter RV = RG + R  R A V B
VO R
Ig  ; For Ideal voltmeter, R  
Rg  R
A good voltmeter has high value of resistance.
 For calculation purposes the current through the ideal voltmeter is zero.
V V '
 Percentage error in measuring the potential difference by a voltmeter is   100
V

A galvanometer has a resistance of G ohm and range of V volt. Calculate the resistance to be used in series
with it to extend its range to nV volt.

V
Full scale current ig 
G
V
to change its range, V1  (G  RS )ig  nV  (G  RS )  RS  G (n  1)
G

Find potential difference across the resistance 300  in A and B.

200  200 

100 V 300  100 V 300  V

(A) (B)
Moving Charges and Magnetism 31

100
In (A) : Potential difference =  300 = 60 volt
200  300
100 300  600
In (B) : Potential difference =  = 50 volt
300  600 300  600
200 
300  600
We see that by connecting voltmeter the voltage which was to be measured has changed. Such voltmeters
are not good. If its resistance had been very large than 300  then it would not have affected the voltage by
much amount.

CURRENT SENSITIVITY
 The ratio of deflection to the current i.e. deflection per unit current is called current sensitivity (CS) of the
galvanometer, CS  
I
 Shunting a galvanometer decreases its current sensitivity.

A galvanometer with a scale divided into 100 equal divisions, has a current sensitivity of 10 division per mA and
voltage sensitivity of 2 division per mV. What adoptions are required to use it (a) to read 5 A full scale and (b)
1 division per volt ?

 100
Full scale deflection current ig   mA = 10 mA
cs 10
 100
Full scale deflection voltage Vg   mv = 10 mv
vs 2
Vg 50 mV
So galvanometer resistance G  i  10 mA  5 
g

(a) To convert the galvanometer into an ammeter of range 5 A, a resistance of value S  is connected in
parallel with it such that
( – ig ) S = ig G
(5 – 0.01) S = 0.01 × 5
5
S  0.01 
499
(b) To convert the galvanometer into a voltmeter which reads 1 division per volt, i.e. of range 100 V,
V = ig (R + G)
100 = 10 × 10–3 (R + 5)
R = 10000 – 5
R = 9995   9.995 k
 32 Moving Charges and Magnetism

05 (1) 0.35 A (2) 0.4 A

(3) 0.25 A (4) 0.2 A
41. When a current of 5 mA is passed through a
46. In the circuit shown, the galvanometer G of resistance
galvanometer having a coil of resistance 15 , it shows
60  is shunted by a resistance r = 0.02 . The current
full scale deflection. The value of the resistance to be
through R is nearly 1 A. The value of resistance R is
put in series with the galvanometer to convert it into a
nearly
voltmeter of range 0–10 V is
(1) 1.985 × 10 3  (2) 2.045 × 103  r = 0.02 
(3) 2.535 × 10 3  (4) 4.005 × 103 
42. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100  gives
a full scale deflection, when a current of 1 mA is passed R
through it. The value of the resistance, which can
convert this galvanometer into ammeter giving a full 5.0 V
scale deflection for a current of 10 A is: (1) 1.00  (2) 5.00 
(1) 0.01  (2) 2 
(3) 11.0  (4) 60.00 
(3) 0.1  (4) 3 
47. A galvanometer has a resistance of 30  and a current
43. The shunt required to send 10% of the main current
of 0.2 mA gives full scale deflection. How will you
through a moving coil galvanometer of resistance 99
convert this galvanometer into a voltmeter of 0.2 volt
 is
range?
(1) 99  (2) 9.9 
(1) 700  resistance should be connected parallel to
(3) 9  (4) 11 
the galvanometer.
44. The resistance of a galvanometer is 2.5  and it requires
50 mA for full scale deflection. The value of shunt (2) 70  resistance should be connected parallel to
resistance required to convert it into an ammeter of the galvanometer.
range 0 to 5 A is (3) 700  resistance should be connected in series
(1) 2.5 × 10 –2  (2) 0.25 × 10–2  with the galvanometer.
(3) 0.025 × 10  –2
(4) 0.0025 × 10–2  (4) 70  resistance should be connected in series
45. The ammeter, shown in the figure, consists of a 360  with the galvanometer.
coil connected in parallel to a 40  shunt. Find the 48. When the number of turns of the coil is doubled, the
reading of the ammeter. current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer is
164  A doubled whereas the voltage sensit ivity of the
galvanometer
(1) remains the same (2) is halved
+ – (3) is doubled (4) is quadrupled
40 V

4.12 Synopsis
 A static charge produced only electric field and only electric 
direction of the induction bring numerically equal to B .
field can exert a force on it. A moving charge produced 
both electric field and magnetic field can exert force on it. The number of lines of B crossing a given area is referred
A current carrying conductor produces only magnetic field to as themagnetic flux linked with that area. For this reason

and only magnetic field can exert a force on it. B is also called magnetic flux density.
 Magnetic charge (i.e. current), produces a magnetic field.  Magnetic Induction Produced by a Current (Biot-Savart
It can not produce electric field as net charge on a current Law) :
carrying conductor is zero. A magnetic field is detected by The magnetic induction dB produced by an element dl
its action current carrying conductors (or moving charges)  carrying a current I are a distance r is given by :
and magnetic needles (compass). The vector quantity B  
known as MAGNETIC INDUCTION is introduced to
dB   dB 

0 r Id sin   0 r I d   r 
characterise a magnetic field. It is a vector quantity which 4 r2 4 r3
may be defined is term of the force it produces on electric
currents. Lines of magnetic induction may be drawn in the
same way as lines of electric field. The number of line per
unit area crossing a small area perpendicular to the
Moving Charges and Magnetism 33

0 I
B 
4R

 Magnetic Field Due to a Flat Circular Coil Carrying A

Current :
0 NI O
 At its centre B  
here the quantity Id is called as current element strength. 2R
µ = permeability of the medium = µ0µr where
µ0 = permeability of free space N = total number of turns in the coil
µr = relative permeability of the medium (Dimensionless I = current in the coil
quantity). R = Radius of the coil
Unit of µ0 & µ is NA–2 or Hm–1 ;
 0 NIR 2
 0  4  10 7 Hm 1  On the axis B = 32
2 x2  R 2 
 Magnetic Induction Due to a Moving Charge :
N

R x
 qv sin 
dBp  0
4r 2
where x = distance of the point from the centre.
0 NI
It is maximum at the centre BC 
  q  v  r  2R
In vector form it can be written as dB  0
4 r3  Magnetic Induction due to Flat Circular Arc :
 Magnetic Induction Due to a Current Carrying I
Straight Conductor
 Magnetic induction due to a current carrying
straight wire  0 I
 B
 4R
2
I  c
2 6. Magnetic field due to infinite long solid cylindrical
P
11 conductor of radius R
1 0 I 0 Ir
R (i) For r  R : B  (ii) For r < R : B =
2r 2rR 2
0 I I  Magnetic Induction Due to Solenoid
B  cos 1  cos 2   0  sin 1  sin  2 
4R 4R
B = 0 nI , direction along axis.
0 I
If the wire is very long 1  2  0o then , B = where n  number of turns per meter ; I  current
2 R
 Magnetic induction due to a infinity long wire  Magnetic Induction due to Toroid : B = 0 nI

r
I
0 I I
B  R
2R

N
 Magnetic Induction due to semi infinite straight where n = (no. of turns per m)
conductor 2 R
N = total turns R >> r
 34 Moving Charges and Magnetism
 Magnetic Induction due to Current Carrying Sheet So the particle will be either speeding up or speeding down

   
x x x x x x x x x xx x When v B & v  E , motion will be uniformly acceler-
ated in a parabolic path
1    
B  0 I where I = Linear current density (A/m) When v  B & v  E , the particle may more undeflected
2
 Magnetic Induction Due to Thick Sheet E
& undeivated with same uniform speed if v = (This is
P2 B
called as velocity selector condition
P1  Magnetic Force on a Straight Current Carrying Wire :
d x   
JA/m

F  I LB 
I = current in the straight conductor
1 
At point P2 Bout  0 Jd L = length of the conductor in the direction of the current
2 in it
At point P1 Bin  0 Jx 
B = magnetic induction. (Uniform throughout the length
 AMPERES LAW of conductor)
    
 B.d   I where  I = algebraic sum of all the cur- Note : In general force is F   I d   B  
rents.
 MOTION OF A CHARGE IN UNIFORM MAGNETIC
 Magnetic Interaction Force Between Two Parallel Long
FIELD :
 Straight Currents :

1. When v is | | to B : Motion will be in a straight line When two long straight linear conductors are parallel and
 carry a current in each, they magnetically interact with
and F = 0
 each other, one experiences a force.

2. When v is  to B : Motion will be in circular path This force is of :
with radius 1. Repulsion if the currents are anti-parallel (i.e. in op-
posite direction) or
mv qB
R and angular velocity   and F = qvB. 2. Attraction if the currents are parallel (i.e. in the same
qB m direction)
 
3. When v is at  to B : Motion will be helical with This force per unit length on either conductor is given
radius  0 I1I 2
by F = .
mvsin  2mv cos  2 r
Rk  and pitch PH 
qB qB Where r = perpendicular distance between the paral-
and F = qvBsin. lel conductors.
 LORENTZ FORCE :
  Magnetic Torque on a Closed Circuit :
An electric charge ‘q’ moving with a velocity v through a
 When a plane closed current circuit of ‘N’ turns and of
magnetic field of magnetic induction B experiences a force area ‘A’ per turn carrying a current I is placed in uniform
    magnetic field, it experience a zero net force, but experi-
F , given by F  qv  B . There fore, if the change moves     
in a space where both electric and magnetic fields are su- ence a torque given by   NIA  B  M  B = BINA sin

perposed. where A = area vector outward from the face of the cir-
    cuit where the current is anticlockwise,
F = net electromagnetic force on the charge = qE  qv  B

This force is called the Lorentz Force B = magnetic induction of the uniform magnetic field
 MOTION OF CHARGE IN COMBINED ELECTRIC  
FIELD & MAGNETIC FIELD
M = magnetic moment of the current circuit = IN A

    Note : This expression can be used only if B is uniform
When v B & v E , motion will be uniformly accelerated otherwise calculate will be used.
in straight line as Fmagnetic = 0 and Felectrostatic = qE
Moving Charges and Magnetism 35
 Moving Coil Galvanometer :
It consists of a plane coil of many turns suspended in a A
radial magnetic field. When a current is passes in the coil
B
it experiences a torque which produces a twist in the sus-
pension. 1. Magnetic force on a closed loop in a uniform B is
The deflection is directly proportional to the torque zero.
 NIAB = K 2. Force experienced by a wire of any shape is equiva-
lent to force on a wire joining points A & B in a
 K  uniform magnetic field.
I  ;
 NAB 
K = elastic torsional constant of the suspension  Magnetic moment of a rotating charge :
If a charge q is rotating at an angular velocity , its equiva-
K lent current is given as
I = Cq C = Galvanometer Constant
NAB  + + + +q
++ +
+ +
+
+ R +
 Force Experienced by a Magnetic Dipole in a Non-Uni- + +
form Magnetic Field : + +
+ +
+ +
 B ++ +
| F|  M + + +
r qω 2 1 2
where M = magnetic dipole moment.
I= & its magnetic moment is M = I R = qωR .
2π 2
Note : The ratio of magnetic moment to angular momen-
 Force on a Random shaped conductor in a uniform mag- tum of a uniform rotating object which is charged uni-
netic field formly is always a constant. Irrespective of the shape of
conductor M/L = q/2m
 36 Moving Charges and Magnetism

1. A length L of wire carries a steady current I. It is bent 2 q

first to form a circular plane coil of one turn. The same (4) N/amp/metre
r
length is now bent more sharply to give a double loop 7. An infinitely long straight conductor is bent into the
of smaller radius. The magnetic field at the centre caused shape as shown in the figure. It carries a current of i
by the same current is ampere and the radius of the circular loop is r metre.
(1) A quarter of its first value Then the magnetic induction at its centre will be
(2) Unaltered
(3) Four times of its first value r
(4) A half of its first value
O
2. A vertical straight conductor carries a current vertically i
upwards. A point P lies to the east of it at a small
distance and another point Q lies to the west at the 0 2i 0 2i
same distance. The magnetic field at P is (1) (  1) (2) (  1)
4 r 4 r
(1) Greater than at Q (3) Zero (4) Infinite
(2) Same as at Q 8. A current i ampere flows in a circular arc of wire whose
(3) Less than at Q
radius is R, which subtend an angle radian at its centre.
(4) Greater or less than at Q depending upon the
The magnetic induction B at the centre is
strength of the current
3. If a copper rod carries a direct current, the magnetic  0i  0i
field associated with the current will be (1) (2) i R
R 2R /2
(1) Only inside the rod O
(2) Only outside the rod 20i 30i
(3) (4)
(3) Both inside and outside the rod R 8R
(4) Neither inside nor outside the rod 9. A current i ampere flows along the inner conductor of
4. If a long hollow copper pipe carries a direct current, a coaxial cable and returns along the outer conductor
the magnetic field associated with the current will be
of the cable, then the magnetic induction at any point
(1) Only inside the pipe
outside the conductor at a distance r metre from the
(2) Only outside the pipe
axis is
(3) Neither inside nor outside the pipe
(4) Both inside and outside the pipe (1)  (2) Zero
 0 2i 0 2 i
5. The magnetic field dB due to a small current element
  (3)
4 r
(4)
4 r
dl at a distance r and element carrying current i is,
or Vector form of Biot-savart’s law is 10. A straight section PQ of a circuit lies along the X-axis
 
 0  dl  r   0 2  dl  r 
a a
from x   to x  and carries a steady current i. The
(1) dB  i   (2) dB  i   2 2
4  r  4  r  magnetic field due to the section PQ at a point X = + a
   
 0 2  dl  r   0  dl  r  will be
(3) dB  4 i  r 2  (4) dB  4 i  r 3  (1) Proportional to a (2) Proportional to a 2
   
6. A charge q coulomb moves in a circle at n revolutions (3) Proportional to 1/a (4) Zero
per second and the radius of the circle is r metre. Then 11. A proton moving with a constant velocity passes
magnetic field at the centre of the circle is through a region of space without any change in its
 
2 q velocity. If E and B represent the electric and magnetic
(1)  107 N/amp/metre
nr fields respectively, then this region of space may have
2 q
(2)  107 N/amp/metre (1) E = 0, B = 0 (2) E  0, B  0
r
2 nq (3) E  0, B  0 (4) E  0, B  0
(3)  107 N/amp/metre
r
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 37
12. A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field (1) In the direction of field
are produced, pointed in the same direction. An electron (2) In the direction opposite to that field
is projected with its velocity pointing in the same (3) In the direction perpendicular to both the field
direction and its velocity
(1) The electron will turn to its right (4) None of the above
(2) The electron will turn to its left 19. If the direction of the initial velocity of the charged
(3) The electron velocity will increase in magnitude particle is perpendicular to the magnetic field, then the
(4) The electron velocity will decrease in magnitude orbit will be
13. Two particles X and Y having equal charges, after OR
being accel erated through the same potential The path executed by a charged particle whose motion
difference, enter a region of uniform magnetic field and is perpendicular to magnetic field is
describes circular path of radius R1 and R2 respectively. (1) A straight line (2) An ellipse
The ratio of mass of X to that of Y is (3) A circle (4) A helix
1/ 2 20. If the direction of the initial velocity of the charged
 R1  R2 particle is neither along nor perpendicular to that of
(1)   (2)
 R2  R1 the magnetic field, then the orbit will be
2 (1) A straight line (2) An ellipse
 R1  R1
(3)   (4) (3) A circle (4) A helix
R
 2 R2
21. Two free parallel wires carrying currents in opposite
14. A beam of ions with velocity 2 × 105 m/s enters normally direction
into a uniform magnetic field of 4 × 10–2 tesla. If the (1) Attract each other
specific charge of the ion is 5 × 10 7 C/kg, then the (2) Repel each other
radius of the circular path described will be
(3) Neither attract nor repel
(1) 0.10 m (2) 0.16 m
(4) Get rotated to be perpendicular to each other
(3) 0.20 m (4) 0.25 m 22. A rectangular loop carrying a current i is situated near
15. The radius of curvature of the path of the charged a long straight wire such that the wire is parallel to the
particle in a uniform magnetic field is directly one of the sides of the loop and is in the plane of the
proportional to loop. If a steady current I is established in wire as
(1) The charge on the particle shown in figure, the loop will
(2) The momentum of the particle i
(3) The energy of the particle
(4) The intensity of the field i
16. An electron has mass 9 × 10 –31 g and charge 1.6 × 10–19
C is moving with a velocity of 10 6 m/s, enters a region
where magnetic field exists. If it describes a circle of (1) Rotate about an axis parallel to the wire
radius 0.10 m, the intensity of magnetic field must be
(2) Move away from the wire or towards right
(1) 1.8 × 10 –4 T (2) 5.6 × 10–5 T
–5
(3) Move towards the wire
(3) 14.4 × 10 T (4) 1.3 × 10–6 T
(4) Remain stationary
17. A proton (mass m and charge +e) and an -particle
23. A circular coil of radius 4 cm and of 20 turns carries a
(mass 4m and charge +2e) are projected with the same
kinetic energy at right angles to the uniform magnetic current of 3 amperes. It is placed in a magnetic field of
field. Which one of the following statements will be intensity of 0.5 weber/m2. The magnetic dipole moment
true of the coil is
(1) The -particle will be bent in a circular path with a (1) 0.15 ampere – m2 (2) 0.3 ampere – m2
small radius that for the proton (3) 0.45 ampere – m 2
(4) 0.6 ampere – m2
(2) The radius of the path of the -particle will be 24. A conducting circular loop of radius r carries a constant
greater than that of the proton 
current i. It is placed in a uniform magnetic field B ,
(3) The -particle and the proton will be bent in a 
circular path with the same radius such that B is perpendicular to the plane of the loop.
(4) The -particle and the proton will go through the The magnetic force acting on the loop is
field in a straight line  
(1) irB (2) 2 riB
18. A charged particle moving in a magnetic field 
experiences a resultant force (3) Zero (4)  riB
 38 Moving Charges and Magnetism
25. Two thin long parallel wires separated by a distance b (3) Attract each other
are carrying a current i amp each. The magnitude of (4) Get rotated to be perpendicular to each other
the force per unit length exerted by one wire on the 28. A straight wire carrying a current i1 runs along the axis
other is of a circular current i 2. Then the force of interaction
between the two current carrying conductors is
0i 2 0i 2
(1) 2 (2) (1)  (2) Zero
b 2 b
0i 0i 0 2i1i2 2i1i2
(3) (4) (3) N/m (4) N/m
2 b 2 b2 4 r r
26. Through two parallel wires A and B, 10 and 2 ampere of 29. Two parallel wires are carrying electric currents of equal
currents are passed respectively in opposite direction. magnitude and in the same direction. They exert
If the wire A is infinitely long and the length of the wire (1) An attractive force on each other
B is 2 m, the force on the conductor B, which is situated (2) A repulsive force on each other
at 10 cm distance from A will be (3) No force on each other
(1) 8 × 10 –5 N (2) 4 × 10–7 N (4) A rotational torque on each other
–5
(3) 4 × 10 N (4) 4 × 10–7 N 30. Two long and parallel wires are at a distance of 0.1 m
27. If two streams of protons move parallel to each other and a current of 5 A is flowing in each of these wires.
in the same direction, then they The force per unit length due to these wires will be
(1) Do not exert any force on each other (1) 5 × 10–5 N/m (2) 5 × 10–3 N/m
–5
(2) Repel each other (3) 2.5 × 10 N/m (4) 2.5 × 10–5 N/m
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 39

(Concept Builder)

1. Two charged particles traverse identical helical 4. An electron is projected with uniform velocity
paths in a completely opposite sense in a uniform along the axis of a current carrying long solenoid.
magnetic field B = B0k. Which of the following is true?
(1) They have equal z-components of momenta. (1) The electron will be accelerated along the
(2) They must have equal charges. axis.
(3) They necessarily represent a particle, anti- (2) The electron path will be circular about the
particle pair. axis.
(4) The charge to mass ratio satisfy (3) The electron will experience a force at 45°
e e to the axis and hence execute a helical path.
    0 (4) The electron will continue to move with
 m 1  m 2
uniform velocity along the axis of the solenoid.

2. Biot-Savart law indicates that the moving electrons 5. In a cyclotron, a charged particle
(velocity v) produce a magnetic field B such that (1) undergoes acceleration all the time.
(1) B is perpendicular to v. (2) speeds up between the dees because of the
(2) B is parallel to v. magnetic field.
(3) it obeys inverse cube law. (3) speeds up in a dee.
(4) it is along the line joining the electron and point (4) slows down within a dee and speeds up
of observation. between dees.

3. A current carrying circular loop of radius R is 6. A circular current loop of magnetic moment M is
placed in the x–y plane with centre at the origin. in an arbitrary orientation in an external magnetic
Half of the loop with x > 0 is now bent so that it field B. The work done to rotate the loop by 30°
now lies in the y–z plane. about an axis perpendicular to its plane is
(1) The magnitude of magnetic moment now
diminishes. MB
(1) MB (2) 3
(2) The magnetic moment does not change. 2
(3) The magnitude of B at (0, 0, z), z >>R MB
increases. (3) (4) zero.
2
(4) The magnitude of B at (0, 0, z), z >>R is
unchanged.
 40 Moving Charges and Magnetism

• Instructions for Questions 1 to 5 • Instructions for Questions 6 to 10

Given bel ow are two statements : one is labelled as Given below are two statements :
Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R).
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below :
appropriate answer from the options given below :
(1) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
(1) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct
explanation of (A) (2) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
(2) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct (3) Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
explanation of (A) (4) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
(3) (A) is correct the (R) is not correct
(4) (A) is not correct but (R) is correct 6. Statement I : The coil is bound over the metallic frame
in moving coil galvanometer.
1. Assertion : The energy of charged particle moving in Statement II : The metallic frame of moving coil
a uniform magnetic field does not change. galvanometer help in making steady deflection without
Reason : Work done by magnetic field on the charge is any oscillation.
zero.
7. Statement I : If an electron, while coming vertically
2. Assertion : Torque on the coil is the maximum, when from outer space, enter the earth’s magnetic field, it is
coil is suspended in radial magnetic field. deflected towards west.
Reason : The torque tends to rotate the coil on its Statement II : Electron has negative charge.
own axis. 8. Statement I : When radius of circular loop carrying
current is doubled, its magnetic moment becomes four
3. Assertion : The magnetic field at the ends of a very times.
long current carrying solenoid is half of that at the
Statement II : Magnetic moment depends on area of
centre.
the loop.
Reason : If the solenoid is sufficiently long, the field
within it is uniform. 9. Statement I : Magnitude of force acting on a current
carrying loop placed in a uniform magnetic field will be
4. Assertion : The poles of magnet cannot be separated
equal to zero whether magnetic field is in the plane or
by breaking into two pieces.
perpendicular to the plane of loop.
Reason : The magnetic moment will be reduced to half
Statement II : Magnitude of force does not depend
when a magnet is broken into two equal pieces.
upon the direction of magnetic field.

5. Assertion : A linear solenoid carrying current is 10. Statement I : Magnetic moment of helium atom is zero.
equivalent to a bar magnet. Statement II : All the electron are paired in helium atom
Reason : The magnetic field lines of both are same. orbitals.
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 41

(Direct from
NCERT)

Match the List – I and List – II and choose the correct List – I List – II
combination from the options given.
(a) Magnetic moment of (i) zero
1. A beam consisting of four types of ions A, B, C and D the loop
enters a region that contains a uniform magnetic field as (b) Torque on the loop (ii) maximum
shown. The field is perpendicular to the plane of the (c) Potential energy of (iii) along positive z-axis
paper, but its precise direction is not given. the loop
Region containing (d) Equilibrium of the (iv) stable
ION MASS CHARGE
Magnetic field
A 2m +e loop (v) None
B 4m –e (1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) –(ii, iii) ; (c) – (ii) ; (d) – (iv)
C 2m –e (2) (a) – (i, iii, iv) ; (b) – (i, iii) ; (c) – (ii) ; (d) – (ii, iv)
4 2 1 3
D m +e r2 r1 (3) (a) – (ii, iv) ; (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii) ; (d) – (ii, iv)
r4 r3 (4) (a) – (iii) ; (b) – (i), (c) – (v) ; (d) – (iv)
Ion beam r > r = r > r
4 3 2 1
4. A square loop of uniform conducting wire is as shown in
All ions in the beam travel with the same speed. The figure. A current I (in amperes) enters the loop from one
table below gives the masses and charges of the ions. end and exits the loop from opposite end as shown in
The ions fall at different positions 1, 2, 3 and 4, as shown. figure. The length of one side of square loop is l metre.
Correctly match the ions with respective falling positions. The wire has uniform cross section area and uniform linear
List – I List – II mass density. In four situation of Column I, the loop is
subjected to four different magnetic field. Under the
(a) A (i) 1 conditions of Column I, match the Column I with
(b) B (ii) 2 
corresponding results of Column II. B in Column I is a
(c) C (iii) 3
positive non-zero constant)
(d) D (iv) 4 y
(1) (a)–(ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii) ; (c) – (ii), (d) – (iv)
I/2 I
(2) (a) – (iii) ; (b) – (iv) ; (c) – (ii) ; (d) – (i)
(3) (a) – (ii, iv) ; (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii) ; (d) – (ii, iv)
(4) (a) – (i) ; (b) – (iii, iv) ; (c) – (i) ; (d) – (iii) I/2 I/2
2. A charged particle is moving in a circular path in uniform
magnetic field. Match the following : x
I I/2
List – I List – II
(a) Equivalent current (i) is proportional to v List – I List – II
due to motion of 
charge particle (a) B  B0iˆ in tesla (i) Magnitude of net force
(b) Magnetic moment (ii) is proportional to v2 on loop is2B0 Il newton
(c) Magnetic field at (iii) is proportional to v0 
(b) B  B0 ˆj in tesla (ii) Magnitude of net force
centre of circle due
on loop is zero
to motion of charged 
(c) B  B0 (iˆ  ˆj ) in tesla (iii) Magnitude of net torque
particle (iv) None
on loop about its centre
(1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) –(ii, iii) ; (c) – (ii) is zero
(2) (a) – (i, iii, iv) ; (b) – (i, iii) ; (c) – (ii) 
(d) B  B0 kˆ (iv) Magnitude of net force
(3) (a) – (iii) ; (b) – (ii) ; (c) – (iv)
on loop is B0Il newton
(4) (a) – (i) ; (b) – (iii, iv) ; (c) – (i) y
3. A circular current carrying loop (1) (a) – (iii, iv) ; (b) – (iii, iv) ; (c) – (ii, iii) ; (d) – (i, iii)
is placed in x-y plane as shown (2) (a) – (i, iii, iv) ; (b) – (i, iii) ; (c) – (ii) ; (d) – (ii, iv)
in figure. A uniform magnetic x (3) (a) – (ii, iv) ; (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii) ; (d) – (ii, iv)
 (4) (a) – (i) ; (b) – (iii, iv) ; (c) – (i) ; (d) – (iii)
field B  B0 kˆ is present in the
region. Match the following
 42 Moving Charges and Magnetism

(Previous Year Questions)

MAGNETIC EFFECT OF CURRENT magnetic field is [AIPMT-2003]

1. Two wires are held perpendicular to the plane of paper (1) 2B (2) 4 B
and are 5 m apart. They carry currents of 2.5 A and 5 A (3) B / 2 (4) B
in same direction. Then, the magnetic field strength (2) 8. A coil in the shape of an equilateral triangle of side l is
at a point midway between the wires will be suspended between the pole pieces of a permanent
magnet such that B is in plane of the coil. If due to a
0 0 current i in the triangle a torque  acts on it, the side l
(1) T (2) T [AIPMT-2001]
4 2 of the triangle is [AIPMT-2005]
30 30 1/ 2
2  
(3) T (4) T 2  
2 4 (1)   (2)  
3  Bi  3  Bi 
2. Current is flowing in a coil of area A and number of
turns N, then magnetic moment of the coil, M is equal 1/ 2
   1 
to [AIPMT-2001] (3) 2  (4)
 3Bi  3 Bi
Ni
(1) Ni A (2) 9. An electron moves in a circular orbit with a uniform
A speed v. It produces a magnetic field B at the centre of
the circle. The radius of the circle is proportional to
Ni
(3) (4) N 2 Ai
A B v
(1) (2) [AIPMT-2005]
3. A charged particle of charge q and mass m enters v B
perpendicularly in a magnetic field B Kinetic energy of
the particle is E, then frequency of rotation is v B
(3) (4)
qB qB B v
(1) (2) [AIPMT-2001]
m 2 m 10. When a charged particle moving with velocity v is
subjected to a magnetic field of induction B, the force
qBE qB on it is non-zero. This implies that [AIPMT-2006]
(3) (4)
2 m 2 E (1) angle between v and B is necessarily 90°
4. The magnetic field of a given length of wire carrying a (2) angle between v and B can have any value other
current for a single turn circular coil at centre is B, then than 90°
its value for two turns for the same wire when same (3) angle between v and B can have any value other
current passing through it is [AIPMT-2002] than zero and 180°
(1) B/4 (2) B/2 (4) angle between v and B is either zero or 180°
(3) 2 B (4) 4 B 11. Two circular coils 1 and 2 are made from the same wire
5. A charge q moves in a region where electric field E and but the radius of the 1st coil is toice that of the 2nd
magnetic field B both exist, then the force on it is coil. What is the ratio of potential difference applied
[AIPMT-2002] across them so that the magnetic field at their centres
(1) q (v × B) (2) q E + q (v × B) is the same? [AIPMT-2006]
(3) q B + q (B × v) (4) q B + q (E × v) (1) 3 (2) 4
6. A charged particle moves through a magnetic field in a (3) 6 (4) 2
direction perpendicular to it. Then, the [AIPMT-2003] 12. Under the influence of a uniform magnetic field a
(1) acceleration remains unchanged charged particle is moving in a circle of radius R with
(2) velocity remains unchanged constant speed v. The time period of the motion
(3) speed of the particle remains unchanged (1) depends on v and not on R [AIPMT-2007]
(4) direction of the particle remains unchanged (2) depends on both R and v
7. A long solenoid carrying a current produces a magnetic
(3) is independent of both R and v
field B along its axis. If the current is doubled and the
number of turns per cm is halved, the new value of the (4) depends on R and not on v
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 43
13. A charged particle (charge q) is moving in a circle of
radius R with uniform speed v. The associated magnetic B2 2VB 2
(1) (2)
moment m is given by [AIPMT-2007] 2VE 2 E2
qvR 2VE 2 E2
(1) (2) qvR 2 (3) (4)
2 B2 2VB 2
(3) qvR2 / 2 (4) qvR
20. A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field
14. A beam of electrons passes undeflected through
are acting along the same direction in a certain region.
mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic fields. If
If an electron is projected in the region such that its
the electric field is switched OFF and the same magnetic
velocity is pointed along the direction of fields, then
field is maintained, the electrons move[AIPMT-2008]
the electron [AIPMT-2011]
(1) in an elliptical orbit
(1) speed will decrease
(2) in a circular orbit
(2) speed will increase
(3) along a parabolic path
(3) will turn towards left of direction of motion
(4) along a straight line
(4) will turn towards right of direction of motion
15. A closed loop PQRS carrying a current is placed in a
21. A current carrying closed loop in the form of a right
uniform magnetic field. If the magnetic forces on
angled isosceles ABC is placed in a uniform magnetic
segments PS, Sr and RQ are F1, F2 and F3 respectively
field acting along AB. If the magnetic force on the arm
and are in the plane of the paper and along the
directions shown in figure, the force on the segment BC is F, the force on the arm AC is [AIPMT-2011]
QP is [AIPMT-2008] A
Q

P
F3 B C
F1 (1) –F (2) F

(3) 2F (4)  2F
S R
22. An alternating electric field of frequency v, is applied
F2 across the dees (radius = R) of a cyclotron that is being
(1) F3 – F1 – F2 (2) ( F3  F1 ) 2  F22 used to accelerate protons (mass = m). The operating
magnetic field (2) used in the cyclotron and the kinetic
energy (K) of the proton beam, produced by it, are
(3) ( F3  F1 ) 2  F22 (4) F3 – F1 + F2
given by [AIPMT-2012]
16. A particle of mass m, charge q and kinetic energy T mv
enters a transverse uniform magnetic field of induction (1) B and K  2m 2v 2 R 2
B. After 3 s, the kinetic energy of the particle will be e
2 mv
(1) 3T (2) 2 T [AIPMT-2008] (2) B  and K  m2 vR 2
(3) T (4) 4T e
17. The magnetic force acting on a charged particle of 2 mv
(3) B  and K  2m 2v 2 R 2
charge – 2 µC in a magnetic field particle velocity is e
(2iˆ  3 ˆj )  106 ms 1 is [AIPMT-2009] mv
(4) B  and K  m2 vR 2
(1) 8 N in z-direction (2) 4 N in z-direction e
(3) 8 N in y-direction (4) 8 N in z-direction 23. Two similar coils of radius R are lying concentrically
with their planes at right angles to each other. The
18. A square current carrying loop is suspended in a
currents flowing in them are I and and 2I, respectively.
uniform magnetic field acting in the plane of the loop.
The resultant magnetic field induction at the centre
If the force on one arm of the loop is F, the net force on
the remaining three arms of the loop is [AIPMT-2010] will be [AIPMT-2012]
(1) 3 F (2) – F 50 I 30 I
(3) – 3 F (4) F (1) (2)
2R 2R
19. A beam of cathode rays is subjected to crossed electric
(E) and magnetic fields (2). The fields are adjusted such 0 I 0 I
that the beam is not deflected. The specific charge of (3) (4)
2R R
the cathode rays is given by [AIPMT-2010]
 44 Moving Charges and Magnetism
24. A current loop in a magnetic field [NEET-2013] 0 I ˆ
(4) B ( i  2kˆ)
(1) experiences a torque whether the field is uniform 4 R
or non-uniform in all orientations 29. An electron is moving in a circular path under the
(2) can be in equilibrium in one orientation influence of a transverse magnetic field of 3.57 × 10–2
(3) can be in equilibrium in two orientations, both T. If the value of e/m is 1.76 × 1011 C/kg, the frequency
the equilibrium states are unstable of revolution of the electron is [NEET-2016]
(4) can be in equilibrium in two orientations, one (1) 1 GHz (2) 100 MHz
stable while other is unstable (3) 62.8 MHz (4) 6.28 MHz
25. When a proton is released from rest in a room, it starts 30. A long wire carrying a steady current is bent into a
with an initial acceleration a0 towards West. When it is circular loop of one turn. The magnetic field at the
projected towards North with a speed v0 it moves with centre of the loop is B. It is then bent into a circular
an initial acceleration 3a 0 towards West. The electric coil of n turns. The magnetic field at the centre of this
and magnetic fields in the room are [NEET-2013] coil of n turns will be [NEET-2016]
ma0 2ma0 (1) nB (2) n 2 B
(1) West, Up
e ev0 (3) 2nB (4) 2n2B
ma0 2ma0 31. A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady current
(2) West, Down
e ev0 I. The current is uniformly distributed over its cross-
section. The ratio of the magnetic fields B and B' at
ma0 3ma0
(3) East, Up radical distances (a/2) and 2a respectively, from the
e ev0 axis of the wire is [NEET-2016]
ma0 3ma0 (1) 1/2 (2) 1
(4) East, Down
e ev0 (3) 4 (4) 1/4
26. Two identical long conducting wires AOB and COD 32. An arrangement of three parallel straight wires placed
are placed at right angle to each other, such that one is perpendicular to plane of paper carrying same current
above the other and O is their common point. The wires I along the same direction is shown in figure. Magnitude
carry I1 and I2 currents, respectively. Point P is lying at of force per unit length on the middle wire B is given
distance d from O along a direction perpendicu lar to by [NEET-2017]
the plane containing the wires. The magnetic field at
B C
the point P will be [AIPMT-2014]
90°
0  l1  0
(1)   (2) (l1  l2 )
2 d  l2  2 d d
0 2 2 0 2 2 1/ 2
(3) (l1  l2 ) (4) (l1  l2 )
2 d 2 d A
27. An electron moving in a circular orbit of radius r makes 2
 0i 2 0i 2
n rotations per second. The magnetic field produced (1) (2)
2 d d
at the centre has magnitude [AIPMT-2015]
2  0i 2  0i 2
0 ne (3) (4)
(1) (2) zero d 2 d
2 r 33. A 250-turn rectangular coil of length 2.1 cm and width
0 n 2e 0 ne 1.25 cm carries a current of 85 µA and subjected to a
(3) (4)
r 2r magnetic field of strength 0.85 T. Work done for rotating
28. A wire carrying current I has the shape as shown in the coil by 180° against the torque is [NEET-2017]
adjoining figure. Linear parts of the wire are very long (1) 9.1 mJ (2) 4.55 mJ
and parallel to X-axis while semicircular portion of (3) 2.3 mJ (4) 1.5 mJ
radius R is lying in Y-Z plane. Magnetic field at point O
34. A wire of length L metre carrying a current of ampere is
is [AIPMT-2015]
Z bent in the form of circle. Its magnetic moment is
0 I ˆ
(1) B ( i  2kˆ) [NEET-2020]
4 R I
 I IL2 IL2
(2) B   0 ( iˆ  2kˆ) R Y (1) Am 2 (2) Am 2
4 R O 4 4
 I I
(3) B   0 ( iˆ  2kˆ) I IL2 2IL2
4 R (3) Am 2 (4) Am 2
4 
X
 Moving Charges and Magnetism 45
35. A thick current carrying cable of radius 'R' carries current strength at the centre of the solenoid is [NEET-2022]
'I' uniformly distributed across its cross-section. The (1) 6.28 × 10–2 T (2) 12.56 × 10–2 T
–4
variation of magnetic field B(r) due to the cable with (3) 12.56 × 10 T (4) 6.28 × 10–4 T
the distance 'r' from the axis of the cable is represented 39. From Ampere’s circuital law for a long straight wire of
by : [NEET-2021] circular cross-section carrying a steady current, the
variation of magnetic field in the inside and outside
region of the wire is: [NEET-2022]
(1) a linearly increasing function of distance upto the
(1) (2)
boundary of the wire and then linearly decreasing
for the outside region.
(2) a linearly increasing function of distance r upto
the boundary of the wire and then decreasing one
with 1/r dependence for the outside region.
(3) (4) (3) a linearly decreasing function of distance upto
the boundary of the wire and then a linearly
increasing one for the outside region.
36. An infinitely long straight conductor carries a current (4) uniform and remains constant for both the regions.
of 5 A as shown. An electron is moving with a speed of 40. A closely packed coil having 1000 turns has an average
10 5 m/s parallel to the conductor. The perpendicular radius of 62.8 cm. If current carried by the wire of the
distance between the electron and the conductor is 20 coil is 1 A, the value of magnetic field produced at the
cm at an instant. Calculate the magnitude of the force centre of the coil will be (permeability of free space =
experienced by the electron at that instant [NEET-2021] 4 × 10–7 H/m) nearly : [NEET-2022]
–1 –2
(1) 10 T (2) 10 T
(3) 102 T (4) 10–3 T
41. The shape of the magnetic field lines due to an infinite
long, straight current carrying conductor is
(1) a straight line (2) circular [NEET-2022]
(3) elliptical (4) a plane
(1) 4 × 10 –20 N (2) 8 × 10–20 N 42. Two very long, straight, parallel conductors A and B
(3) 4 × 10 –20 N (4) 8 × 10–20 N carry current of 5A and 10A respectively and are at a
37. Given below are two statements: [NEET-2022] distance of 10 cm from each other. The direction of
Statement I : Biot-Savart's law gives us the expression current in two conductors is same. The force acting
for the magnetic field strength of an infinitesimal
per unit length between two conductors is :
current element(Idl) of a current carrying conductor
only. (µ0 = 4 × 10–7 SI unit ) [NEET-2022]
Statement II : Biot-Savart's law is analogous to (1) 2 × 10–4 Nm–1 and is attractive
Coulomb's inverse square law of change q, with the (2) 2 × 10–4 Nm–1 and is repulsive
former being related to the field produced by a scalar
(3) 1 × 10–4 Nm–1 and is attractive
source, Idl while the latter being produced by a vector
source, q. (4) 1 × 10–4 Nm–1 and is repulsive
In light of above statement choose the most appropriate 43. The magnetic field on the axis of a circular loop of
answer from the options given below:
radius 100 cm carrying current I  2 A, at point 1 m
(1) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct.
away from the centre of the loop is given by :
(2) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect.
(3) Statement I is correct and Statement II is incorrect [NEET-2022]
(4) Statement I is incorrect and Statement II is correct (1) 3.14 × 10–7 T (2) 6.28 × 10–7 T
38. A long solenoid of radius 1 mm has 100 turns per mm. If (3) 3.14 × 10–4 T (4) 6.28 × 10–4 T
1A current flows in the solenoid, the magnetic field
46 Moving Charges and Magnetism

4.18
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 01 21. (2) 22. (3) 23. (2) 24. (3) 25. (2)
26. (1) 27. (2) 28. (2) 29. (1) 30. (1)
1. (3) 2. (3) 3. (1) 4. (3) 5. (2)
6. (3) 7. (1) 8. (2) 9. (3) 10. (1)
NCERT EXEMPLAR OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 02 1. (4) 2. (1) 3. (1) 4. (4) 5. (1)
6. (4)
11. (3) 12. (1) 13. (3) 14. (3) 15. (1)
16. (2) 17. (2) 18. (4) 19. (4) 20. (1) ASSERTION–REASON & STATEMENT QUESTIONS
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 03 1. (1) 2. (2) 3. (2) 4. (2) 5. (1)
6. (1) 7. (2) 8. (1) 9. (3) 10. (1)
21. (1) 22. (2,3) 23. (1) 24. (1,3) 25. (2)
26. (4) 27. (1) 28. (3) 29. (3) 30. (2) MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 04 1. (2) 2. (3) 3. (4) 4. (1)
31. (3) 32. (3) 33. (3) 34. (2) 35. (4)
ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
36. (3) 37. (3) 38. (4) 39. (3) 40. (1)
1. (2) 2. (1) 3. (2) 4. (4) 5. (2)
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 05 6. (3) 7. (4) 8. (3) 9. (3) 10. (3)
41. (1) 42. (1) 43. (4) 44. (1) 45. (4) 11. (2) 12. (3) 13. (1) 14. (2) 15. (2)
46. (2) 47. (4) 48. (1) 16. (3) 17. (1) 18. (2) 19. (4) 20. (1)
21. (1) 22. (3) 23. (1) 24. (4) 25. (2)
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS FROM NCERT 26. (4) 27. (4) 28. (1) 29. (1) 30. (2)
1. (3) 2. (2) 3. (3) 4. (2) 5. (4) 31. (2) 32. (4) 33. (1) 34. (1) 35. (3)
6. (3) 7. (2) 8. (4) 9. (2) 10. (4) 36. (4) 37. (3) 38. (2) 39. (2) 40. (4)
11. (1,2,4) 12. (4) 13. (3) 14. (1) 15. (2) 41. (2) 42. (3) 43. (1)
16. (2) 17. (3) 18. (3) 19. (3) 20. (4)
Magnetism and Matter 47

MAGNETISM
AND MATTER
Chapter 05
Percentage of Questions in Last 34 Years’ in NEET / AIPMT from this Chapter

Percentage
A • Magnetic Properties of Materials 38%
)
E (6%

• Torque on a bar magnet in a uniform 30%

3%

B
(1

magnetic field
D

A (38%)
C (13%) C • Earth's Magnetism 13%

D • The bar Magnet 13%

B (30%)

E • Electromagnet & Permanent Magnet 6%

WHAT DO YOU WANT TO KNOW? 5.7 SYNOPSIS

5.1 INTRODUCTION 5.8 MISCELLANEOUS Questions from NCERT

5.2 MAGNETISM AND BARMAGNET 5.9 NCERT Exemplar Questions

5.2.2 Bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid 5.10 ASSERTION-REASON & STATEMENT
5.2.4 The electrostatic analog BASED Questions from NCERT
(Coulomb’s Law in Magnetism)
5.11 MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS
5.4 THE EARTH’S MAGNETISM
5.12 ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
5.6 MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
5.13 ANSWER KEY
5.6.1 Diamagnetism
5.6.2 Paramagnetism
5.6.3 Ferromagnetism
 48 Magnet field Attractive Directive Magnetism and Matter
due to a bar unlike poles A freely suspended magnet always
magnet always attract points in north-south direction
Force between two
magnetic poles
 mm
At a point on axis At a point on equatorial line F  0 . 12 2
line  2M  M 4 r
B 0 3 B 0 2 Properties of
4 d 4  (r   )
2 3/ 2
Magnet Pole of magnetic
Repulsive Like poles always repel always exist in pair
one another. It is sure test of magnet
Magnetism Property of
attracting a piece of iron, Magnetic dipole
B moment M = NIA
Magnetic intensity H  0 cobalt, nickel or steel

Magnetic permeability   0 (1   m ) Earth’s Angle of dip or
MAGNETISM magnetic inclination ()
AND MATTER elements Angle made by direction
Magnetic susceptibility  m  I of earth’s magnetic field
H
with the horizontal
Intensity of magnetization I  M
Magnetic field lines equator =0; pole =90º
V Imaginary lines in a
magnetic field which In a uniform
Paramagnetics Magnetist in continuously magnetic field Horizontal component
the direction of magnetic represent the time period of BV = B sin 
field e.g., Al, Mn µr, I, m>1 direction of oscillation of a BH = B cos 
Magnetic magnetic field freely
Ferromagnetics Strongly Materials suspended Angle of declination
magnetised in the direction magnet Angle between
of magnetic field e.g., Fe, Properties of 1 magnetic meridian
Co, Ni, µr, I, m >> 1 T  2 and geographic
Magnet field lines MB
meridian

Diamagnetics Magnetised From continuous closed Tangent to the field

in a direction opposite to loops start from N-pole line at a given point
the direction of magnetic end S-pole outside the Come out of Magnetic field lines represents the
field e.g., Bi, Cu, Hg µr, I magnet and its opposite surface at to not intersect each direction of the net
and m are negative inside the magnet any angle other magnetic field

5.1 P.No.: 173

 Magnets are familiar objects. The word magnetism is derived from the province of Magnesia where the ancient
Greek mine magnetic ore, also known as lodestone, a mineral composed of iron oxide which attracts iron.
 If you ask the average person what “magnetism” is, you will probably be told about the magnets those are used
to hold notes on refrigerator door, or keeping paper clips in a holder or may be about lead stone (naturally
occurring magnet).
 Scholars still dispute about the origin of magnetism. It is believed that magnetism was originally used, not for
navigation, but for geomancy (“foresight by earth”) and fortune-telling by the Chinese. Chinese fortune tellers
used lodestones to construct their fortune telling boards.
 From Chinese text, it is known that magnetic compass (used for navigational purpose) is an old Chinese invention.
An old Indian literature dates it to as back as 4th century. The compass was used in India was known as the
matsya yantra, because of the placement of a metallic fish in a cup of oil.
 Magnetism and Matter 49

5.2 P.No.-174

The phenomenon of attracting magnetic substances like iron, cobalt nickel etc is called magnetism. A body possessing
the property of magnetism is called magnet.

PROPERTIES OF BAR MAGNET

 Attractive Property and Poles : When a magnet is dipped into iron filings it is found that the concentration
of iron filings, i.e., attracting power of the magnet is maximum at two points near the ends and minimum at
the centre. The places in a magnet where its attracting power is maximum are called poles while the place of
minimum attracting power is called the neutral region.

W E
P1 neutral region P2 i an
S erid
attractive property
agnetic m
m
directive property
 Directive Property and N-S Poles : When magnet is suspended its length becomes parallel to N-S direction.
The pole pointing north is called the north pole while the other pointing south is called the south pole.
Magnetic 2R
2 Axis S N
S N
L

effective length = 2 effective length = 2R

actual length = L actual length = R
 Magnetic Axis and Magnetic Meridian : The line joining the two poles of a magnet is called magnetic axis
and the vertical plane passing through the axis of a freely suspended or pivoted magnet is called magnetic meridian.
 Magnetic Length (2l) : The distance between two poles along the axis of a magnet is called its effective
or magnetic length. As poles are not exactly at the ends, the effective length is lesser then the actual length
of the magnet.
 Poles Exist in Pairs : In a magnet the two poles are found to be equal in strength and opposite in nature.
If a magnet is broken into number of pieces, each piece becomes a magnet with two equal and opposite poles.
This shows that monopoles do not exist.

S N S N S N S N
 Consequent-poles and No-pole : Monopoles do not exist in a magnet but there are two poles of equal strength
and opposite nature :

Consequent-pole
N S N S N
S N Magnet with similar poles
(or with three poles)

Magnet with no poles

 50 Magnetism and Matter
 There can be magnets with no poles, For Example - a magnetised ring called toroid or solenoid of infinite
length has properties of a magnet but no poles.
 There can be magnets with two similar poles (or with three poles), For Example - due to faulty magnetisation
of a bar, temporarily identical poles at the two ends with an opposite pole of double strength at the centre
of bar (called consequent pole) are developed.
 Repulsion is a Sure Test of Polarity : A pole of a magnet attracts the opposite pole while repels similar pole.
A sure test of polarity is repulsion and not attraction, as attraction can take place between opposite poles or
a pole and a piece of unmagnetised magnetic material due to 'induction effect'.
 Magnetic Induction : A magnet attracts certain other substances through the phenomenon of magnetic induction
i.e., by inducing opposite pole in a magnetic material on the side facing it as shown in figure.

S NS
S N
S
magnetic-induction N
N
 Magnetic and Non-magnetic Materials : The substances such as steel, iron, cobalt and nickel, etc., which
are attracted by a magnet are called magnetic while substances such as copper, aluminium stainless steel, wood,
glass and plastic, etc. which are not attracted by the magnet are usually called non-magnetic.
 Permanent and Temporary Magnets : If a magnet retains its attracing power for a long time it is said to
be permanent, otherwise temporary. Permanent magnets are made of steel, Alnico, Alcomax or Ticonal while
temporary of soft iron, mumetal or stalloy.
 Demagnetisation : A magnet gets demagnetised, i.e., loses its power of attraction if it is heated, hammered
or ac is passed through a wire wound over it. magnetic keepers
 Magnetic Keepers : A magnet tends to become weaker with S N
age owing to self-demagnetisation due to poles at the ends which S N
N S S N
tends to neutralise each other. However, by using pieces of soft
iron called keepers, the poles at the ends are neutralised and
consequently the demagnetising effect disappears and the magnet
can retain its magnetism for a longer period. S N
N S
ATOMIC THEORY OF MAGNETISM
 Each atom behaves like a complete magnet having a north and south pole of equal strength. The electrons revolving
around the nucleus in an atom are equivalent to small current loops which behaves as magnetic dipole.
 In unmagnetised magnetic substance these atomic magnets (represented by arrows) are randomly oriented and
form closed chains. The atomic magnets cancel the effect of each other and thus resultant magnetism is zero.

 In magnetised substance all the atomic magnets are aligned in same direction and thus resultant magnetism is
non-zero.

 The atomic theory explains the following facts in magnetism.

 Non existence of monopoles. The magnetic poles always exist in pairs and are of equal strength.
Magnetism and Matter 51
 When a magnet breaks than each part behaves like a complete magnet.
 Magnetisation of an electromagnet can be explained as alignment of atomic magnets in direction of magnetic
field.
 This explains the phenomenon of saturation magnetisation i.e. acquired magnetism remains constant even
on increasing the external magnetising field.

5.2.4 P.No.: 180

m1 m2

r
If two magnetic poles of strengths m1 and m2 are kept at a distance r apart then force of attraction or repulsion
between the two poles is directly proportional to the product of their pole strengths and inversely proportional
to the square of the distance between them
m1m2 µ0 m1m2
F 2 OR F 
r 4 r 2
µ0
where  107 Wb A1 m1  107 henry/m where µ0 is permeability of free space.
4
MAGNETIC FLUX DENSITY
m
N P

r
The force experienced by a unit north pole when placed in a magnetic field is called magnetic flux density or
field intensity at that point

 F µ0 m
B  rˆ
m 4 r 2
This is the magnetic field produced by a pole of strength m at distance r.

POLE STRENGTH
µ0 m1 m2
In the relation, F 
4 r 2
If m1 = m2 = m, r = 1 m and F = 10–7 N
7 m m
Then 10–7 = 10  or m2 = 1 or m = ± 1 ampere metre (A-m)
12
The strength of a magnetic pole is said to be one ampere meter if it repels an equal and similar pole with a
force of 10–7 N when placed in vacuum (or air) at a distance of one meter from it.
The pole strength of north pole is defined as the force experienced by the pole when kept in unit magnetic
field.
 
mF /B
 Pole strength is a scalar quantity with dimension M°L1T°A1.
 The unit is newton/Tesla or ampere meter.
 52 Magnetism and Matter
 The pole strength depends on nature of material of magnet, state of magnetisation (with an upper limit called
saturation) and area of cross-section.
 The north pole experiences a force in the direction of magnetic field while south pole experiences force opposite
to field.

02 P.No.-177

MAGNETIC DIPOLE
An arrangement of two magnetic poles of equal and opposite strengths separated by a finite distance is called
a magnetic dipole.
m m
Magnetic length
magnetic M
axis S N
Geometrical length
 Two poles of a magnetic dipole or a magnet are of equal strength and opposite nature.
 The line joining the poles of the magnet is called magnetic axis.
 The distance between the two poles of a bar magnet is called the magnetic length of magnet. It is denoted
by 2l.
 The distance between the ends of the magnet is called geometrical length of the magnet.
 The ratio of magnetic length and geometrical length is 5/6 or 0.83.
 A small bar magnet is treated like a magnetic dipole.

MAGNETIC DIPOLE MOMENT

The product of strength of either pole and the magnetic length of the magnet is called magnetic dipole moment.
 
M  m(2 )
 It is a vector quantity whose direction is from south pole to north pole of magnet.
 The unit of magnetic dipole moment is ampere metre2 (Am2) and Joule / Tesla (J / T). The dimensions are
M°L2T°A1.
 If a magnet is cut into two equal parts along the length then pole strength is reduced to half and length remains
unchanged.
m M
New magnetic dipole moment M '  m '(2)   2  .
2 2
The new magnetic dipole moment of each part becomes half of original value.

m'=(m/2), '=2
–m 2 +m S N m' = m ' = 
S N S N
S N S N
M' = m × l = M / 2
M = m × 2 m M
M '   2 
2 2
 If a magnet is cut into two equal parts transverse to the length then pole strength remains unchanged and length
2 M
is reduced to half. New magnetic dipole moment M '  m   
 2  2
The new magnetic dipole moment of each part becomes half of original value.
 In magnetism existence of magnetic monopole is not possible.
Magnetism and Matter 53
 The magnetic dipole moment of a magnet is equal to product of pole strength and distance between poles.
M = m d
d
d
N S
N S

N S
d
 As magnetic moment is a vector, in case of two magnets having magnetic moments M1 and M2 with angle
 between them, the resulting magnetic moment.
1/2  M 2 sin  
M   M12  M 22  2M1 M 2 cos  with tan    
 M 1  M 2 cos  

A steel wire of length L has a magnetic moment M. It is then bent into a semicircular arc. What is the new
magnetic moment?
Solution
M
If m is the pole strength then M  m  L or m 
L S N
L
If it is bent into a semicircular arc then L   r or r 

M L 2M
So new magnetic moment M '  m  2r   2 
L  

Two identical bar magnets each of length L and pole strength m are placed at right angles to each other with
the north pole of one touching the south pole of other. Evaluate the magnetic moment of the system.
S M2


M1

MR
N N
M2 M1
Solution
M1 = M2 = mL
 M sin 90
 M R  M12  M 22  2M1M 2 cos  2 mL and tan   1
2 M  M cos90
i.e.  = tan–1 1 = 45°
 54 Magnetism and Matter
ATOM AS A MAGNETIC DIPOLE
 In an atom electrons revolve around the nucleus. These moving L
electrons behave as small current loops. So atom possesses magnetic
dipole moment and hence behaves as a magnetic dipole. v
+
 The angular momentum of electron due to orbital motion L = mevr. r – me
e ev
 The equivalent current due to orbital motion    
T 2 r
 –ve sign shows direction of current is opposite to direction of motion of electron. Magnetic dipole moment
ev evr
M  A .  r2  
2 r 2
 e 
 Using L = mevr we have, in vector form M   L
2me
 The direction of magnetic dipole moment vector is opposite to angular momentum vector.
According to Bohr's theory n = 0, 1, 2.........
 e  nh  eh 
So M    n    nµB
 2me  2  4 me 

eh (1.6  1019 C ) (6.62  1034 Js )

where µB   31
 9.27  1024 Am 2 is called Bohr Magneton. This is natural
4 me 4  3.14  (9.1  10 kg )
unit of magnetic moment.

BOHR MAGNETRON
It is defined as the magnetic dipole moment associated with an atom due to orbital motion of an electron in
the first orbit of hydrogen atom. This is the smallest value of magnetic moment.
 e 
 The electron possesses magnetic moment due to its spin motion also M S  S where is spin angular momentum
me

1  h 
of electron and S    .
2  2 
 The total magnetic moment of electron is the vector sum of its magnetic moments due to orbital and spin motion.
 The resultant angular momentum of the atom is given by vector sum of orbital and spin angular momentum
  
due to all electrons. Total angular momentum J  L  S

 e 
 The resultant magnetic moment M J   g   J where g is Lande's splitting factor which depends on state
 2m 
of an atom. For pure orbital motion g = 1 and pure spin motion g = 2.

5.2.2 P.No.: 176

In solenoid each turn behaves as a small magnetic dipole having dipole moment IA. A solenoid is treated
as arrangement of small magnetic dipoles placed in line with each other. The number of dipoles is equal to
number of turns in a solenoid. The south and north poles of each turn cancel each other except the ends.
So solenoid can be replaced by single south and north pole separated by distance equal to length of solenoid.
The magnetic field produced by a bar magnet is identical to that produced by a current carrying solenoid.
 Magnetism and Matter 55
L

(a)
I

N S
(b)
s ns ns ns ns ns n I

S N (c)
L

01 1. A magnet in a magnetic field has time period T. If magnet

is cut into three parts and they are put on each other
1. A magnetic needle of magnetic moment 6.7×10–2 Am2 such that identical poles are on same side then time
and moment of inertia 7.5 × 10 –6 kg m2 is performing period will be
simple harmonic oscillations in a magnetic field or 0.01 T
T. Time taken for 10 complete oscillations is (1) (2) T
2
(1) 6.65 s (2) 8.89 s T T
(3) 6.98 s (4) 8.76 s (3) (4)
3 3
2. A magnetic dipole is acted upon by two magnetic fields 2. The magnetic flux near the axis and inside the air core
which are inclined to each other at an angle of 75º. One solenoid of length 60 cm carrying current I is 1.57 × 10–
of the fields has a magnitude of 15 mT. The dipole 6
Wb. Its magnetic moment will be (cross-sectional area
attains stable equilibrium at an angle of 30º with this of a solenoid is very small as compared to its length. µ0
field. The magnitude of the other field (in mT) is close = 4 × 10–7 SI unit)
to
(1) 0.25 A m2 (2) 0.50 A m2
(1) 1 (2) 11 2
(3) 0.75 A m (4) 1 A m2
(3) 36 (4) 1060
3. A closed surface S encloses a magnetic dipole of
3. A magnetic needle lying parallel to a magnetic field magnetic moment 2ml. The magnetic flux emerging from
requires W units of work to turn it through 60º. The the surface is
torque needed to maintain the needle in this position
(1) µ0m (2) zero
will be
2m
(1) 3W (2) W (3) 2µ0m (4)
0
 3 4. The net magnetic flux through any closed surface, kept
(3)  W (4) 2W in a magnetic field is
 2 
0
4. The magnetic needle has magnetic moment 8.7×10 –2 (1) zero (2)
Am2 and moment of inertia 11.5×10 –6 kg m2. It performs 4
10 complete oscillations in 6.70 s, what is the magnitude 4 0
(3) 4µ0 (4)
of the magnetic field? 
(1) 0.012 T (2) 0.120 T 5. An iron rod of length L and magnetic moment M is bent
(3) 1.200 T (4) 2.10 T in the form of a semicircle. Now its magnetic moment
7. Two identical magnetic dipoles of magnetic moment of will be
2 A m2 are placed at a separation of 2 m with their axis (1) M (2) 2M/
perpendicular to each other in air. The resultant
magnetic field at a midpoint between the dipoles is M
(3) (4) M
5 5

(1) 4 5  10 T (2) 2 5  10 T
(3) 4 5  107 T (4) 2 5  107 T

5.4 P.No.: 185

TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
The branch of Physics which deals with the study of earth's magnetic field is called terrestrial magnetism.
 56 Magnetism and Matter
 William Gilbert suggested that earth itself behaves like a huge magnet. This magnet is so oriented that its S
pole is towards geographic north and N pole is towards the geographic south.
 The earth behaves as a magnetic dipole inclined at small angle 11.5° to the earth's axis of rotation with its south
pole pointing geographic north.
 The idea of earth having magnetism is supported by following facts.
 A freely suspended magnet always comes to rest in N-S direction.
 A piece of soft iron buried in N-S direction inside the earth acquires magnetism.
 Existence of neutral points. When we draw field lines of bar magnet we get neutral points where magnetic
field due to magnet is neutralized by earth's magnetic field.
 The magnetic field at the surface of earth ranges from nearly 30 µT near equator to about 60 µT near the
poles. The magnetic field on the axis is nearly twice the magnetic field on the equatorial line.
CAUSE OF EARTH'S MAGNETISM
 Sir William Gilbert first suggested the existence of a powerful magnet inside the earth. This is not possible
because.
 Temperature inside earth is so high that it will not be possible for magnet to retain magnetism.
 If there was a magnet inside the earth then position of earth's magnetic poles would have not changed.
 The process of magnetisation of this magnet is not udnerstood.
 Grover suggested that earth's magnetism is due to flow of current near outer surface of earth. These currents
are produced due to sun. The hot air rising from regions near equator while going towards north and south
hemispheres gets electrifield. These then magnetise ferromagnetic materials near surface of earth.
 According to another view earth's core has many conducting materials like iron and nickel in molten state.
Conventional currents are produced in this semi fluid core due to rotation of earth about its axis which generates
magnetism.
 Another view says magnetism is due to presence of ionised gases in atmosphere. The high energy sun rays
ionize gas atoms in upper layer of atmoshpere. The radioactivity of atmosphere and cosmic rays also ionize
the gases. Strong electric currents flow due to rotation of earth producing magnetism.
 Thus most likely cause of earth's magnetism is the motion and distribution of charged materials in and outside
the earth.
SOME DEFINITIONS Axis of rotation of eath
 Geographic Axis : It is straight line passing through
the geographic poles of the earth. It is the axis of Magnetic axis
rotation of the earth. It is known as polar axis. Geographical Magnetic
North Pole NORTH
 Geographic Meridian : It is a vertical plane passing North Pole
through geographic north and south poles of the earth.
S Geographical
 Geographic Equator : A great circle on the surface Equator
of the earth in a plane perpendicular to geographical
N
axis is called geographic equator. All places on Magnetic
geographic equator are at equal distances from Equator
geographical poles. Magnetic Geographical SOUTH
 Magnetic Axis : It is a straight line passing through
South Pole South Pole
the magnetic poles of the earth. It is inclined to
geographic axis at nearly 17°.
MAGNETIC MERIDIAN
It is a vertical plane passing through the magnetic north and south poles of the earth.
 Magnetism and Matter 57
MAGNETIC EQUATOR
A great circle on the surface of the earth in a plane perpendicular to magnetic axis is called magnetic equator.
All places on magnetic euqator are at equal distance from magnetic poles.

MAGNETIC ELEMENTS
Geographical C
The physical quantities which determine the intensity of earth's North
total magnetic field completely both in magnitude and direction are 
Magnetic P A
called magnetic elements. H K
North BH
B Bv
 Angle of Declination () :
The angle between the magnetic meridian and geographic Magnetic E L
meridian at a place is called angle of declination. Meridian
 Isogonic Lines :
Lines drawn on a map through places that have same D
 S
declination are called isogonic lines. Q
Geographical
 Agonic Line :
Meridian
The line drawn on a map through places that have zero
declination is known as an agonic line.
0° Horizontal
 Angle of dip or inclination :
The angle through which the N pole dips down with  Angle of
reference to horizontal is called the angle of dip. At dip
magnetic north and south pole angle of dip is 90°.
At magnetic equator the angle of dip is zero. Earth's magnetic
OR 90° field
The angle which the direction of resultant field of earth
makes with the horizontal line of magnetic meridian is
called angle of dip. //////////////////////////
 Isoclinic Lines : Lines drawn up on a map through the places that have same dip are called isoclinic
lines.
 Aclinic Line : The line drawn through places that have zero dip is known as aclinic line. This is the
magnetic equator.
 Horizontal component of earth's magnetic field : The total intensity of the earth's magnetic field makes
an angle  with horizontal. It has
 Component in horizontal plane called horizontal component BH.
 Component in vertical plane called vertical component BV.
BV = B sin  BH = B cos 
BV
So  tan  and B  BH2  BV2
BH

IMPORTANT
 If  and  are known we can find direction of B.
 If  and BH are known we can find magnitude of B.
 So if ,  and BH are known we can find total field at a place. So these are called as Elements of earth's
magnetic field.
 The declination gives the plane, dip gives the direction and horizontal component gives magnitude of earth's
 58 Magnetism and Matter
magnetic field.
 If declination is ignored, then the horizontal component of earth's magnetic field is from geogrophic south
to geographic north.
 Angle of dip is measured by instrument called dip circle.

APPARENT DIP
The dip at a place is determined by a dip circle. It consists of magnetised needle capable of rotation in vertical
plane about a horizontal axis. The needle moves over a vertical scale graduated in degrees.
 When the plane of scale of dip circle is in the magnetic meridian the needle comes to rest in direction of
earth's magnetic field. The angle made by the needle with the horizontal is called true dip.
 If the plane of the scale of the dip circle is not in the magnetic meridian then
BH' = BH cos 
the needle will not indicate correct direction of earth's magnetic field. The

angle made by the needle with the horizontal is called apparent dip. e t i c 
n
Suppose dip circle is set at angle  to magnetic meridian. m a g rt h BH
no BV
Horizontal component BH '  BH cos  B
Vertical component BV' = BV (remains unchanged)
BV ' BV tan   BV 
Apparent dip is  ' tan  '     tan    true dip 
BH ' BH cos  cos   BH  Magnetic
 For a vertical plane other than magnetic meridian  > 0 or cos  < 1 meridian
So  ' > . In a vertical plane other than magnetic meridian angle of dip is
more than in magnetic meridian.
 
 For a plane perpendicular to magnetic meridian    tan  '   So  ' =
2 2
So in a plane perpendicular to magnetic meridian dip needle will become vertical.
 At magnetic equator :
 Angle of dip is zero.
 Vertical component of earths magnetic field becomes zero, BV = B sin  = B sin 0 = 0
 A freely suspended magnet will become horizontal at magnetic equator.
 At equator earth's magnetic field is parallel to earth's surface i.e., horizontal.
 At magnetic poles :
 Angle of dip is 90°.
 Horizontal component of earth's magnetic field becomes zero.
BH = B cos  = B cos 90° = 0
 A freely suspended magnet will become vertical at magnetic poles.
 At poles earth's magnetic field is perpendicular to the surface of earth i.e. vertical.

If 1 and 2 are angles of dip in two vertical planes at right angle to each other and  is true dip then prove
cot2  = cot2 1 + cot2 2.
Solution
If the vertical plane in which dip is 1 subtends an angle a with meridian than other vertical plane in which
Magnetism and Matter 59
dip is 2 and is perpendicular to first will make an angle of 90° –  with magnetic meridian. If 1 and 2
are apparent dips than
BV
tan 1 
BH cos

BV BV
tan  2  
BH cos(90   ) BH sin 
2
1 1 BH2 cos 2   BH2 sin 2  BH2  B cos 
cot 2 1  cot 2 2  2
 2
 2
 2  2
  cot 
(tan 1 ) (tan  2 ) BV BV  B sin  

So cot 2 1  cot 2  2  cot 2 

Considering earth as a short bar magnet shows that the angle of dip  is related to magnetic latitude 
as tan  = 2 tan 
Solution
For a magnetic dipole the field components at point P (r, ) are given as
µ0 2M cos  µ0 M sin  B
Br  B  Br
4 r3 4 r3
P
B B µ 2 M cos  4 r 3 S r
tan   V   r   0
BH B 4 r3 µ0 M sin  

or tan  = – 2 cot  N


From figure     . So tan   2cot      or tan  = 2 tan 
2 2 

At a certain location in Africa, a compass points 12° west of the geographic north. The north tip of the
magnetic needle of a dip circle placed in the plane of the magnetic meridian points 60° above the horizontal.
The horizontal component of the earth’s field is measured to be 0.16 G. Specify the direction and magnitude
of the earth’s field at the location.
Solution
Here, a = 12° W,  = 60°, BH = 0.16 G, B = ?
From formula, BH = B cos 
BH
B = = BH sec  = 0.16 × 20 = 0.32 G.
cos 
The earth’s field is 0.32 G, in direction 60° upwards from horizontal, in a plane (magnetic meridian) 12°
West of geographical meridian.
 60 Magnetism and Matter
A dip circle shows an apparent dip of 60° at a place where the true dip is 45°. If the dip circle is rotated
through 90° what apparent dip will it show?
Solution
Let 1 and 2 be apparent dip shown by dip circle in two perpendicular positions then true dip  is given
by
2 2 2 2 2 2
cot  = cot 1 + cot 2 or cot 45° = cot 60° + cot 2
2
or cot 2  2  or cot 2 = 0.816 giving 2 = 51°
3

–4
The horizontal component of earth's magnetic field is 0.4 × 10 T and the angle of dip is 30°. Calculate
the value of (i) vertical component (ii) the total intensity of the earth's magnetic field.
Solution
BH 0.4  104
The total field B    0.46  104 Tesla
cos  cos30
–4 –4
The vertical component BV = B sin  = 0.46 × 10 sin 30 = 0.23 × 10 Tesla

The true value of dip at a place is 45°. If the plane of dip circle is turned by 60° from magnetic meridian,
then what will be the apparent dip?
Solution
Let apparent dip be ', true dip be  and a is angle by which dip circle is turned
tan  tan 45
tan  '  or tan  '   2 or ' = tan–1 2 = 63.4°
cos  cos 60
MAGNETIC MAPS
Values of declination (), dip () and field strength (BH) vary from place to place and also for one place
as time passes. The information about these values for one place gives complete picture of the earth’s magnetic
field there. The maps giving these values are called magnetic maps.

ISOMAGNETIC CHARTS
Magnetic surveys all over the earth have been carried out and magnetic maps have been prepared which
show the values of magnetic elements through out the world. Lines are drawn to join places having the
same value of a particular magnetic element. Maps drawn in this way, are called Isomagnetic charts.
TYPE OF ISOMAGNETIC CHARTS
There are three types of Isomagnetic charts, one for each earth magnetic element :
 Magnetic map for declination () : In this map, lines joining places of equal declination, are called Isogonic
lines. A line joining places of zero declination is called Agonic line.
 Magnetic map for Dip () : In this map, lines joining places of equal dip, are called Isoclinic lines. A
line joining places of zero dip is called Aclinic line. This is magnetic equator.
 Magnetic map for horizontal component (BH) : In this map, lines joining places of equal horizontal component,
are called Isodynamic lines. The value of horizontal component is zero at magnetic poles.
 Magnetism and Matter 61
Since values of magnetic elements change with time so survey is made and charts are revised after every
30 years.
AURORA BOREALIS OR NORTHERN LIGHTS
This is beautiful and spectacular display of colours caused by the earth’s magnetic field and is seen in
extreme northern latitudes. It is caused as stream of electrons come racing down and are acted upon by
earth’s magnetic field. Since these phenomenon occur only near the magnetic poles they cannot be seen
anywhere in India.

LIMITS OF EARTH’S MAGNETIC FIELD

Earth’s magnetic field is like that of huge gaint sized magnet. But this field extends only upto a distance
of 32,000 km, which is five times the radius of earth. Beyond this distance the pattern is severely disturbed
by solar wind which consists of a steady stream of hot charged particles given out by the sun.

NEUTRAL POINT
When we plot magnetic field of a bar magnet the curves obtained represent the superposition of magnetic
fields due to bar magnet and earth.
NEUTRAL POINT
A neutral point in the magnetic field of a bar magnet is that point where the field due to the magnet is
completely neutralized by the horizontal component of earth's magnetic field. At neutral point field due
to bar magnet (B) is equal and opposite to horizontal component of earth's magnetic field (BH) orB =
BH.
 Neutral point when north pole of magnet is towards geographical north of earth.

N N
BH + BM =B X X

S S
B

The neutral points N1 and N2 lie on the equatorial line. The magnetic field due to magnet at neutral point
µ0 M
is B  Where M is magnetic dipole moment of magnet, 2 is its length and r is distance
4 (r   2 )3/2
2

of neutral point.
µ0 M
At neutral point B = BH. So  BH .
4 (r  2 )3/2
2

µ0 M
For a small bar magnet (2 << r2) then  BH
4 r 3
 Neutral point when south pole of magnet is towards geographical north of earth.
The neutral points N1 and N2 lie on the axial line of magnet. The magnetic field due to magnet at neutral
point is,
 62 Magnetism and Matter

µ0 2 Mr
B N X
4 (r   2 ) 2
2

At neutral point B = BH S S
µ0 2 Mr BH + BM =B
So,  BH
4 (r   2 ) 2
2
N N
2 2
For a small bar magnet ( << r ) B
X
µ0 2M
Then  BH
4 r 3

SPECIAL POINT
When a magnet is placed with its S pole towards north of earth neutral points lie on its axial line. If
magnet is placed with its N pole towards north of earth neutral points lie on its equatorial line. So neutral
points are displaced by 90° on rotating magnet through 180°. In general if magnet is rotated by angle 
neutral point turn through an angle  / 2.
NEUTRAL POINTS IN SPECIAL CASES
 If two bar magnets are placed with their axis parallel to each other and their opposite poles face each
other then there is only one neutral point (x) on the perpendicular bisector of the axis equidistant from
the two magnets.
 If two bar magnets are placed with their axis parallel to each other and their like poles face each other
then there are two neutral points on a line equidistant from the axis of the magnets.

N S N S

x X X

S N N S

(a) (b)
TANGENT LAW
 If a small bar magnet is suspended in two mutually perpendicular uniform BH mBH
magnetic fields B and BH such that it comes to rest making angle 
N
with direction of field BH then B = BH tan . A mB

 When a bar magnet is kept in two mutually perpendicular magnetic fields
B
2


then each field will exert a couple on the magnet tending to set it parallel mB
to itself. The torque due to BH tries to rotate the magnet in anticlockwise S
direction while torque due to B in clockwise direction. mBH
 In equilibrium torque due to BH = torque due to B, mBH × AN = mB × AS

AN
So B  BH  BH tan 
AS
 Magnetism and Matter 63

02 (4) At an angle of dip to the horizontal

16. At magnetic poles of earth, angle of dip is
11. The horizontal and vertical components of earth’s (1) Zero (2) 45°
magnetic field at a place are 0.3 G and 0.52 G. The earth’s
(3) 90° (4) 180°
magnetic field and the angle of dip are
(1) 0.3 G and  = 30º (2) 0.4 G and  = 40º 17. The correct relation is
(3) 0.5 G and  = 50º (4) 0.6 G and  = 60º BV
(1) B (2) B  BV  BH
12. In a certain place, the vertical component of earth’s BH
magnetic field is 0.5 oersted and angle of dip is 60º.
The earth’s magnetic field at that place is (3) | B |  BH2  BV2 (4) B  BH  BV

3 (Where Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field;

(1) 1 oersted (2) oersted
2 BH = Vertical component of earth’s magnetic field and
1 B = Total intensity of earth’s magnetic field)
(3) 2 oersted (4) oersted
3 18. At a certain place, the horizontal component of earth’s
13. The angle which the total magnetic field of earth makes magnetic field is 3 times the vertical component. The
with the surface of the earth is called
(1) declination (2) magnetic meridian angle of dip at that place is
(3) geographic meridian (4) inclination (1) 60° (2) 45°
14. The angle of dip at a certain place on earth is 60º and (3) 90° (4) 30°
the magnitude of earth’s horizontal component of 19. The vertical component of earth’s magnetic field is zero
magnetic field is 0.26 G. The magnetic field at the place at or The earth’s magnetic field always has a vertical
on earth is
component except at the
(1) 0.13 G (2) 0.26 G
(1) Magnetic poles (2) Geographical poles
(3) 0.52 G (4) 0.60 G
15. A dip needle in a plane perpendicular to magnetic (3) Every place (4) Magnetic equator
meridian will remain 20. The angle b etween the magnetic meridian and
(1) Vertical geographical meridian is called
(2) Horizontal (1) Angle of dip (2) Angle of declination
(3) In any direction (3) Magnetic moment (4) Power of magnetic field

5.6 P.No.: 191

Magnetizing Field (magnetic intensity)

The degree to which a magnetic field can magnetise a substance or the capability of external magnetic
field to magnetise the substance is called magnetic intensity.
 The magnetic field produced by the external source of current is called magnetising field.
 The magnetising field depends on external free currents and geometry of current carrying conductor.
 Magnetic intensity at a point in a magnetic field is defined as the number of magnetic lines of force passing
normally per unit area about that point taken in free space in the absence of any substance.
 In vacuum the ratio of magnetic induction (B0) and magnetic permeability (µ0) is called magnetising field

B0
H i.e. H 
µ0
 In a toroidal solenoid the magnetic induction of field produced in material of toroid is
B
B = µnI So Magnetising field H   n
µ
The magnetic intensity may be defined as the number of ampere turns flowing round a unit length of toroidal
solenoid to produce that magnetic field in the solenoid.
 64 Magnetism and Matter
 Unit of H
B tesla –1 –1
In SI system H   = ampere-meter (Am )
µ tesla meter-amp –1

F
B qv F N N
H 0  0   1 1
 Nm2T 1   NWb1  Jm1Wb1
µ0 µ0 q0 vµ0 C (ms ) TmA Wb

In cgs system unit of H is oerested

1 gauss 104 T 1000

1 oerested =  7 1
 Am 1  80 Am 1
µ0 4  10 TmA 4
0 –1 0 1
 It is a vector quantity with dimensions M L T A . Its direction is from north pole outwards.
 B and H for different situations
 Solenoid B = µ0nI, H = nI with n = N / L = number of turns per unit length.

N
 Toroid B = µ0nI, H = nI with n 
2 R
µ0 nΙ n
 Plane coil B  ,H 
2R 2R
   
µ0  d  r I (d  r )
 Current carrying element dB  , dH 
4 r 3 4 r 3
 The magnetic intensity is independent of nature of medium.
INTENSITY OF MAGNETISATION
It is defined as the magnetic dipole moment developed per unit volume when a magnetic material is subjected
to magnetising field.
magnetic dipole moment M
Intensity of magnetisation   
volume V
 It is a vector quantity whose direction is along the direction of magnetising field.
0 –1 0 1
 Its SI unit is ampere / m (A / m) and dimensions is M L T A .
 The intensity of magnetisation shows the extent to which the substance is magnetised.
 Intensity of magnetisation is also defined as pole strength developed per unit area of cross-section of specimen.
M m  2 m
  
V A  2 A
 I depends on nature of material.
 I depends on temperature.

 Different relations for intensity of magnetisation

 Volume intensity of magnetisation - I = M / V.

1 M  
 Mass intensity of magnetisation  mass   where r is density of material
  V  

W M  W 
 Molar intensity of magnentisation  molar       where W is atomic weight of substance
  V  
 Magnetism and Matter 65

W M  W 
 Molecular intensity of magnetisation,  molecular     mass  molar
N  V  N N
where N is Avogadro's number.

Magnetic Induction or Magnetic Flux Density

 Let a uniform magnetising field B0 represented by the parallel lines
exist in vacuum. When a soft iron bar (ferromagnetic material) is C
placed inside the field it gets magnetised. The left end becomes S
A S N B
pole and right end becomes N pole. It produces its own magnetic
field. At A and B field is increased while at C and D it is reduced.
 The magnetic induction is defined as the number of magnetic lines D
of induction (magnetic lines inside the material) crossing per unit area
normally through the magnetic substance.
 The magnetic induction B is sum of magnetic field B0 and field
µ0I produced due to magnetisation of substance C
B = B0 + µ0I = µ0 (H + I) A S N B
–2 –2
 Unit is tesla (T) or weber m (Wbm ). These are equivalent
–1 –1 –1 –1 D
to Nm A or JA m . The Cgs unit is gauss (G). 1 tesla =
4
10 gauss.
MAGNETIC SUSCEPTIBILITY
The magnetic susceptibility of a magnetic substance is defined as the ratio of the intensity of magnetisation

to magnetic intensity  m 
H
–1
 It is ratio of two quantities with same units (Am ), so it has no units.
 It gives the measure of ease with which a material can be magnetised by magnetising field.
 The value of m depends on nature of material and temperature.
 If H = 1 then m = I. So magnetic susceptibility is the intensity of magnetisation developed in the substance
when placed in a magnetising field of unit strength.

 Different relations for magnetic susceptibility are


 Volume magnetic susceptibility  m 
H

 Mass magnetic susceptiblity  mass  m ,  = density of material


W m
 Molar magnetic susceptibility  molar  , W = atomic weight


 Molecular magnetic susceptibility  molecular  W   m    molar

 
N   N

MAGNETIC PERMEABILITY
The magnetic permeability of a magnetic substance is defined as the ratio of the magnetic induction to
the magnetic intensity so m = B / H.
 66 Magnetism and Matter
2
 It is a scalar with unit weber / ampere-meter or henry / meter or newton / ampere and dimension M1
1 –2 –2
L T A .
 It is a measure of ability of a medium to allow passage of magnetic lines of force through it or measure
of degree to which magnetic field can penetrate through a material.
 Relative permeability
µ B number of lines of magnetic induction per unit area in a material
µr   
µ0 B0 number of lines per unit area in vacuum
 µr is a dimensionless quantity.
 µ is always positive and depends of nature of material and temperature.
Relation between Relative Magnetic Permeability and Susceptibility
When a magnetic material is kept in a magnetising field (H). Then total number of magnetic lines of force
inside the material = magnetic lines of force due to magnetising field + magnetic lines of force due to
magnetisation of specimen

i.e. B  B 0  I 0
Magnetic Induction ( No. of lines of force due to H) (No. of lines due to magnetisation of specimen)

or B = B0 + µ0I = µ0H + µ0I = µ0 (H + I)


B = µ0 (H + I) = µ0H (1 + m) as  m 
H
B = µH = µ0H (1 + m)
or µ = µ0 (1 + m)
or µ r = 1 + m.

–4
The magnetic field in the interior of a certain solenoid has the value of 6.5 × 10 T. When filled iron
the field becomes 1.4 T. Find relative permeability of iron and average28magnetic 3moment of an iron atom
if the number of atoms per unit volume in the sample is 8.45 × 10 atoms/m .
Solution
B 1.4
Relative permeability of iron µr    2154
B0 6.5  104

B  B0 1.4
Intensity of magnetisation    7
 1.11 106 A / m
µ0 4  3.14  10

 1.11  106
Average magnetic moment per atom =   1.31  1023 A  m 2
n 8.45  1028

2
A tungsten rod of length 10 cm and area of cross-section 0.25 cm is placed in a magnetising field –5 of
314 oersted, with its length parallel to the field. The magnetic susceptibility of tungsten is 6.8 × 10 .
Calculate the (i) intensity of magnetisation (ii) magnetic moment and (iii) absolute permeability.
Solution
Magnetism and Matter 67

314  103 105

Given H = 314 oersted = amp./m. = amp./m.
4 4

m6.8  105  105

(i) Intensity of magnetisation     1.7 amp./m.
H 4
–4 –6
(ii) Magnetic moment M = IV = 1.7 × 0.1 × 0.25 × 10 = 4.25 × 10 amp./m.
–7 –5
(iii)Absolute permeability µ = µr µ0 = µ0 (1 + m) = 4 × 10 [1 + 6.8 × 10 ]
–7
= 12.56 × 10 Wb / A-m

A solenoid of 500 turns / m is carrying a current of 3 A. Its core is made of iron which has a relative
permeability of 5000. Determine the magnitude of magnetic intensity, magnetisation and magnetic field
inside the core.
Solution
Magnetic intensity H = ni = 500 × 3 = 1500 A/m
µr = 1 + m. So m = µr – 1 = 4999  5000
Intensity of magnetisation I = H = 5000 × 1500 = 7.5 × 106 A/m
–7
Magnetic field B = µr µ0 H = 5000 × 4 × 10 × 1500 = 9.4 tesla.

An electron in an atom revolves around the nucleus in an orbit9 of radius 0.53 A. Calculate the equivalent
magnetic moment if the frequency of revolution is 6.8 × 10 MHz.
Solution
e
Magnetic moment M   A    r 2  ev r 2
T
–19 9 –10 2 –24 2
So M = 1.6 × 10 × 6.8 × 10 × 3.14 × (0.53 × 10 ) = 9.6 × 10 Am .

–2
An iron rod 0.2 m long 10 m in diameter and of permeability 1000 is placed inside a long solenoid
wound with 300 turns per meter. If a current of 0.5 A is passed through the rod find magnetic moment
of rod.
Solution
B µH
B = µ0 (H + I) So   µ  H  µ  H  ( µr  1) H
0 0
For a solenoid B = µ0ni
B
So H  ni So I = (µr – 1) ni
µ0
2
I = (1000 – 1) 300 × 0.5 = 999 × 150 Am .
2
Magnetic moment of rod M = I × V = Ir 
–2
= 999 × 150 × 3.14 × (0.5 × 10 ) × 0.2
–1
= 0.2325 JT .
 68 Magnetism and Matter
HYSTERESIS
The lagging of intensity of magnetisation (I) or magnetic induction (B)
behind the magnetising field (H) during the process of magnetisation and I A
demagnetisation of a ferromagnetic material is called hysteresis. B

IMPORTANT POINTS
–H0 C H0
 At point O the magnetising field (H) is zero and and intensity of magnetisation H O F H
(I) or B is also zero.
 The part OA of curve shows that I (or B) increases with H. At point A E
ferromagnetic material acquires the state of magnetic saturation. I
D
 When H decreases I (or B) also decreases along AB. At point B magnetising
field H becomes zero but I (or B) is non zero.
Retentivity : The value of I (or B) of a material when the magnetising field is reduced to zero is called
retentivity or residual magnetism of the material. Retentivity is measured by part OB of curve.
 Now H is increased in reverse direction to make I (or B) zero. I (or B) now decreases along BC and
becomes zero at C.
Coercivity : The value of reverse magnetising field required to reduce residual magnetism to zero is called
coercivity of the material. This is measured by part OC of curve.
 When H is further increased I (or B) increases along CD. At D material acquires state of magnetic saturation.
(D is symmetrical to point A).
 Here magnetising field H becomes zero before I (or B). The intensity of magnetisation I (or B) always
lags behind H. This is called hysteresis. The entire hysteresis loop is traced if H is repeatedly changed
between H0 and – H0.
 The area of hysteresis loop is a measure of energy dissipated per cycle per unit volume of the the specimen
and depends on nature of material.
In SI system area of B-H loop = µ0 (area of I-H loop)
In cgs system area of B H loop = 4 (area of I-H loop)
 The loss in energy appears as heat.
 The slope of B-H curve gives permeability of material while the slope of I-H curve gives susceptibility.
 If A is area of loop, V is volume of material, n is frequency then energy lost in magnetising and demagnetising
AVnt
specimen for time t is E = AVnt Joule and Heat produced  calorie
J
SOFT AND HARD MAGNETIC MATERIALS
Soft Magnetic Material Hard Magnetic Material

1. These materials have low retentivity, low coercivity, 1. These materials have high retentivity, high coercivity,
small hysteresis loss and high saturation magnetisation. large hystersis loss and high saturation magnetisation.
2. These are suitable for temporary magnetism. 2. These are suitable for permanent magnetism.
B
B

H H
Soft magnetic Hard magnetic
material material

For Example, Soft iron for making cores of transformers, For Example, Nickel, Neodymium
motors, generators mu-metal for audio coils, magnetic
shielding stalloy for pulse transformers, magnetic amplifiers.
Magnetism and Matter 69
COMPARISION OF PROPERTIES OF SOFT IRON AND STEEL
 The area of hysteresis loop for soft iron is much smaller I SOFT IRON
than for steel so energy loss per unit volume per cycle
or soft iron is smaller than steel.
STEEL
 The retentivity of soft iron is greater than that of steel.
 The coercivity of steel is much larger than that of soft iron. H H
 The magnetisation and demagnetisation is easier in soft iron
than steel. I
 Soft iron acquires saturation magnetisation for quite low value
of magnetising field than in case of steel or soft iron is much
strongly magnetised than steel.

An iron sample
4
of mass 8.4 kg is repeatedly magnetised and demagnetised at a frequency of 350 cycles/
sec. 3.2 × 10 Joule of energy is lost as heat in 30 minutes. If density of iron is 7200 kg/m calculate
the value of energy dissipated per unit volume per cycle in iron sample.
Solution
If H is energy lost per unit volume per second in iron sample then energy lost by sample in a given time
t is E = HVnt where V is volume of sample
E 3.2  104  7200
So H    304.8 Jm 3cycle 1
Vnt 8.4  50  30  60

5.6.1 P.No.: 192

The substances which when placed in a magnetic field are feebly magnetised in a direction opposite to
that of the magnetising field are called diamagnetic substances.
 The property of diamagnetism is found to exist normally in substances whose atoms or molecules have
even number of electrons. The orbital motion of electrons in a pair are in opposite direction. So each atom
has net magnetic dipole moment equal to zero.
 When diamagnetic substance is kept in an external field it causes acceleration of one electron and deceleration
of other in the pair. A net dipole moment is produced in a direction opposite to field.
 Diamagnetic effects are very weak. The diamagnetic property is not affected by temperature of substance.
 Some diamagnetic substances are Cu, Zn, Bi, Ag, Au, Pb, He, Ar, NaCl, H2O, marble, glass etc.

5.6.2 P.No.: 192

The substances which when placed in a magnetic field are feebly magnetised in the direction of magnetising
field are called paramagnetic substances.
 The property of paramagnetism is found to exist in substances whose atoms or molecules have an excess
of electron spinning in same direction.
 Atoms of paramagnetic substances possess a permanent magnetic dipole moment and thus behave like small
bar magnets called atomic magnets.
 In absence of external magnetic field paramagnetic substances do not show any magnetism because atomic
magnets are randomly oriented so net magnetic dipole moment is zero.
 In presence of external field each atomic magnet experiences a torque which tries to rotate and align them
 70 Magnetism and Matter
parallel to direction of magnetic field. The substance acquires net dipole moment and thus gets magnetised
in direction of field.
 The property of paramagnetism is temperature dependent. The thermal agitation on increase of temperature
spoils the alignment of atomic magnets which reduces net magnetic dipole moment.
Atomic magnets External magnetic field

Unmagnetised Magnetised
 Some paramagnetic substances are Al, Na, Sb, Pt, CuCl2, Mn, Cr, liquid oxygen etc.

5.6.3 P.No.: 193

The substances which when placed in a magnetic field are strongly magnetised in the direction of the magnetising
field are called ferromagnetic substances.
 Each atom of ferromagnetic material posseses permanent magnetic dipole moment before application of
external magnetic field.
 The unpaired electron of one atom interacts with electron of neighbouring atom through quantum mechanical
exchange interaction and align in a common direction over a small volume of material. These small volume
–18 3
of uniform magnetisation are called domains which are small in size (10 m ) but contain large number
11
of atomic dipoles (~10 )
 In absence of external field the domains may be randomly oriented so that their resultant magnetic dipole
moment in any direction is zero.
 If presence of external field the magnetic dipole moment increases due to :
 Displacement of boundaries of domains : Here size of domain with magnetic dipole moment parallel
to applied field increases while for others it decreases.
 Rotation of domains : Here domains rotate until their magnetic dipole moments are aligned parallel
to direction of external field.
 In presence of weaker fields displacement of boundaries takes place while in stronger fields rotation of
domains takes place.
External field External field

Random orientation Displacement Rotation

of domains of domains of domains
 When external magnetic field is removed substance is not totally demagnetised and some magnetism is
left in specimen.
 On heating it loses property of ferromagnetism at certain temperature called Curie temperature and becomes
paramagnetic. On cooling it becomes ferromagnetic again. The Curie temperature for iron is 770°C.
 Magnetism and Matter 71
 Ferromagnetic substances are paramagnetic substances which acquire very high magnetism in external magnetic
field. The two differ in the order of their intensity of magnetism.

PROPERTIES OF DIAMAGENTIC, PARAMAGNETIC & FERROMAGNETIC MATERIALS

DIAMAGNETIC MATERIALS
 The substances which when placed in a magnetising field get feebly magnetised in a direction opposite
to magnetising field are called diamagnetic.

N N S S

 The substances are weakly repelled by the field so in a non uniform field these have a tendency to move
from strong to weak field.

N N S S

 A diamagnetic rod sets itself perpendicular to field because field is strongest at poles.
A

N S

 A diamagnetic liquid in a U-tube depresses in the limb which is between the poles of magnet.
H
O

I
 Intensity of magnetisation I is very small, negative and proportional to magnetising field.
 –5
 Magnetic susceptibility  m  is small and negative ( 10 )
H
H
m

µ
 The relative permeability µr  is slightly less than unity.. H
µ0 Diamagnetic
B<H
The field inside the material B is less than magnetising field H.
They have C a tendency to expel lines of force.
m
 Magnetic dipole moment (M) is small and opposite to magnetising
field H.
 Diamagnetic substances do not obey Curie's law and show no transition
Temperature (T)
at Curie temperature Xm is indepedent of temperature.
 The origin of diamagnetism is the induced dipole moment due to change in orbital motion of electrons in
atoms by applied field.
 72 Magnetism and Matter
Imp. Diamagnetism is present in all materials and is independent of temperature. As it is weak it is often
masked by para and ferromagnetic effects.
 The atoms do not have any permanent dipole moment i.e. paired spin.
 Diamagnetism is exhibited by solids, liquids and gases.
N S
 If a diamagnetic liquid is placed in a watch glass placed. On two pole pieces
which are quite close to each other then liquid accumulates at sides and shows
depression in the middle, where field is strongest.
 If a diamagnetic liquid is placed in a watch glass placed on two pole pieces N S
which are sufficiently apart then liquid accumulates in the middle where field
is weakest.
 Diamagnetic substances are Cu, Zn, Bi, Ag, Au, Pb, He, Ar, NaCl, H2O, marble, glass etc.
PARAMAGNETIC SUBSTANCES
 The substances which when placed in a magnetising field get feebly N S I N S
magnetised in a direction parallel to magnetising field are called
paramagnetic.
 The substances are weakly attracted by the field so in non uniform
field they have a tendency to move from strong to weak fields. N S N S

 A paramagnetic rod sets itself parallel to the field because field

is strongest near poles.

N S

I
 A paramagnetic liquid in a U-tube ascends in the limb which
is between the poles of magnet.
 Intensity of magnetisation I is very small, positive and directly H
proportional to magnetising field.
–3 –5
 Magnetic susceptibility  m   is small and positive (~10 to 10 ).
B>H
H

µ Paramagnetic
 The relative permeability µr  is slightly greater than one.
µ0
The field B inside the material B is greater than magnetising field H.
They have a tendency to pull in the lines of force. m
 Magnetic dipole moment (M) is small and parallel to magnetising

field H.
T
Magnetism and Matter 73
 The paramagnetic substances obey Curies law according to which
magnetic susceptiblity is inversely proportional to its absolute temperature.
m    C
H T
 Paramagnetism is due to partial alignment of randomly oriented atomic dipoles along the field.
 The atoms of paramagnetic substances have permanent dipole
moment i.e. unpaired spin.
 Paramagnetism is exhibited by solids, liquids and gases. N S
 If a paramagnetic liquid is placed in a watch glass placed on two pole pieces
which are quite close to each other then liquids accumulates in the middle
where field is strongest.
 If a paramagnetic liquid is placed in a watch glass placed on two pole pieces N S
which are sufficiently apart then liquid accumulates at sides and shows depression
in the middle because field is strongest at poles.
 Paramagnetic substances are Al, Na, K, Sb, Pt, CuCl2, Mn, Cr, Sn, liquid oxygen etc.

FERROMAGNETIC SUBSTANCES
 The substances which when placed in a magnetising field get strongly magnetised in a direction parallel
to magnetising field are called ferromagnetic.
 The substances are strongly attracted by the field so in non uniform field they have a tendency to stick
at poles where field is strongest.
 The ferromagnetic rod sets itself parallel to the field immediately.
 When a ferromagnetic substance is liquified it loses ferromagnetic Is
properties due to larger temperatrure. I
 Intensity of magnetisation I is very large, positive and varies non-linearly with
magnetising field. Is is saturation magnetisation with depends on nature of
material. Hs
3 5
 The magnetic susceptiblity m is very large (~10 to 10 ) and positive. H
µ 3 5
 The relative permeability µr  µ is also very large (~10 – 10 ) and varies
0

non linearly with magnetising field. The field inside the material B is much
stronger than magnetising field H. They have a tendency of pulling in a large mr
number of lines of force by the
material. H
 Magnetic dipole moment (M) is large and in direction of magnetising field H.
C
 The ferromagnetic substances obey Curie-Weiss law  m  (for T > TC) TC is Curie temperature
T  TC
which depends on nature of material (TC of iron = 1043 K = 770°C). Above Curie temperature a ferromagnetic
material behaves as paramagnetic.

m 1
m

TC T TC T
 74 Magnetism and Matter
 Ferromagnetism arises due to spin orbit interaction. Due to interaction of spin of electrons of one atom
with neighbouring atom, material gets divided into small regions called domanins which are magnetised. The
direction of magnetisation varies from one domain to other. In presence of weak external field the material
is magnetised by domain growth through wall displacement and by domain rotation in presence of strong
fields.
 The atoms of ferromagnetic substances have permanent dipole moment present in domains.
 Ferromagnetism is exhibited by crystalline solids.
 If a ferromagnetic powder is placed in a watch glass place on two pole pieces which are quite close
to each other then powder acumulates quickly in the middle where field is strongest.

N S

 If a ferromagnetic powder is placed in a watch glass placed on two pole pieces which are sufficiently
apart then powder accumulates at sides and shows depression in the middle because field is strongest at
poles.

N S

 Fe, Co, Ni and their alloys are ferromagnetic.

03 (2) A for electromagnets and B for electric generators.

(3) A for transformers and B for electric generators.
21. A solenoid h as core of a material with relative (4) B for electromagnets and transformers.
permeability 500 and its windings carry a current of 1 25. The correct definition of Meissner effect is
A. The number of turns of the solenoid is 500 per metre. (1) The phenomenon of perfect paramagnetism in
The magnetization of the material is nearly superconductors.
(1) 2.5 × 10 3 A m–1 (2) 2.5 × 105 A m–1 (2) The phenomenon of perfect diamagnetism in
3 –1
(3) 2.0 × 10 A m (4) 2.0 × 105 A m–1 superconductors.
22. The relation connecting magnetic susceptibility  m (3) The phenomenon of perfect diamagnetism in
and relative permeability µ r is semiconductors.
(1) m = µr + 1 (2) m = µr – 1 (4) The phenomenon of ferromagnetism in metals.
(3) m = 1 / µ r (4) m = 3(1 + µr) 26. The magnetic properties of a magnet is lost at its:
23. The susceptibility of a ferromagnetic substance is (1) melting point (2) boiling point
(1) > 1 (2) Zero (3) Curie point (4) triple point
(3) >> 1 (4) < 1 27. Which of the following statements is true for the three
24. Hysteresis loops for two magnetic materials A and B types of magnetism - para, dia and ferro?
are given below: (1) Paramagneti sm is associated wit h negative
susceptibility and dia and ferromagnetism with
positive susceptibility.
H H (2) Diamagnetism is generally weakest of the three,
and is associated with negative susceptibility.
(3) Ferromagnetism is the strongest of the three and
(A) (B) is associated with negative susceptibility.
These materials are used to make magnets for electric (4) All three are associated wit h positive
generators, transformer core and electromagnet core. susceptibility, diamagnetism is the weakest form
Then it is proper to use of magnetism, and ferromagnetism is the strongest
(1) A for electric generators and transformers. form.
 Magnetism and Matter 75
28. If the magnetic susceptibility of a material is large and (3) The origin of diamagnetism is t he spin of
positive. The material is electrons.
(1) diamagnetic (2) ferromagnetic (4) The material move from a region of strong
(3) paramagnetic (4) perfect diamagnetic magnetic field to weak magnetic field.
29. Which one of the following is not a characteristics of 30. Ferromagnetic materials used in a transformer must
diamagnetism? have
(1) The diamagnetic materials are repelled by a bar (1) low permeability and high hysterisis loss
magnet. (2) high permeability and low hysterisis loss
(2) The magnetic susceptibility of the materials is (3) high permeability and high hysterisis loss
small and negative. (4) low permeability and high hysterisis loss

5.7 Synopsis
 GILBERT'S MAGNETISM (EARTH'S MAGNETIC  Torque on dipole placed in uniform magnetic field
FIELD) :   
 M×B
 The line of earth's magnetic induction lies in a vertical
 Potential energy of dipole placed in an uniform field
plane coinciding with the magnetic North- South  
direction at that place. This plane is called the Magnetic U =  M.B
Meridian. Earth's magnetic axis is slightly inclined to  Intensity of magnetisation
the geometric axis of earth and this angle varies from I=M/V
10.50 to 200. The Earth's Magnetic poles are opposite to  Magnetic induction B = μH = μ 0 (H+1)
the geometric poles i.e. at earth's north pole, its magnetic
south pole is situated and vice versa. B
 On the magnetic meridian plane, the magnetic induction  Magnetic permeability μ =
H
vector of the earth at any point, generally inclined to
the horizontal at an angle called the Magnetic Dip at 1
  Magnetic suspectibility  m    1
that place , such that B = total magnetic induction of H
the earth at that point.  Curie law
 
BV = the vertical component of B in the magnetic 1
 For paramagnetic materials  m 
meridian plane = B sin  T
 
BH = the horizontal component of B in the magnetic  Curie Wires law
meridian plane = B cos . 1
 For Ferromagnetic materials  m 
BV T  Tc
 tan 
BH Where Tc = curie temperature
 At a given place on the surface of the earth, the magnetic  A charged particle moves perpendicular to magnetic field.
meridian and the geographic meridian may not coincide. Its kinetic energy will remain constant but momentum
The angle between them is called “DECLINATION AT changes because magnetic force acts perpendicular to
THAT PLACE” velocity of particle.
 If a unit north pole rotates around a current carrying wire
 Magnetic dipole then work has to be done because magnetic field produced
 Magnetic moment M = m × 2l where m = pole strength by current is always non-conservative in nature.
of the magnet.  In a conductor, free electrons keep on moving but no
 Magnetic field at axial point (or End-on) of dipole magnetic force acts on a conductor in a magnetic field

 μ 2M because in a conductor, the average thermal velocity of
B= 0 3 electrons is zero.
4 r
 Magnetic field at equatorial position (Broad-on) of dipole  Magnetic force between two charges is generally much

 μ 0 ( M) smaller then the electric force between them because speeds
B= 3 3 of charges are much smaller than the free space speed of
4 r
light.
μ 0 Mcos
Magnetic Potential V = Fmagnetic v2
4 r 2 
Note :
μ 0 M 1+3cos 2θ Felectric c2
Magnetic field B =
4 r3
 76 Magnetism and Matter

31. An iron rod of length L and magnetic moment M is bent 39. Ratio of magnetic intensities for an axial point and a
in the form of a semicircle. Now its magnetic moment point on broad side-on position at equal distance d
will be from the centre of magnet will be or The magnetic field
at a distance d from a short bar magnet in longitudinal
2M
(1) M (2) and transverse positions are in the ratio

(1) 1 : 1 (2) 2 : 3
M
(3) (4) M (3) 2 : 1 (4) 3 : 2

32. Unit of magnetic flux density (or magnetic induction) 40. The magnetism of magnet is due to
is (1) The spin motion of electron
(1) Tesla (2) Earth
(2) Weber / metre2 (3) Pressure of big magnet inside the earth
(3) Newton / ampere-metre (4) Cosmic rays
(4) All of the above 41. A very small magnet is placed in the magnetic meridian
33. Magnetic intensity for an axial point due to a short bar with its south pole pointing north. The null point is
magnet of magnetic moment M is given by obtained 20 cm away from the centre of the magnet. If
the earth’s magnetic field (horizontal component) at
0 M 0 M
(1)  (2)  this point be 0.3 gauss, the magnetic moment of the
4 d3 4 d 2 magnet is
0 M 0 M (1) 8.0 × 102 e.m.u. (2) 1.2 × 103 e.m.u.
(3)  3 (4) 
2 d 2 d 2 3
(3) 2.4 × 10 e.m.u. (4) 3.6 × 103 e.m.u.
34. A magnet is placed in iron powder and then taken out,
then maximum iron powder is at 42. Intensity of magnetic field due to earth at a point inside
a hollow steel box is
(1) Some away from north pole
(1) Less than outside (2) More than outside
(2) Some away from south pole
(3) The middle of the magnet (3) Same (4) Zero
(4) The end of the magnet 43. Earth’s magn etic field always has a horizontal
35. A magnet of magnetic moment M and pole strength m component except at or Horizontal component of
is divided in two equal parts, then magnetic moment of earth’s magnetic field remains zero at
each part will be (1) Equator (2) Magnetic poles
(1) M (2) M / 2 (3) A latitude of 60° (4) An altitude of 60°
(3) M / 4 (4) 2M 44. A dip needle in a plane perpendicular to magnetic
36. Points A and B are situated along the extended axis of meridian will remain
2 cm long bar magnet at a distance x and 2x cm (1) Vertical
respectively. From the pole nearer to the points, the (2) Horizontal
ratio of the magnetic field at A and B will be (3) In any direction
(1) 4 : 1 exactly (2) 4 : 1 approx.
(4) At an angle of dip to the horizontal
(3) 8 : 1 exactly (4) 8 : 1 approx.
45. At magnetic poles of earth, angle of dip is
37. If a magnet of pole strength m is divided into four parts
such that the length and width of each part is half that (1) Zero (2) 45°
of initial one, then the pole strength of each part will (3) 90° (4) 180°
be 46. The correct relation is
(1) m / 4 (2) m / 2
BV
(3) m / 8 (4) 4m (1) B (2) B  BV  BH
BH
38. The distance of two points on the axis of a magnet
from its centre is 10 cm and 20 cm respectively. The (3) | B |  BH2  BV2 (4) B  BH  BV
ratio of magnetic intensity at these points is 12.5 : 1.
The length of the magnet will be (Where Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field;
(1) 5 cm (2) 25 cm BH = Vertical component of earth’s magnetic field and
(3) 10 cm (4) 20 cm B = Total intensity of earth’s magnetic field)
 Magnetism and Matter 77
47. At a certain place, the horizontal component of earth’s 57. Two magnets of same size and mass make respectively
magnetic field is 3 times the vertical component. The 10 and 15 oscillations per minute at certain place. The
angle of dip at that place is ratio of their magnetic moments is
(1) 60° (2) 45° (1) 4 : 9 (2) 9 : 4
(3) 90° (4) 30° (3) 2 : 3 (4) 3 : 2
48. The vertical component of earth’s magnetic field is zero 58. Time period for a magnet is T. If it is divided in four
at or The earth’s magnetic field always has a vertical equal parts along its axis and perpendicular to its axis
component except at the as shown then time period for each part will be
(1) Magnetic poles (2) Geographical poles
(3) Every place (4) Magnetic equator
49. The angle b etween the magnetic meridian and N S
geographical meridian is called
(1) Angle of dip (2) Angle of declination
(3) Magnetic moment
(1) 4T (2) T/4
(4) Power of magnetic field
(3) T/2 (4) T
50. The lines of forces due to earth’s horizontal component
59. Keeping dissimilar poles of two magnets of equal pole
of magnetic field are
strength and length same side, their time period will be
(1) Parallel straight lines (2) Concentric circles
(1) Zero (2) One second
(3) Elliptical (4) Parabolic
(3) Infinity (4) Any value
51. Time period of a freely suspended magnet does not 60. Time period in vibration magnetometer will be infinity
depend upon at
(1) Length of the magnet (1) Magnetic equator (2) Magnetic poles
(2) Pole strength of the magnet (3) Equator (4) At all places
(3) Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field 61. Magnets cannot be made from which of the following
(4) Length of the suspension thread substances
52. Magnetic mo ments of two bar magnets may be (1) Iron (2) Nickel
compared with the help of (3) Copper (4) All of the above
(1) Deflection magnetometer 62. The magnetic moment of atomic neon is
(2) Vibration magnetometer (1) Zero (2) µB / 2
(3) Both of the above (3) µB (4) 3µB / 2
(4) None of the above 63. Which of the following is most suitable for the core of
53. The time period of oscillation of a freely suspended electromagnets
bar magnet with usual notations is given by (1) Soft iron (2) Steel
I (3) Copper-nickel alloy (4) Air
MBH
(1) T  2 (2) T  2 64. Demagnetisation of magnets can be done by
MBH I
(1) Rough handling (2) Heating
I BH (3) Magnetising in the opposite direction
(3) T (4) T  2
MBH MI (4) All the above
54. In sum and difference method in vibration 65. A ferromagnetic material is heated above its curie
magnetometer, the time period is more if temperature. Which one is a correct statement
(1) Similar poles of both magnets are on same sides (1) Ferromagnetic domains are perfectly arranged
(2) Opposite poles of both magnets are on same sides (2) Ferromagnetic domains becomes random
(3) Both magnets are perpendicular to each other (3) Ferromagnetic domains are not influenced
(4) Nothing can be said (4) Ferromagnet ic material changes itself into
55. At a certain place a magnet makes 30 oscillations per diamagnetic material
minute. At another place where the magnetic field is 66. If a diamagnetic substance is brought near north or
double, its time period will be south pole of a bar magnet, it is
(1) 4 sec (2) 2 sec (1) Attracted by the poles
1 (2) Repelled by the poles
(3) sec (4) 2 sec (3) Repelled by the north pole and attracted by the
2
56. Vibration magnetometer is used for comparing south pole
(4) Attracted by the north pole and repelled by the
(1) Magnetic fields (2) Earth’s field
south pole
(3) Magnetic moments (4) All of the above
 78 Magnetism and Matter
67. The material of permanent magnet has 69. Temperature above which a ferromagnetic substance
(1) High retentivity, low coercivity becomes paramagnetic is called
(2) Low retentivity, high coercivity (1) Critical temperature (2) Boyle’s temperature
(3) Low retentivity, low coercivity (3) Debye’s temperature (4) Curie temperature
(4) High retentivity, high coercivity 70. When a magnetic substance is heated, then it
68. The permanent magnet is made from which one of the (1) Becomes a strong magnet
following substances (2) Losses its magnetism
(1) Diamagnetic (2) Paramagnetic (3) Does not effect the magnetism
(3) Ferromagnetic (4) Electromagnetic (4) Either (1) or (3)
 Magnetism and Matter 79

(Concept Builder)

1. A toroid of n turns, mean radius R and cross- (3) domains are partially aligned.
sectional radius a carries current I. It is placed on (4) domains are all perfectly aligned.
a horizontal table taken as x-y plane. Its magnetic
 4. Consider the two idealized systems: (i) a parallel
moment m
(1) is non-zero and points in the z-direction by plate capacitor with large plates and small
symmetry. separation and (ii) a long solenoid oflength L >>
 R, radius of cross-section. In (i) E is ideally
(2) points along the axis of the tortoid (m  mˆ )
treated as a constant between plates and zero
(3) is zero, otherwise there would be a field falling outside. In (ii) magnetic field is constant inside
as 1/r 3 at large distances outside the toroid. the solenoid and zero outside. These idealised
(4) is pointing radially outwards. assumptions, however, contradict fundamental
laws as below:
5. The magnetic field of Earth can be modelled by (1) case (i) contradicts Gauss¡¦s law for
that of a point dipole placed at the centre of the electrostatic fields.
Earth. The dipole axis makes an angle of 11.3° (2) case (ii) contradicts Gauss¡¦s law for magnetic
with the axis of Earth. At Mumbai, declination is fields.
nearly zero. Then,  
(1) the declination varies between 11.3° W to (3) case (i) agrees with   E.dl  0.
11.3° E.  
(2) the least declination is 0°. (4) case (ii) contradicts   l  Ien
H.d
(3) the plane defined by dipole axis and Earth 5. A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation
axis passes through Greenwich. of 8 Am–1 when placed in an external magnetic
(4) declination averaged over Earth must be field of 0.6T at a temperature of 4K. When the
always negative. same sample is placed in an external magnetic field
of 0.2 T at a temperature of 16K, the magnetisation
3. In a permanent magnet at room temperature will be
(1) magnetic moment of each molecule is zero.
32 2
(2) the individual molecules have non-zero (1) Am 1 (2) Am 1
magnetic moment which are all perfectly 3 3
aligned. (3) 6 Am–1 (4) 2.4 Am–1
 80 Magnetism and Matter

• Instructions for Questions 1 to 5 5. Assertion : Magnetic moment of helium atom is

Given bel ow are two statements : one is labelled as zero.
Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). Reason : All the electron are paired in helium
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most atom orbitals.
appropriate answer from the options given below :
• Instructions for Questions 6 to 10
(1) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct
explanation of (A) Given below are two statements :
(2) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most
explanation of (A) appropriate answer from the options given below :
(3) (A) is correct the (R) is not correct (1) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
(4) (A) is not correct but (R) is correct (2) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
(3) Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
1. Assertion : When radius of circular loop carrying
(4) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
current is doubled, its magnetic moment becomes
four times.
6. Statement I : Soft iron is used as transformer core.
Reason : Magnetic moment depends on area of Statement II : Soft iron has narrow hysteresis loop.
the loop.
7. Statement I : The earth’s magnetic field does not affect
2. Assertion : The tangent galvanometer can be the working of a moving coil galvanometer.
made more sensitive by increasing the number of Statement II : Earth’s magnetic field is very weak.
turns of its coil.
Reason : Current through galvanometer is 8. Statement I : The poles of magnet cannot be separated
proportional to the number of turns of coil. by breaking into two pieces.
Statement II : The magnetic moment will be reduced to
half when a magnet is broken into two equal pieces.
3. Assertion : Magnetism is relativistic.
Reason : When we move along with the charge 9. Statement I : To protect any instrument from external
so that there is no motion relative to us, we find magnetic field, it is put inside an iron body.
no magnetic field associated with the charge. Statement II : Iron is a magnetic substance.

4. Assertion : A paramagnetic sample display 10. Statement I : Diamagnetic materials can exhibit
magnetism.
greater magnetisation (for the same magnetising
Statement II : Diamagnetic materials have permanent
field) when cooled. magnetic dipole moment.
Reason : The magnetisation does not depend on
temperature.
Magnetism and Matter 81

(Direct from
NCERT)

Match the List-I and List-II and choose the correct (2) (a) – (iv); (b) – (iii); (c) – (i); (d) – (ii)
combination from the options given. (3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (ii, iv)
(4) (a) – (i); (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i); (d) – (iii)
1. Match the following
List - I List - II 2. Match the following
(a) Intensity of (i) unitless List - I List - II
Magnetising field (H) (a) Diamagnetic substances (i) |  |  102
(b) Intensity of (ii) Henry / metre
(b) Paramagnetic substances (ii) ||1
Magnetisation (I)
(c) Magnetic (iii) amp / metre (c) Ferromagnetic substances (iii)   1
susceptibility ()
(1) (a) – (ii); (b) – (r); (c) – (i)
(d) Magnetic (iv) amp-turns / metre
(2) (a) – (i, iii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii)
Permeability
(3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii)
(1) (a) – (ii); (b) – (ii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (iv) (4) (a) – (i); (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i)
 82 Magnetism and Matter

(Previous Year Questions)

1. In which type of material the magnetic suscetibility magnetic field B = 6 × 10–4 T exists in the space. The
does not depend on temperature? [AIPMT-2001] work done in taking the maget slowly from a direction
(1) Diamagnetic (2) Paramagnetic parallel to the field to a direction 60° from the field is
(3) Ferromagnetic (4) Ferrite (1) 0.6 J (2) 12 J [AIPMT-2009]
2. Two bar magnets having same geometry with magnetic (3) 6 J (4) 2 J
moments M and 2 M, are firstly placed in such a way 10. A vibration magnetometer placed in magnetic meridian
that their similar poles are on the same side, then its has a small bar magnet. The magn et executes
period of oscillation is T1. Now, the polarity of one of oscillations with a time period fo 2 s in the earth’s
the magnets is reversed the time period of oscillations horizontal magnetic field of 24 µT. When a horizontal
becomes T 2. Then [AIPMT-2002] field of 18 µT is produced opposite to the earth’s field
(1) T1 < T2 (2) T1 > T2 by placing a current carrying wire, the new time period
(3) T1 = T2 (4) T2 =  of magnet will be [AIPMT-2010]
3. A diamagnetic material in a magnetic field moves (1) 1 s (2) 2 s
(1) perpendicular to the field [AIPMT-2003] (3) 3 s (4) 4 s
(2) from weaker to the stronger parts of the field 11. There are four light weight rod samples A, B, C and D
(3) from stronger to the weaker parts of the field separately suspended by thread. A bar magnet is slowly
brough near each sample and the following
(4) None of the above
observations are noted [AIPMT-2011]
4. According to Curie’s law, the magnetic susceptibility
(i) A is feebly repelled
of a paramagnetic substance at an absolute temperature
T is proportionsl to [AIPMT-2003] (ii) B is feebly attracted
(1) 1/T 2 (2) T2 (iii) C is strongly attracted
(3) 1/T (4) T (iv) D remains unaffected
5. If the magn etic dipole moment of an atom of Which one of the following is true?
diamagnetic material, paramagnetic material and (1) C is of a diamagnetic material
ferromagnetic material are denoted by md, mp and mf (2) D is of a ferromagnetic material
respectively, [AIPMT-2005] (3) A is of non-magnetic material
(1) µ d  0 and µf  0 (2) µp = 0 and µf  0 (4) B is of a paramagnetic material
(3) µ d = 0 and µp  0 (4) µd  0 and µp  0 12. A compass needle which is allowed to move in a
6. Above Curie temperature [AIPMT-2006] horizontal plane is taken to a geomagnetic pole. It
(1) a ferromagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic [AIPMT-2012]
(2) a paramagnetic substance becomes diamagnetic (1) will become rigid showing no movement
(3) a diamagnetic substance becomes paramagnetic (2) will stay in any position
(4) a paramagnetic substance becomes ferromagnetic (3) will stay in North-South direction only
7. Nickel shows ferromagnetic property at room (4) will stay in East-West direction only
temperature. If the temperature is increased beyond 13. A bar magnet of length l and magnetic dipole moment
Curie temperature, then it will show [AIPMT-2007] M is bent in the form of an arc as shown in figure. The
(1) paramagnetism (2) anti-ferromagnetism new magnetic dipole moment will be [NEET-2013]
(3) no magnetic property (4) diamagnetis
8. If a diamagnetic substance is brough near the North or
the South pole of a bar magnet, it is [AIPMT-2009]
(1) repelled by both the poles r r
(2) repelled by the North pole and attracted by the 60°
South pole
(3) attracted by the North pole and repelled by the 3
Sourth pole (1) M (2) M

(4) attracted by both the poles
9. A bar magnetic having a magnetic moment of 2 × 104 J 2 M
(3) M (4)
T–1 is free to rotate in horizontal plane. A horizontal  2
 Magnetism and Matter 83
14. Following figures show the arrangement of bar magnets (2) the magnetic field.
in different configurations. Each magnet has magnetic (3) the lattice structure of the material of the rod.
dipole moment M. which configuration has highest net (4) the induced electric field due to the changing
magnetic dipole moment? [AIPMT-2014] magnetic field.
N 19. At a point A on the earth’s surface the angle of dip,  =
N S +25º. At a point B on the earth’s surface, the angle of
(i) (ii) S N dip,  = –25º. We can interpret that: [NEET-2019]
S S N
(1) A is located in the northern hemisphere and B is
N N located in the southern hemisphere.
(2) A and B are both located in th e southern
(iii) 30° (iv) 60° hemisphere.
S N S N (3) A and B are both located in th e northern
(1) (i) (2) (ii) hemisphere.
(3) (iii) (4) (iv) (4) A is located in the southern hemisphere and B is
15. A bar magnetic is hung by a thin cotton thread in a located in the northern hemisphere.
uniform horizontal magnetic field and is in equilibrium 20. The relations amongst the three elements of earth’s
state. the energy required to rotate it by 60° is W. Now magnetic field, namely horizontal component H, vertical
the torque required to keep the magnet in this new component V and dip  are, (BE = total magnetic field)
position is [NEET-2016] (1) V = BE, H = BE tan  [NEET-2019]
W (2) V = BE tan , H = BE
(1) (2) 3W (3) V = BE sin , H = BE cos 
3
2W (4) V = BE cos , H = BE sin 
3W
(2) (4) 21. An iron rod of susceptibility 599 is subjected to a
2 3
magnetising field of 1200 A m–1. The permeability of
16. The magnetic susceptibility is negative for
the material of the rod is : (µ0 = 4  × 10–7 T m A–1)
(1) paramagnetic material only [NEET-2016]
[NEET-2020]
(2) ferromagnetic material only
(1) 8.0 × 10–5 T m A–1 (2) 2.4 × 10–5 T m A–1
(3) paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials
(3) 2.4 × 10–7 T m A–1 (4) 2.4 × 10–4 T m A–1
(4) diamagnetic material only
22. A uniform conducting wire of length 12a and resistance
17. If 1 and 2 be the apparent angles of dip observed in 'R' is wound up as a current carrying coil in the shape
two vertical planes at right angles to each other, then of, [NEET-2021]
the true angle of dip  is given by [NEET-2017]
(i) an equilateral triangle of side 'a'.
(1) cot2  = cot2 1 + cot2 2
(ii) a square of side 'a'.
(2) tan 2  = tan 2 1 + tan 2 2
The magnetic dipole moments of the coil in each case
(3) cot2  = cot2 1 – cot2 2 respectively are :
(4) tan 2  = tan2 1 – tan 2 2 (1) 3 Ia2 and 3 Ia2 (2) 3 Ia2 and Ia2
18. A thin diamagnetic rod is placed vertically between 2
(3) 3 Ia and 4 Ia 2
(4) 4 Ia2 and 3 Ia2
the poles of an electromagnet. When the current in the –2 –2
23. The dimensions [MLT A ] belong to the :
electromagnet is switched ON, then the diamagnetic
(1) magnetic flux [NEET-2022]
rod is pushed up, out of the horizontal magnetic field.
Hence the rod gains gravitational potential energy. The (2) self inductance
work required to do this comes from [NEET-2018] (3) magnetic permeability
(1) the current source. (4) electric permittivity
 84 Magnetism and Matter

5.13
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 01 31. (3) 32. (1) 33. (1) 34. (4) 35. (2)
1. (1) 2. (2) 3. (1) 4. (1) 5. (4) 36. (2) 37. (4) 38. (3) 39. (4) 40. (2)
6. (4) 7. (3) 8. (2) 9. (1) 10. (2)
NCERT EXEMPLAR OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 02 1. (3) 2. (1) 3. (4) 4. (2) 5. (2)
11. (4) 12. (4) 13. (4) 14. (3) 15. (1)
ASSERTION–REASON & STATEMENT QUESTIONS
16. (3) 17. (3) 18. (4) 19. (4) 20. (2)
1. (2) 2. (2) 3. (1) 4. (3) 5. (1)
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 03 6. (1) 7. (1) 8. (2) 9. (1) 10. (3)
21. (2) 22. (2) 23. (3) 24. (4) 25. (2)
MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS
26. (3) 27. (2) 28. (2) 29. (3) 30. (2)
1. (2) 2. (1)
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS FROM NCERT
1. (2) 2. (4) 3. (3) 4. (4) 5. (2) ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
6. (4) 7. (2) 8. (3) 9. (3) 10. (1) 1. (1) 2. (1) 3. (3) 4. (3) 5. (3)
11. (2) 12. (4) 13. (2) 14. (1) 15. (3) 6. (1) 7. (1) 8. (1) 9. (3) 10. (2)
16. (3) 17. (4) 18. (4) 19. (2) 20. (1) 11. (4) 12. (3) 13. (2) 14. (3) 15. (2)
21. (4) 22. (3) 23. (1) 24. (2) 25. (4) 16. (4) 17. (1) 18. (1) 19. (4) 20. (3)
26. (4) 27. (1) 28. (3) 29. (3) 30. (2) 21. (4) 22. (1) 23. (3)
Electromagnetic Induction 85

ELECTROMAGNETIC
INDUCTION
Chapter 06
Percentage of Questions in Last 34 Years’ in NEET / AIPMT from this Chapter

Percentage
A •induction,
Faraday's laws and Lenz's law of electromagnetic
Induced e.m.f. and current 59%

B (41%)
A (59%)
B 41%

WHAT DO YOU WANT TO KNOW?

6.8 SYNOPSIS
6.1 INTRODUCTION 6.9 MISCELLANEOUS Questions from NCERT

6.3 MAGNETIC FLUX 6.10 NCERT Exemplar Questions

6.11 ASSERTION-REASON & STATEMENT
6.4 FARADAY’S LAW OF INDUCTION BASED Questions from NCERT
6.5 LENZ’S LAW AND CONSERVATION OF 6.12 MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS
ENERGY
6.13 ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
6.6 MOTIONAL ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE 6.14 ANSWER KEY

6.7. INDUCTANCE
86
Radio waves Radiation pressure Energy associatedElectromagnetic Induction
Do not require
Wavelength > 0.1 m exerted by an with an any material
Uses: in tele- electromagnetic wave electromagnetic medium for
communication energy associated wave propagation
with em waves (u)
P = speed of light in 1 1 B2
u  0 E 2 
Microwave 2 2 0 Produced
vacuum (c)
Wavelength 0.1m to 1mm by accelerated
Uses: in microwave charge
oven, RADAR

Infra-red
Wavelength 1 mm to Travels with
700 mm speed of light
Uses: treat muscular strain Different types of Characteristics in free space
electromagnetic of electromagnetic 1
Visible waves waves
C  
0 0
Wavelength: 700 nm to = 3 × 108 m/s
400 nm
Uses: to see objects In free space;
magnitude of
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES electric field (E)
Ultraviolet Constituted by mutually perpendicular
Wavelength: 400 nm to magnetic field (B)
time varying electric and magnetic fields = C (speed of light
1 nm
Uses: Preserve food in vacuum)
purifying water
Transverse in
nature
-rays Conduction current Displacement current (ID)
Wavelength: 1nm to 10–3 nm Arises due to flow of Due to time varying
Uses: Medical diagnosis Oscillating
electrons in a definite electric field electric and magnetic
closed path d fields are in phase
-rays I D  0 E
Wavelength: < 10–3 nm dt and their magnitudes
Uses: in medical bear constant ratio
science information E
C 0
on nuclear structure B0

6.1 P.No.: 204

 Electricity produces magnetism, and so the converse, magnetism produces electricity, seemed a reasonable
thing to expect, and yet the best researches of the day could only come up with results that were ambiguous
and unconvincing. Still, the agenda was obvious enough, a charge can electrify a nearby object by induction
and a magnet can magnetize a nearby piece of iron by induction. It was only reasonable to expect that a
current should induce a current in a nearby conductor. Since a steady current generates a steady magnetic
field, should not a steady magnetic field generate a steady current? However logical that was, it was wrong.
 A steady magnetic field does not impart energy to free charges, it does no work on them and yet for a current
to exist, it must get energy from somewhere. A changing magnetic field is something very different. It can
impart energy to charges and it can produce currents.

6.3 P.No.: 206

 Whenever the number of lines of induction, or magnetic flux, passing through a circuit changes, an emf is
produced in the circuit. If the circuit is closed, a current flows through it. The emf and current so produced
are called induced emf and induced current and last only while the magnetic flux is changing. The phenom-
enon is known as electromagnetic induction.
Electromagnetic
6.4 Induction 87
P.No.: 207
 If the circuit is a coil consisting of N identical loops (turns), then the induced emf is,
 d  The charge dQ passed round the circuit in a time ‘dt’ is
  N  
 dt  given by, N d N
  dQ  i dt   dt   d 
But,  B  dS   B dS cos  R dt R
Hence the total charge which flows round the circuit when
Therefore an emf can be induced in the
the magnetic flux changes from 1 to 2, is given by,
circuit in several ways. 
 N 2 N
Q    d   Q   (2  1 )
1. The magnitude of B can vary with time. R 1 R
2. The area of the circuit can change with time. This expression shows that total charge flowing round the

3. The angle  between B and normal to the plane circuit depends only on the total change in the magnetic
flux and the resistance of the circuit and is independent of
(area vector) can change with time.
the rate at which the flux changes.
4. Any combination of above can occur.
If the circuit contains the resistance only, then the instantaneous induced current ‘i’ is given by,
 N d
i  i
R R dt

6.5 P.No.: 210

 The negative sign of the Faraday’s law indicates that the in- According to Lenz’s law, the induced emf
duced emf opposes the change in magnetic flux that produces opposes the change that produces it. It is
it. this opposition against which we perform
NOTE

mechanical work in causing the change in

 When the north pole is moved towards the coil (figure-1) the magnetic flux. So, it is the mechanical
direction of the induced current in the coil will be such that energy which is converted into electrical
the front face of the coil acquires north polarity. So, the coil energy. Thus Lenz’s law is in accordance
repels the magnet. In other words the coil opposes the motion with the law of conservation of energy.
of the magnet towards itself which is really the cause of the
induced current in the coil.

i i

S N N S
N S N S

Figure-(1) Figure-(2)
 If the south pole of a magnet is moved towards the coil, the front face of the coil will acquire south
polarity, thereby opposing the motion of the magnets.
(Induced
i i current)

S N N S
N S N S

Figure-(3) Figure-(4)
 Similarly the direction of the induced current can be obtained if the north or the south pole of the magnet
is moved away from the coil.
88 Electromagnetic Induction

6.6 P.No.: 212

 Let us consider a metal rod of length l moving with velocity ‘v’ in a magnetic field B (perpendicular) as
shown in the figure.
P

FE  
If v and
 B are uniform i.e. the magnitude
 of
 
v × B and the angle between v and B is
 constant then induced (motional) emf,

NOTE
v   
 = (v × B) . l
Since this emf is produced due to the
FM motion of a conductor (rod) in a magnetic
field, therefore it is also called motional emf.
Q
 As the rod moves, the electrons in the rod experience a magnetic force so they move to the lower end of
the rod under the action of this force as a result a positive charge is created at the upper end. Thus an

electric field E is produced directed downward along the length of the rod.
 At equilibrium when the magnetic force balances the electrical force the accumulation of charge at the
two ends stops i.e. at equilibrium,
      
FM  FE  0 ;  eV  B  ( eE )  0
  
E vB
 Thus a potential difference is developed across the two ends of the rod which is in other words induced
emf.
Therefore,
  P
The direction of the induced emf is from negative terminal to positive
V  VP  VQ    E  dl
terminal (in the direction of v × B).
e
Q
Thus a conductor cutting magnetic flux
Induced e.m.f., becomes a seat of emf if an external
NOTE

P
  circuit (with flexible wires) is joined
 such that the flux linked is still changing
emf
  V    (v  B)  dl
Q with time, an induced current flows in the
external circuit from the positive end of
P
   the conductor to the negative end, and inside the conductor, the
   (v  B)  dl current flows from the negative end towards the positive end.
Q

 
The above formula is always applicable whether v and B be uniform or non-uniform.

A metal rod of length ‘l’ rotates with uniform angular velocity  about the axis passing through one of its ends

and normal to its plane of rotation in a uniform magnetic field of induction B.

As the rod rotates any free electron inside it also rotates with the same constant angular velocity and so the
electron experiences a force m2x (centrifugal force) radially outward where x is the separation of electron
Electromagnetic Induction 89
from the axis. So the negative charges (electrons) start to shift to the outer end, hence one end of the rod
becomes negatively charged while the other positively charged.
Therefore an electric field is setup from positive to negative end and at equilibrium,
(FM + m2x = FE) and the shifting of electrons stop.
Putting the values of magnetic force (FM) and electrical force (FE), w
  2

e(| v  B |)  m x  eE
v=wx

2
x
D

w
evB sin 90° + m2x = eE

m
e
x E
m 2 l
E x   xB (v   x) A
e
Potential difference across the ends of the rod,
l
  l l

VD  VA  V    E  dx    E dx cos 0    E dx
0 0 0

Putting the value of E ,
l
 m 2   m 2  l2
VD  VA  V       B x dx     B 
0 e   e 2
 m 2  l2 1 ml 2  eB  If the rod rotates in the
or VA  VD     B   VA  VD   

NOTE
 clockwise sense, then
 e 2 2 e  m
at equilibrium,
2
eB 1 FM + FE = m x
When   , then, VA  VD   Bl 2
m 2

Let at any instant the rod AD makes an angle  with AC. The magnetic C
flux passing through the sector ACD is given by,
D
1 1
  B  (area of sector ACD)  B  l 2  Bl 2
2 2 A
As  increases, the flux linked also increases. Consequently an emf is
induced in the rotating rod, which is given by,
d 1 2 d 1 2
  Bl  Bl 
dt 2 dt 2
If a metal disc is rotated about its axis in a uniform magnetic field then a steady emf is induced between the
axle X and a point Y on the circumference.
Y
From the symmetry of the problem, potential difference between any point
on the rim of the disc and its centre is same. Therefore it is convenient to
take element of the disc as rod and the potential difference across its ends R
can be solved similarly as in the previous case. X
1
The induced e.m.f.   B R 2
2
Z
If  = 2ƒ, where ‘ƒ’ is frequency of rotation then,  = BR2ƒ
All the radial segments of the disc are in parallel and the emf induced in each segment is BR2ƒ. Hence the
total emf induced between X and Y is BR2ƒ.
The induced emf across XY and XZ will be equal but opposite hence the resultant emf between YZ is zero.
90 Electromagnetic Induction

A rod PQ of length ‘l’ moves with a uniform velocity ‘v’ parallel to a long straight current carrying wire.

Induced emf in the rod : Since the field is not uniform throughout the length of the rod. Therefore let us
consider a small element of length dx at a distance ‘x’ from the wire on the rod.
The emf induced across the element, v
   a
d   v  B  dx i dx
P Q
= vB sin 90° dx cos 180° = – vB dx
 i x
 v 0 dx l
2 x
Therefore net induced emf is given by,
a 1
0 i  al
   d    v dx or    0 iv ln  
a 2 x 2  a 

A rectangular loop with a sliding connector of length l is located in a uniform magnetic field. The connector
has resistance R while the sides AB and CD have resistances R1 and R2 respectively. To obtain the current
flowing in the connector during its motion with a constant velocity ‘v’.

A D
Induced e.m.f. in the connector,
  
  v  B l R1 R R2
v
or  v B sin 90° l cos 0° = vBl
 B C
Current, i  R
eq

R1 R2
Since the two resistances R1 and R2 are in parallel therefore, Req  R 
R1  R2
Currents i1 through R1 and i2 through R2 can by calculated using Kirchhoff’s Laws.

The square frame and the current carrying long wire are located in the same plane. The frame translates to
the right with a constant velocity ‘v’. To find the induced emf in the frame as a function of distance ‘x’.

Let us consider an elemental strip of thickness ‘dy’ at a x a

distance ‘y’. The flux associated with this strip, i
 
d  B  dS  B (dS ) cos 0
y v
 i dy
 B(dS )  0 (ady)
2 y
Net flux linked with the loop,
Electromagnetic Induction 91

0 a  x dy 0 ax
   d  ia   ia ln  
2 x y 2  x 
Therefore induced emf,
d  x  a  dx 0ia 2 v
    0 ia  2  
dt 2 (a  x)  x  dt 2 x(a  x)
x a

i 1 3 2
Induced e.m.f. (motional emf) in the sides 3 and 4 will be zero as
  
the angle between v  B and dl is 90°. emf induced in the side 1,
  
1  (v  B1 )  a  vB1 sin 90a cos 0  vB1a 4
0 i
1  v a
2 x
  
and  2  v  B2  a  vB2 sin 90a cos 0  vB2 a
0 i
vv a
2 ( x  a)

0 2 1
Net induced emf,   1   2  ia v
2 x( x  a )

The copper connector of mass ‘m’ can slide without friction down two smooth copper bars. At the top the
bars are interconnected through a capacitance. The system is located in a uniform vertical magnetic field of

induction B . The resistance of the bars, the connector and the slide contacts as well as the self inductance
of the loop are assumed to be negligible. To discuss the motion of the connector.

The acceleration in the above case can also be obtained

by applying the conservation of mechanical energy (only in
the absence of frictional force for the sliding contacts) as
C mentioned below
Let any time the rod has moved downward through a
D distance ‘x’, then, loss in GPE of the rod = Gain in its K.E. +
i Gain in the electrical energy of capacitor,
l
1 1
i.e. mg x sin   mv 2  C 2
2 2
A Differentiating the equation with respect to time, we can
obtain the expression for acceleration of the connector.

As the rod slides down, the area of the loop increases, hence flux through the loop increases. As a result an
induced emf and induced current is setup in the loop.
Induced emf across the ends of rod,
92 Electromagnetic Induction
   F B
  v  B  l  vB sin (90   )l cos 0 M co N
s
 = v Bl cos 
Where ‘v’ is the velocity at any time ‘t’ FM
mg

s
during the motion. sin

co
Charge on the plates of the capacitor 

g
m



at this instant is given by,

sin
q = C = Cv Bl cos 

M
F
Hence the induced current in the loop, If there is frictional force between the bars

NOTE
dq dv and the rod (connector) then the equation
i  B Cl cos  of motion of connector can be written as,
dt dt mg sin a – Fm cos a – mN = ma
i  BCl cos 
Where ‘a’ is the instantaneous acceleration of the connector.
Now the forces acting on the rod or connector are magnetic force and the weight of the connector.
Magnetic force acting on the connector, FM = ilB sin 90° = ilB
By Newton’s second law for the rod,
mg sin  – FM cos  = ma  mg sin  – il B cos  = ma
Putting the value of i, we get, mg sin  – B2 l2 C cos2  = ma
mg sin 
a
m  B 2l 2C cos 2 
Thus connector slides down with constant acceleration.
Hence the velocity after any time ‘t’ or the distance covered by the connector along the bars can be obtained
by applying the simple equations of motion.

B
If the capacitor is replaced by a resistor and the capacitance and the
inductance of the loop formed are negligible. To discuss the motion
D
of the connector. R

Induced emf (motional emf) in the rod,  = v Bl cos 

vBl cos  A
Current through the loop, i 
R
Magnetic force acting on the rod (connector), FM = il B sin 90°
l 2 B 2 v cos 
Putting the value of i, FM 
R
Equation of the motion of the connector, mg sin  – Fm cos  = ma
Putting the value of Fm,
l 2 B 2 v cos 2 
mg sin    ma
R

 l 2 B 2 cos 2  
a  g sin    v ...(i)
 mR 
Electromagnetic Induction 93
Hence the acceleration varies with velocity. To obtain the velocity as a function of distance,
v s
dv l 2 B 2 cos 2  v
a  v  g sin   v dv   ds
ds mR l B cos 2 
2 2
0
g sin   v 0
mR
v  ƒ( s )
Again to obtain the distance travelled as a function of time,
s t
ds ds
 ƒ( s )  0 ƒ(s)  0 dt
dt
At steady state, acceleration becomes zero and the velocity becomes constant (named as terminal velocity)
i.e. a = 0 at steady state
mgR sin 
Then from equaiton (i) we get, v (terminal) 
l 2 B 2 cos2 

If the capacitor is replaced by an inductor and the resistor, capacitance of the loop formed are negligible.
Initially the connector is held at rest, now it is set free then it starts to oscillate. To discuss its motion,

Induced emf (motional emf) across the rod, B

 = Blv cos  L

di D
L  Bl v cos 
dt
 Ldi  ( Bl cos  )vdt d
l
i s

  L di  Bl cos  ds
0 0
A

 Li  ( Bl cos  ) s
Bls cos 
i ...(A)
L
If the connector has moved through a distance ‘s’ then using conservation of energy,

u=
0 s
Initial position
of connector

v
Loss in GPE of connector = Gain in its K.E + Gain in electrical energy of inductor
1 2 1 2
i.e. (mg sin  ) s  mv  Li
2 2
Energy stored in an inductor carrying a current ‘i’ is given by, U = (1/2) Li2.
 94 Electromagnetic Induction

ds dv di
Differentiating with respect to time, (mg sin  )  mv  Li
dt dt dt
di Bl cos  ds Bls cos 
From equation (A), we get,  and i 
dt L dt L
ds dv B 2l 2 cos 2  ds dv B 2l 2 cos 2 
mg sin   mv  s  mg sin  v  mv  sv
dt dt L dt dt L
dv B 2l 2 cos 2  dv B 2l 2 cos 2 
mg sin   m  s  g sin   s
dt L dt mL

dv d 2 s  B 2l 2 cos2   mg L sin  
 2  s 2 2 
dt dt mL  B l cos2  

mg L sin  d 2 s d 2 x  B 2l 2 cos 2 
Let s  2 2  x then 2  2  x
B l cos2  dt dt mL

B 2l 2 cos 2 
Hence it is the condition for SHM with,  (angular frequency) 
mL
v
2
And T (time period) 
 S N
For equilibrium position,
mg L sin  mg L sin 
x = 0, s  2 2 2
0  s 2 2 (from initial position)
B l cos  B l cos 2 

01 (2) 2 C
(3) 0.1 C
1. The magnetic flux linked with a coil of N turns of area (4) 1 C
of cross section A held with its plane parallel to the 4. A copper wire of length 50.0 cm and total resistance of
field B is 1.1 × 10–2  is formed into a circular loop and placed
NAB perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field that is
(1) (2) NAB increasing at the constant rate of 10.0 mT/s. At what
2
rate is thermal energy generated in the loop?
NAB
(3) (4) 0 (1) 1.32 × 10–8 W
4 (2) 2.36 × 10–4 W
2. The normal magnetic flux passing through a coil
(3) 3.68 × 10–6 W
changes with time according to the equation  = 6t2 – 5t
+ 1. What is the magnitude of the induced current at (4) 4.23 × 10–5 W
t = 0.253 s and resistance 10 . 5. A square loop of wire, side length 10 cm is placed at an
angle of 45º with a magnetic field that changes uniformly
(1) 1.2 A (2) 0.8 A
from 0.1 T to zero in 0.7 seconds. The induced current
(3) 0.6 A (4) 0.2 A in the loop having resistance 1  is
3. A 100 turns coil of area of cross section 200 cm2 having (1) 1.0 mA
2  resistance is held perpendicular to a magnetic field (2) 2.5 mA
of 0.1 T. If it is removed from the magnetic field in one
(3) 3.5 mA
second, the induced charge produced in it is
(4) 4.0 mA
(1) 0.2 C
 Electromagnetic Induction 95
6. The figure shows certain wire segments joined together  0i dl  r
to form a coplanar loop. The loop is placed in a (3) Biot-Savart law is : dB 
perpendicular magnetic field in the direction going into 4 r 3
the plane of the figure. The magnitude of the field  
increases with time. I 1 and I 2 are the currents in the (4) Gauss’s law is :  0  E.dA  q
segments ab and cd. Then, 9. If a magnet is dropped through a vertical hollow copper
×c× × × × ×d× tube then
× ×a× × ×b× × (1) the time take to reach the ground is longer than
×××××××
××××××× the time take if the tube was made out of plastic.
××××××× (2) the magnet will get attracted and stick to the
(1) I1 > I2 (2) I1 < I2 copper tube.
(3) I1 is in the direction of ba and I2 is in the direction (3) the time taken to reach the ground is longer than
of cd. the time taken if the tube was made out of the
(4) I1 is in the direction of ab and I2 is in the direction stainless steel.
of dc. (4) the time taken to reach the ground does not
7. The flux li nked with a circuit is given by  = depend on the radius of the copper tube.
t3 + 3t – 7. The graph between time (x-axis) and induced 10. A bar magnet is allowed to fall vertically through a
emf (y-axis) will be a copper coil placed in a horizontal plane. The magnet
(1) straight line through the origin falls with a net acceleration
(2) straight line with positive intercept S
(3) straight line with negative intercept
N
(4) parabola not through the origin
8. Which one of the following is not true?
 (1) =g (2) Zero
(1) Ampere’s law is :  B.dl   0ienc
(3) <g (4) >g
d B
(2) Faraday’s law is :  
dt

TIME VARYING MAGNETIC FIELD INDUCTION

 Whenever a magnetic field varies with time, an induced electric field is produced in any closed path. It can
be understood with the help of the following illustration.
 When a magnet moves towards a stationary loop as shown in the figure an induced current is setup in the
loop. Since loop is stationary therefore magnetic field can not exert the force on the stationary charges (free
electrons). Therefore there must be an electric field in the stationary conductor (loop) which causes the
stationary charges to move, this electric field is induced by the time varying magnetic field of the moving
magnet.
 Unlike electrostatic field (produced by charges) the lines of induced field form closed loop. It is also called a
circuital field or vortex field. It is not a conservative field.
 By the definition of emf the work done to move unit positive charge through one complete cycle of a loop is
equal to the induced e.m.f.,
 
dW qE  dl
i.e.     
q q

  d  dB  
   E  dl or induced emf,       dS  
 E  dl
dt dt

EXPRESSION FOR INDUCED ELECTRIC FIELD

 A symmetrical magnetic field is present in a cylindrical space and is parallel to the axis of cylinder. It is
varying with time, say B = ƒ(t).
96 Electromagnetic Induction

E
dl

R r
dl
E
E

CASE – 1
Electric field inside the space
 Induced electric field within the cylindrical space (r  R) : Considering the magnetic field to be increas-
ing with time the direction of induced electric field (same as the direction of induced current) is shown in the
figure.
  d d
Applying,   dl  dt 
E  Edl cos 0  dt E
dl

d dB r R
E  dl  B r 2  E 2 r   r 2 dl
dt dt
E
r dB
E for (r  R) E
2 dt
CASE – 2
Electric field outside the space
E
  d dl
  dl  dt B R
2
E
r
dB
 Edl cos 0   R dt
2

R
dl
dB
E
 dl   R
2
E
dt
dB 1 R 2 dB
E 2 r   R 2  E for r  R E
dt 2 r dt

The magnetic induction is increasing with time, to find the expressions for the currents i1 and i2.
i2 i1
Induced emf, i
R2 R1
d1 d dB l R
1   ( Bal )  al
dt dt dt
d2 d dB a
and 2   (blB)  bl b
dt dt dt
The currents i1, i2 and ‘i’ can be solved by using Kirchhoff’s laws.
Electromagnetic Induction 97

A thin non-conducting ring of mass ‘m’ carrying a charge ‘q’ can freely rotate about its axis. At the initial
moment, the ring was at rest and no magnetic field was present. Then a uniform magnetic field is switched
on and the direction of the magnetic field is parallel to the axis of ring. The magnetic field increases with time
at a constant rate (dB / dt). To obtain the velocity of the ring.


If E is the induced electric field on the ring then,
  d 2 dB
  dl  dt  E  dl   r dt
E

dB r dB
E 2 r   r 2 E
dt 2 dt
Torque acting on a small element of the ring about the centre, d = (dq) Er.
Since the torque on each element of the ring is in the same direction, therefore the net torque on the ring,
r dB qr 2 dB
   d  Er  dq  qEr  q r
2 dt 2 dt
Therefore angular acceleration,

 (I is the moment of inertia)
I

qr 2 dB
q dB d q dB
  2 dt2
 or 
mr 2m dt dt 2m dt

dB
Let B = ƒ(t), then  f  (t )
dt
Therefore,
 t
d q q
 d  f  (t ) dt
2m 0
 f  (t ) or
dt 2m 0

q q
  f (t )  f (0)    f (t ) [As initially B was absent i.e. ƒ(0) = 0]
2m 2m

6.7 P.No.: 219

 Self Inductance

i i
Flux linked with coil
98 Electromagnetic Induction
Thus when the current in a coil is switched on the self induction opposes the growth of the current and when
the current is switched off, the self induction opposes the decay of the current. The self inductance plays the
same role in an electrical circuit as is played by mass or inertia in mechanical motion.

 Coefficient of self induction (L)

Let us consider a coil of N turns carrying a current ‘i’, then in absence of magnetic materials (iron etc.), the
total flux,
N  i  N = Li
Where L is a constant called the coefficient of self induction
Unit of inductance is henry,
or self inductance of the coil, this gives,

NOTE
1 henry = 1 volt/amp/sec
N & 1 henry = 109 ab henry
L 1 henry = 1 weber/amp.
i
The induced emf (back emf) is given by,
Self inductance of a coil depends
d d upon the size, shape and number
  ( N )  ( Li )

NOTE
dt dt of turns. It also depends on the
magnetic properties such as
di  permeability of the medium in
or,  L or L  which the circuit is immersed.
dt (di / dt )
Thus the coefficient of self induction may be defined in the two ways.
1. It is numerically equal to the magnetic flux linked with the coil when unit current flows through it.
2. It is numerically equal to the emf induced in the coil when the rate of change of current is unity.

 Self induction of a long solenoid

Let us consider a long solenoid of length l, number of turns per unit length ‘n’, then the total magnetic flux
through the solenoid, net = µ0 ni (nl) A.
Where nl is the total number of turns in length l and A is area of cross-section.
net
Self inductance, L   0 n2lA  L  0 n 2V
i
Where V is the volume of the solenoid.
L
Self inductance per unit volume,  0 n 2 .
V

 Self Inductance of two long parallel wire

The flux through the small element,
0  1 1 
d  Bldx  i   l dx
2  x (d  x) 
Hence the total flux passing through the entire area between i a
two wires of unit length is,
0 d  a  1 1  0 d a l
 il     dx  il 2ln   d
2 a  x d x 2  a  dx
x
0 d a
 il ln  
  a  a
i
 Electromagnetic Induction 99

 0 l  d  a 
Therefore self inductance, L   ln  
i   a 

L 0  d  a 
or self inductance per unit length,  ln  
l   a 
 Self inductance of a cable
 A long co-axial cable consists of two concentric cylindrical conductors of radii ‘a’ and ‘b’ and length ‘l’.
The inner conductor is assumed to be a thin cylindrical shell.
 To obtain L, we should calculate the magnetic flux through any cross section between the two conductors.
For this let us consider a rectangular strip.
 The magnetic field is perpendicular to the shaded rectangular strip of length l and width (b – a). Dividing
this rectangle into elemental strips of width dr. i
The flux through each strip is, d = Bl dr.
a b
Therefore the total flux through this rectangular cross section is,
b
0 i  il  b 
   Bl dr   ldr  0 ln  

dr
a 2 r 2  a  i
r l
 0 l  b 
Therefore, L  ln  
i 2  a  B

L 0  b 
or self inductance per unit length,  ln  
l 2  a 

 Self inductance of a solid cylindrical conductor : This can be obtained in a similar way as in the previous
case.

MUTUAL INDUCTANCE
 The first coil in which current passes is known as primary coil and the other coil in which the induced emf is
studied is known as secondary coil.

i1 i2 i1 i2

G
Primary Coil Secondary Coil
The total flux linked with the secondary coil is proportional
to the current in the primary coil. Unit of mutual inductance is Henry.
The mutual inductance depends upon
i.e. N 2 2  i 1 the geometrical and coil construction
NOTE

or N2 2 = L21 i1 factors, as the closeness of two coils, their

Where L21 = M is a constant called the coefficient of mutual orientations, sizes and the number of turns.
In absence of ferro magnetic material
induction or mutual inductance of the two coils. This gives, L21 = L12 .
N i.e. The mutual inductance remains the
M 2 2 same whether the current flows in the coil
i1 1 or coil 2.
100 Electromagnetic Induction
The emf induced in the secondary coil given by,
d di 2
2  ( N 22 )  L21 1 or L21 
dt dt (di1 / dt )
Thus the mutual inductance of two circuits is numerically equal to the magnetic flux linked with one circuit
when unit current flows through the other circuit.
OR
The mutual inductance of two circuits is numerically equal to the emf induced in one circuit when the rate of
change of current in the other is unity.

In the figure, two concentric co-planar circular loops A and B are shown. Current flows in the loop A. To find
the magnetic flux through the loop (r << R).
B

A
r R

Since the magnetic field is not uniform over the bigger loop B, so the direct calculation of flux through this
loop is not possible. Therefore we can calculate the flux by applying L21 = L12.
If the same current passes through the loop B, then the flux through the loop A can be obtained easily as,
0i
A   r2
2R
A B i
LAB  ; LBA 
i i
but LAB = LBA A A
0 i B B
therefore  A  B    r2
2R

MUTUAL INDUCTANCE OF TWO COAXIAL SOLENOIDS

 We have a long solenoid (primary coil) of area of cross section A and having nP turns per unit length. A short
secondary coil S of NS turns is wound closely over the central portion of the primary.

P S

nP
NS
Then the magnetic induction inside the primary is, B = m0nPi.
Magnetic flux through each turn of the primary,  = BA = m0nPi A.
 Electromagnetic Induction 101
Since secondary is wound closely over the central portion of the primary, the same flux is also linked with
each turn of the secondary. Therefore the total magnetic flux through the secondary,
NS = m0 n P NS i A
N S
The mutual inductance, M   M = µ 0nP NS A
i
ENERGY STORED IN AN INDUCTOR
 Whenever the current in an inductor is switched on, the back emf induced in it opposes the growth of current.
Thus the growing current works against back emf before it attains its final steady value. This work which is
provided by the battery supplying the current is stored as magnetic energy around the inductor.
 Since the current (positive charge) flows opposite to the induced emf So the energy stored in a small time dt.

 di 
dU  dq    i dt    i dt  L  
 dt 
dU = Li di
Therefore the net energy stored to build up the current from zero to a value ‘i’,
i
1 2
U  L  i di  U Li Increasing
0 2 i i

 1
Putting, L  U  i
i 2
 (Induced emf)
 1 2
Again putting, i U
L 2 L

ENERGY DENSITY IN A MAGNETIC FIELD

 Let us consider a very long solenoid of length l and cross sectional area A, when a current flows in it, a
magnetic field is established.
The total energy stored in the solenoid,
1 2
U Li ...(i)
2
Where, L = µ0 n2Al ...(ii)
and magnetic field inside the solenoid,
B = µ0 ni ...(iii)
From equations (i), (ii) and (iii), we get,
1 B2
Therefore the energy stored per unit volume or magnetic energy density U  Al
2 0

1 B2
Thus, energy density 
2 0
 102 Electromagnetic Induction
(1) 0 (2) 0.5 H
02 (3) 2 H (4) 3 H
11. A small circular loop of wire of radius a is located at 15. A circular loop of radius 0.3 cm lies parallel to a much
the centre of a much larger circular wire loop of radius bigger circular loop of radius 20 cm. The centre of the
b. The two loops are in the same plane. The outer loop small loop is on the axis of the bigger loop. The distance
of radius b carries an alternating current I = I0 cos (t). between their centres is 15 cm. If a current of 2.0 A
The emf induced in the smaller inner loop is nearly flows through the smaller loop, then the flux linked
with bigger loop is
0 I 0 a 2 0 I 0b 2 (1) 6.6 × 10–9 weber (2) 9.1 × 10–11 weber
(1) .  cos(t ) (2)  cos(t )
2 b a –11
(3) 6 × 10 weber (4) 3.3 × 10–11 weber
 0 I 0 a 2 a2 16. A short solenoid of radius a, number of turns per unit
(3) .  sin(t ) (4) 0 I 0 .  sin(t )
2 b b length n1, and length L is kept coaxially inside a very
12. If the current through a coil changes from 1 A to 3 A in long solenoid of radius b, number of turns per unit
0.02 s to produce an emf of 6 V, then the self-inductance length n2. What is the mutual inductance of the system?
of the coil is (1) µ0b2n1n2L (2) µ0a2n1n2L2
(1) 0.12 H (2) 0.06 H 2
(3) µ0a n1n2L (4) µ0b2n1n2L2
(3) 0.02 H (4) 0.01 H 17. When the current changes from +2 A to –2 A in 0.05
13. When current in a coil changes from 5 A to 2 A in 0.1 s, seconds, an emf of 8 V is induced in a coil. The
an average voltage of 50 V is produced. The self- coefficient of self inductance of the coil is
inductance of the coil is (1) 0.2 H (2) 0.4 H
(1) 0.67 H (2) 1.67 H (3) 0.8 H (4) 0.1 H
(3) 3 H (4) 6 H 18. If a current of 5 A in a coil of self inductance 2 mH is
14. If a change in current of 0.01 A in one coil produces a cut off in time 0.1 s, the induced emf in the coil is
change in magnetic flux of 2 × 10 –2 weber in another (1) 0.1 V (2) 0.01 V
coil, then the mutual inductance between coils is (3) 0.2 V (4) 0.02 V

COMBINATIONS OF INDUCTORS
 Inductances in series
L1 L2 L3
i i

The equivalent inductance

NOTE

is greater than the greatest

one in the combination.

If the inductors are connected in series and are arranged so that there are no interactions between them
through mutual inductance, the induced voltage across the system of inductors is given by,
 = 1 + 2 + 3 Since, f = Li  f  L (as ‘i’ is same)
di di di di therefore, f1 : f2 : f3 = L1 : L2 : L3
L
dt
 L1  L2  L3
dt dt dt if, f1 + f2 + f3 = f then f1 = [L1f / (L1 + L2 + L3)]
Similarly, f2 = [L2f / (L1 + L2 + L3)]; f3 = [L3f / (L1 + L2 + L3)]
L = L1 + L2 + L3 2
U = (1/2)Li  U  L  U1 : U2 : U3 = L1 : L2 : L3
Where L : equivalent inductance.
 Inductances in parallel (negligible mutual inductance)
In parallel combination, i1 L1
1 = 2 = 3 =  The equivalent
L2 inductance is
NOTE

i2
di di1 di2 di3 smaller than the
L  L1  L2  L3 smallest one in ...(i)
dt dt dt dt i i3 L3 i
the combination.
For the parallel arrangement we also have,
Electromagnetic Induction 103
i = i1 + i2 + i3
di di 1 di di di 1 1 1
di di1 di2 di3  L    1: 2: 3 : :
or    dt dt L dt dt dt L1 L2 L3
dt dt dt dt
From equation (i) we get, If the mutual inductance is considered then for two inductors.
di L di L di L di In series combination L = L1 + L2 ± 2M
   L1 L 2  M 2
dt L1 dt L2 dt L3 dt In parallel combination L 
L1  L2  2 M
1 1 1 1 Here positive sign is considered for the positive coupling
  
L L1 L2 L3 (where the current traverse the loops in the same sense) and
negative sign for the negative coupling.

COEFFICIENT OF COUPLING OF THE TWO CIRCUITS

 Whenever two electrical circuits are so arranged with respect to each other that the magnetic field due to the
current in one of them is linked wholly or partially with the other, then the two circuits are said to be magneti-
cally coupled with each other.
 A change in the current in one circuit produces an induced emf in the other. Thus energy is transferred from
one circuit to the other.
N11
L1  i1 L1 L2 i2
i1

N 22 N1 N2
L2  1 2
i2
Where 1 and 2 are the magnetic fluxes linked with coils 1 and 2 due to their own currents i 1 and i 2
respectively.
If 12 be the flux linked with the coil 1 due to the current in coil 2 and 21 the flux linked with coil 2 due to the
current in coil 1, then the mutual inductance between them is given by,
N112 N 221
M  L21  L12  
i2 i1
If the two coils are wound on the same core and overlap everywhere then, 12 = 2 and 21 = 1
N12 N 21
Therefore M 
i2 i1

N1 N 212  N11  N 22 

or, M2      L1 L2 or M  L1 L2
i1i2  i1  i2 
This is the maximum possible value of M as the total flux associated with one coil is assumed to be linked
with the other therefore,
M max  L1 L2

In general, M  k L1 L2

Where 0  k  1 and is named as coefficient of coupling so, M  L1 L2 .

 104 Electromagnetic Induction
MAGNETIC ENERGY ASSOCIATED WITH A PAIR OF COUPLED CIRCUIT
di1 di
1  L1  L12 2 i1 L1 L2 i2
dt dt
di2 di
 2  L2  L21 1 N1 N2
dt dt 1 2
The rate of work by the induced emf in these circuits or the power absorbed by each of the coupled
inductors.
dW1 di di
P1   1i1  L1i1 1  L12i1 2
dt dt dt
dW2 di di Self energy of

NOTE
and P2    2i2  L2i2 2  L21i2 1 the coil is
dt dt dt
always positive.
Total power absorbed by both the inductors,
dW di di  di di 
P  L1i1 1  L2i2 2   L12i1 2  L21i2 1 
dt dt dt  dt dt 

dW di di d 
or  L1i1 1  L2i2 2  M  (i1i2 ) 
dt dt dt  dt 
as L12 = L21 = M (say)
di2 di d
and i1  i2 1  (i1i2 )
dt dt dt
If both the currents i1 and i2 start from zero at the same instant and reach values of i1 and i2 respectively,
total energy absorbed,
i1 i2 i1i2
1 2 1 2
U  W   L1i1di1   L2i2 di2   M d (i i )  U  2 L i
1 2 11  L2i2  M i1i2
0 0 0 2
The first two terms represent self energies but the last term represents the interaction energy which may be
positive or negative.

GROWTH OF CURRENT IN LC CIRCUIT

 At t = 0, the current tends to increase very rapidly. Therefore, opposition produced by the inductor is
infinite. Hence, no current flows through the circuit at the instant of closing the switch. At t =  the current
has risen to its maximum value and the inductor does not produce any opposition (assuming the resistance of
the inductor to be negligible). At any instant (0 < t < ), let the current through the circuit be ‘i’.
Applying Kirchhoff’s law along the closed path we get,
di R
 L  iR  0 L
dt i
di
or, L    iR
dt
 Electromagnetic Induction 105
i t
di 1 di R Rt R i
or, 0 (  iR)  L 0 dt dt
 i0 e L  (i0  i )
L L imax

NOTE
Thus smaller the ratio L / R the
  ( R / L)t
more rapidly does the current
i  (1  e )
R approach its maximum value and
current in the circuit increases
or i  i0 (1  e ( R / L ) t ) with the decreasing rate. time
Where i0  ( / R )  imax (steady state current at t = ).
L / R has the same dimension as the time and is named as the inductive time constant of the circuit.

L   1 
If t  then i  i0 1    
R   e 

  1 
Therefore, the time constant of a growth circuit is that much time in which the current becomes 1    
  e 
times of its maximum value.

VOLTAGE ACROSS THE INDUCTOR

 The instantaneous voltage across the inductor is given by,
 R  R
di R   t   t
 L i0 e   L    VL  i0 R e  L 
VL  L
dt L
 Energy stored in the inductor,
1 2 1 2
Li  Li0 (1  e  ( R / L ) t ) 2  U  U 0 (1  e  ( R / L ) t ) 2
U
2 2
 Heat produced in the resistor in time ‘t’, L, R' R
t t i
H   i 2 R dt  H   i02 (1  e  ( R / L )t ) 2 R dt
0 0

 Energy lost by the cell in time ‘t’,

t
During the growth of current in a circuit
H    i dt at any instant the rate of energy delivered
NOTE

0
by the battery is the sum of the rate of
energy stored in the magnetic field and the
t
rate of energy consumed in the production
H    i0 (1  e ( Rt / L ) ) dt
0
of heat.
If the inductor coil has some resistance then the Kirchhoff’s equation becomes,
di
  iR  L
 iR '  0
dt
DECAY OF CURRENT
 Initially the switch is connected to ‘a’ so that the growth of current takes place and at the instant current
reaches its maximum value (steady state), switch is connected to position ‘b’ (battery is removed).
At t = 0, the current in the inductor is maximum say i0.
 At steady state (t = ) the current in the inductor reduces to zero and at any time t (0 < t < ), let the current
through the circuit be ‘i’.
Applying Kirchhoff’s law,
 106 Electromagnetic Induction

di as R
L  iR  0 b
dt
i L
di R t R
 t

i i L 0 dt  i  i0 e L

L/R is named as time constant for decay circuit. E

L i i
If t  i 0 i0
R e
Energy lost by the inductor,
U = (1/2) Li2
1 2  (2 R / L ) t
U Li0 e  U  U 0 e (2 R / L )t
2
t t 2R
time
t
2 2
Heat produced in the resistance in time ‘t’, H   i R dt  H   i e 0
L
R dt
0 0

03 24. A solenoid has 2000 turns wound over a length of

0.30 metre. The area of its cross-section is 1.2 × 10–3 m2.
Around its central section, a coil of 300 turns is wound.
19. The back e.m.f. induced in a coil, when current changes
If an initial current of 2 A in the solenoid is reversed in
from 1 ampere to zero in one milli second, is 4 volts, the
0.25 sec, then the e.m.f. induced in the coil is
self inductance of the coil is
(1) 6 × 10–4 V (2) 4.8 × 10–3 V
(1) 1 H (2) 4 H
(3) 6 × 10–2 V (4) 48 mV
(3) H (4) 4 × 10–3 H
25. Two coils of self inductance L1 and L2 are placed closer
20. An e.m.f. of 5 volt is produced by a self inductance, to each other so that total flux in one coil is completely
when the current changes at a steady rate from 3 A to linked with other. If M is mutual inductance between
2 A in 1 millisecond. The value of self inductance is them, then
(1) Zero (2) 5 H (1) M = L1L2 (2) M = L1 / L2
(3) 5000 H (4) 5 mH
(3) M  L1L2 (4) M = (L1 L2)2
21. A 50 mH coil carries a current of 2 ampere. The energy
stored in joules is 26. The equivalent quantity of mass in electricity is
(1) Charge (2) Potential
(1) 1 (2) 0.1
(3) Inductance (4) Current
(3) 0.05 (4) 0.5
27. The momentum in mechanics is expressed as m × v.
22. The current passing through a choke coil of 5 henry is
The analogous expression in electricity is
decreasing at the rate of 2 ampere/sec. The e.m.f.
developing across the coil is (1) I × Q (2) I × V
(1) 10 V (2) – 10 V (3) L × I (4) L × Q
28. In what form is the energy stored in an inductor or A
(3) 2.5 V (4) – 2.5 V
coil of inductance L is carrying a steady current i. What
23. Average energy stored in a pure inductance L when a
is the nature of its stored energy
current i flows through it, is
(1) Magnetic (2) Electrical
(1) 10 V (2) – 10 V
(3) Both magnetic and electrical
(3) 2.5 V (4) – 2.5 V
(4) Heat
Electromagnetic Induction 107

6.8 Synopsis

 Magnetic Flux :  = uniform angular velocity of the coil

   E0 = maximum induced emf
  B.A = BA cosq for uniform B .
 Self Induction & Self Inductance : When a current flowing
  
   B.dA = for non uniform B . through a coil is changed the flux linking flux with the coil
its own winding changes & due to the change in linking
 FARADAY'S Laws of Electromagnetic Induction : flux with the coil an emf is induced which is known as self
 An induced emf is setup whenever the magnetic flux induced emf & this phenomenon is known as self induction.
linking that circuit changes. This induced emf opposes the causes of induction. The
 The magnitude of the induced emf in any circuit is
property of the coil or the circuit due to which it opposes
proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic flux any change of the current coil or the circuit is known as
d Self-Inductance. Its unit is Henry.
linking the circuit,   .
dt s
 Lenz's Laws : The direction of an induced emf is always Coefficient of self inductance L  or s = Li
i
such as to oppose the cause producing it. i = current in the circuit
d
 Law of EMI : e = – s = magnetic flux linked with the circuit due to the current
dt
The negative sign indicates that the induced emf oppose i.
the change of the flux. L depends only on ; (i) shape of the loop (ii) medium
 EMF Induced in a Straight Conductor in Uniform Magnetic ds d di
Field : self induced emf es     Li   L
dt dt dt
E = BLv sin q
(if L is constant)
where B = flux density
L = length of the conductor
v = velocity of the conductor  Combination of inductors
q = angle between direction of motion of conductor & B. Series combination L = L1 + L2 + ......, i same, V in ratio of
 EMF Induced in a Rod Rotating Perpendicular to Magnetic inductance, U in ratio of inductance,  in ratio of
Field inductance
1 1 1
Parallel combination    ....... , V same, i in
L L1 L 2
1 inverse ratio of inductance, U in inverse ratio of inductance,
E  B 2
2  same

 Mutual Induction : If two electric circuits are such that the

For a wheel rotating in a earth magnetic field effective emf
magnetic field due to a current in one is partly or wholly
1 2 linked with the other, the two coils are said to be
induced between the periphery & centre = B
2 electromagnetically coupled circuits. Then any change of
current in one produces a change of magnetic flux in the
other & the later opposes the change by inducing an emf

within itself. This phenomenon is called MUTUAL

INDUCTION & the induced emf in the later circuit due to
 a change of current in the former is called MUTUALLY
INDUCED EMF. The circuit in which the current is changed
is called the primary & the other circuit in which the emf is
induced is called the secondary. The Co-efficient of mutual
induction (mutual inductance) between two
 Coil Rotation in Magnetic Field such that Axis of Rotation electromagnetically coupled circuit is the magnetic flux
is Perpendicular to the Magnetic Field: linked with the secondary per unit current in the primary.
Instantaneous induced emf. Mutual inducatnce = M
E = NAB sin t  E 0 sin t m flux linked with secondary
where N = number of turns in the coil = I  current in the primary
p
A = area of one turn; B = magnetic induction
108 Electromagnetic Induction
L
dm d dI
mutually induced emf : E m     MI   M
dt dt dt
(If M is constant)
M depends on (1) geometry of loops (2) medium (3)
I R
orientation & distance of loops.
If two coils of self inductance L1 and L2 are wound over
each other, the mutual inductance M  K L1L 2 where K t=0
is called coupling constant.
For two coils wound in same direction and connected in
series L E
L = L1 + L2 + 2M = time constant of the circuit.  I0  .
R R
For two coils wound in opposite direction and connected in
 L behaves as open circuit at t = 0 [If i = 0]
series
 L behaves as short circuit at t =  always.
L = L1 + L2 – 2M
L
L1L 2  M 2 Curve (1)  Large
For two coils in parallel L  R
L1  L2  2M I
 Transformer

E 2 I1 N 2
 For ideal transformer  
E1 I 2 N1 (2)
Laminated (1)
Core
Primary
Load

winding L
Curve (2)  Small
R
AC mains Secondary  Decay of Current : Initial current through the inductor = I0;
winding
Current at any instant i = I0e–Rt/L
Pout I
 Efficiency   100 %
Pin
I0
 SOLENOID : There is a uniform magnetic field along the
axis of the solenoid

 An emf is induced in a closed loop where magnetic flux is

varied. The induced electric field is not conservative field
I  
axis of solenoid
I
Core
because for induced electric field, the line integral  E.d 
B = m ni (ideal : length >> diameter) around a closed path is non- zero.
where m = magnetic permeability of the core material  Acceleration of a magnet falling through a long solenoid
n = number of turns in the solenoid per unit length decrease because the induced current produced in a circuit
i = current in the solenoid always flows in such direction that it opposes the change
Self inductance of a solenoid L = m0 n2AI or the cause that produces it.
A = area of cross section of solenoid.  The mutual inductance of two coils is doubled if the self
 Super Conduction Loop in Magnetic Field : R = 0; e = 0. inductance of the primary and secondary coil is doubled
Therefore  total = constant. Thus in a superconducting loop because mutual inductance M  L1L2 .
flux never changes. (or it opposes 100 %)  The possibility of an electric bulb fusing is higher at the
1 2 time of switching ON and OFF because inductive effects
 Energy Stored in an Inductor : W  LI produce a surge at the time of switch-off and switch-on.
2
 Energy of interaction of two loops U = I12  I 2 1  MI1I 2  Motional emf : If a conductor is moved in a magnetic field

where M is mutual inductance then motional emf will be E = B  eff v

 Growth of a Current in an L - R Circuit : Here v   eff & v  B & B   eff
E  eff  effective length between the end points of
I
R
1  e Rt L  . [If initial current = 0]
conductor which is perpendicular to the velocity.
 Electromagnetic Induction 109

1. In electromagnetic induction, the induced e.m.f. in a 3A0 B0 4A0 B0

coil is independent of (1) (2)
t t
(1) Change in the flux
3B0 4B0
(2) Time (3) (4)
A0t A0t
(3) Resistance of the circuit
8. The magnetic flux linked with a coil is given by an
(4) None of the above equation  (in webers) = 8t2 + 3t + 5. The induced e.m.f.
2. Lenz’s law is consequence of the law of conservation in the coil at the fourth second will be
of (1) 16 units (2) 39 units
(1) Charge (2) Momentum (3) 67 units (4) 145 units
(3) M a s s (4) Energy 9. The current flowing in two coaxial coils in the same
3. In electromagnetic induction, the induced charge in a direction. On increasing the distance between the two,
coil is independent of the electric current will
(1) Change in the flux (1) Increase
(2) Time (2) Decrease
(3) Resistance in the circuit (3) Remain unchanged
(4) None of the above (4) The information is incomplete
4. The magnetic flux through a circuit of resistance R 10. A copper ring is held horizontally and a bar magnet is
changes by an amount   in time t. Then the total dropped through the ring with its length along the axis
quantity of electric charge Q, which passing during of the ring. The acceleration of the falling magnet while
this time through any point of the circuit is given by it is passing through the ring is
  (1) Equal to that due to gravity
(1) Q (2) Q R (2) Less than that due to gravity
t t
(3) More than that due to gravity
 
(3) Q R (4) Q  (4) Depends on the diameter of the ring and the length
t R of the magnet
5. A cylindrical bar magnet is kept along the axis of a 11. A rectangular coil ABCD is rotated anticlockwise with
circular coil. If the magnet is rotated about its axis, a uniform angular velocity about the axis shown in
then diagram below. The axis of rotation of the coil as well
(1) A current will be induced in a coil as the magnetic field B are horizontal. The induced
(2) No current will be induced in a coil e.m.f. in the coil would be maximum when
(3) Only an e.m.f. will be induced in the coil D Axis
(4) An e.m.f. and a current both will be induced in the
coil
C
6. A metallic ring is attached with the wall of a room. When A
the north pole of a magnet is brought near to it, the
induced current in the ring will be
B
S (1) The plane of the coil is horizontal
a (2) The plane of the coil makes an angle of 45° with
N the magnetic field
(3) The plane of the coil is at right angles to the
magnetic field
(4) The plane of the coil makes an angle of 30° with
(1) First clockwise then anticlockwise
the magnetic field
(2) In clockwise direction
12. A 10 metre wire kept in east-west falling with velocity 5
(3) In anticlockwise direction m/sec perpendicular to the field 0.3 × 10–4 Wb/m2. The
(4) First anticlockwise then clockwise induced e.m.f. across the terminal will be
7. A coil having an area A0 is placed in a magnetic field (1) 0.15 V (2) 1.5 mV
which changes from B0 to 4B0 in a time interval t. The
(3) 1.5 V (4) 15.0 V
e.m.f. induced in the coil will be
 110 Electromagnetic Induction
13. An electric potential difference will be induced between B constant in time and space, pointing perpendicular
the ends of the conductor shown in the diagram, when and into the plane of the loop exists everywhere. The
the conductor moves in the direction current induced in the loop is

M B C B

L Q v
N S
A D
P
(1) P (2) Q (1) clockwise (2) anticlockwise
(3) L (4) M (3) anticlockwise (4) Zero
14. Two rails of a railway track insulated from each other 21. A player with 3 m long iron rod runs towards east with
and the ground are connected to a milli voltmeter. What a speed of 30 km/hr. Horizontal component of earth’s
is the reading of voltmeter, when a train travels with a magnetic field is 4 × 10–5 Wb/m2. If he is running with
speed of 180 km/hr along the track. Given that the rod in horizontal and vertical positions, then the
vertical component of earth’s magnetic field is 0.2 × potential difference induced between the two ends of
10 –4 weber/m2 and the rails are separated by 1 metre the rod in two cases will be
(1) 10 –2 volt (2) 10–4 volt (1) Zero in vertical position and 1 × 10 –3 V in
–3
(3) 10 volt (4) 1 volt horizontal position
15. A conductor of 3 m in length is moving perpendicularly (2) 1 × 10–3 V in vertical position and zero is horizontal
to magnetic field of 10 –3 tesla with the speed of 102 m/ position
s, then the e.m.f. produced across the ends of (3) Zero in both cases
conductor will be (4) 1 × 10–3 V in both cases
(1) 0.03 volt (2) 0.3 volt 22. A coil of area 80 square cm and 50 turns is rotating
(3) 3 × 10 –3 volt (4) 3 volt with 2000 revolutions per minute about an axis
16. When a wire loop is rotated in a magnetic field, the perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.05 Tesla. The
direction of induced e.m.f. changes once in each maximum value of the e.m.f. developed in it is
(1) (1/4) revolution (2) (1/2) revolution 10
(1) 200  volt (2) volt
(3) 1 revolution (4) 2 revolution 3
17. An aeroplane in which the distance between the tips 4
of wings is 50 m is flying horizontally with a speed of (3) volt (4) volt
3
360 km/hr over a place where the vertical components 23. A conducting rod of length l is falling with a velocity v
of earth magnetic field is 2.0 × 10 –4 weber/m 2. The
perpendicular to a uniform horizontal magnetic field B.
potential difference between the tips of wings would
be The potential difference between its two ends will be
(1) 0.1 V (2) 1.0 V (1) 2Blv (2) Blv
(3) 0.2 V (4) 0.01 V 1
(3) Blv (4) B 2l 2v 2
18. A copper disc of radius 0.1 m is rotated about its centre 2
with 10 revolutions per second in a uniform magnetic 24. A conducting wire is moving towards right in a magnetic
field of 0.1 Tesla with its plane perpendicular to the field B. The direction of induced current in the wire is
field. The e.m.f. induced across the radius of disc is shown in the figure. The direction of magnetic field
 2 will be
(1) V (2) V
10 10
(3)   102 V (4) 2  102 V
19. A metal conductor of length 1 m rotates vertically about B i v
one of its ends at angular velocity 5 radians per second.
If the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is
0.2 × 10 –4 T, then the e.m.f. developed between the two
ends of the conductor is (1) In the plane of paper pointing towards right
(1) 5 mV (2) 5 × 10–4 V
(2) In the plane of paper pointing towards left
(3) 50 mV (4) 50 µV
(3) Perpendicular to the plane of paper and down
20. A conducting square loop of side L and resistance R
moves in it s plane with a uniform velocity v wards
perpendicular to one of its sides. A magnetic induction (4) Perpendicular to the plane of paper and upwards
 Electromagnetic Induction 111
25. The current carrying wire and the rod AB are in the 33. Two coils of self inductance L1 and L2 are placed closer
same plane. The rod moves parallel to the wire with a to each other so that total flux in one coil is completely
velocity v. Which one of the following statements is linked with other. If M is mutual inductance between
true about induced emf in the rod them, then
(1) M = L 1L 2 (2) M = L1 / L2
A i
(3) M  L1L2 (4) M = (L1 L2)2
34. The equivalent quantity of mass in electricity is
v
(1) Charge (2) Potential
(3) Inductance (4) Current
35. The momentum in mechanics is expressed as m × v.
B
(1) End A will be at lower potential with respect to B The analogous expression in electricity is
(1) I × Q (2) I × V
(2) A and B will be at the same potential
(3) L × I (4) L × Q
(3) There will be no induced e.m.f. in the rod
36. In what form is the energy stored in an inductor or A
(4) Potential at A will be higher than that at B
coil of inductance L is carrying a steady current i. What
26. The back e.m.f. induced in a coil, when current changes is the nature of its stored energy
from 1 ampere to zero in one milli second, is 4 volts, the
(1) Magnetic
self inductance of the coil is
(2) Electrical
(1) 1 H (2) 4 H
(3) Both magnetic and electrical
(3) H (4) 4 × 10–3 H
(4) Heat
27. An e.m.f. of 5 volt is produced by a self inductance,
37. The coefficient of self inductance of a solenoid is 0.18
when the current changes at a steady rate from 3 A to
mH. If a crode of soft iron of relative permeability 900
2 A in 1 millisecond. The value of self inductance is
is inserted, then the coefficient of self inductance will
(1) Zero (2) 5 H become nearly
(3) 5000 H (4) 5 mH (1) 5.4 mH (2) 162 mH
28. A 50 mH coil carries a current of 2 ampere. The energy (3) 0.006 mH (4) 0.0002 mH
stored in joules is 38. In a transformer, the coefficient of mutual inductance
(1) 1 (2) 0.1 between the primary and the secondary coil is 0.2
(3) 0.05 (4) 0.5 henry. When the current changes by 5 ampere/second
29. The current passing through a choke coil of 5 henry is in the primary, the induced e.m.f. in the secondary will
decreasing at the rate of 2 ampere/sec. The e.m.f. be
developing across the coil is (1) 5 V (2) 1 V
(1) 10 V (2) – 10 V (3) 25 V (4) 10 V
(3) 2.5 V (4) – 2.5 V 39. When the current in a coil changes from 8 ampere to 2
30. Average energy stored in a pure inductance L when a ampere in 3 × 10–2 second, the e.m.f. induced in the coil
current i flows through it, is is 2 volt. The self inductance of the coil (in millihenry)
(1) 10 V (2) – 10 V is
(3) 2.5 V (4) – 2.5 V (1) 1 (2) 5
(3) 20 (4) 10
31. A solenoid has 2000 turns wound over a length of
0.30 metre. The area of its cross-section is 1.2 × 10–3 m2. 40. The mutual inductance between two coils is 1.25 henry.
Around its central section, a coil of 300 turns is wound. If the current in the primary changes at the rate of 80
If an initial current of 2 A in the solenoid is reversed in ampere/secon d, then the induced e. m.f. in the
0.25 sec, then the e.m.f. induced in the coil is secondary is
(1) 6 × 10 –4 V (2) 4.8 × 10–3 V (1) 12.5 V (2) 64.0 V
(3) 6 × 10 –2 V (4) 48 mV (3) 0.016 V (4) 100.0 V
32. A coil is wound as a transformer of rectangular cross- 41. Which of the following does not depend upon the
section. If all the linear dimensions of the transformer magnetic effect of some sort
are increased by a factor 2 and the number of turns per (1) Moving coil galvanometer
unit length of the coil remain the same, the self
(2) Hot wire ammeter
inductance increased by a factor of
(1) 16 (2) 12 (3) Dynamo
(3) 8 (4) 4 (4) Electric motor
 112 Electromagnetic Induction
42. Use of eddy currents is done in the following except 47. The core of a transformer is laminated to reduce energy
(1) Moving coil galvanometer losses due to
(2) Electric brakes (1) Eddy currents
(3) Induction motor (2) Hysteresis
(4) Dynamo (3) Resistance in winding
43. Plane of eddy currents makes an angle with the plane (4) None of these
of magnetic lines of force equal to 48. The pointer of a dead-beat galvanometer gives a steady
(1) 40° (2) 0° deflection because
(3) 90° (4) 180° (1) Eddy currents are produced in the conducting
44. Which of the following is constructed on the principle frame over which the coil is wound
of electromagnetic induction (2) Its magnet is very strong
(1) Galvanometer (2) Electric motor (3) Its pointer is very light
(3) Generator (4) Voltmeter (4) Its frame is made of abonite
45. A transformer is based on the principle of 49. The device that does not work on the principle of
(1) Mutual inductance (2) Self inductance mutual induction is
(3) Ampere’s law (4) Lenz’s law (1) Induction coil (2) Motor
46. Which of the following is not an application of eddy (3) Tesla coil (4) Transformer
currents 50. Eddy currents are produced when
(1) Induction furnace (1) A metal is kept in varying magnetic field
(2) Galvanometer damping (2) A metal is kept in the steady magnetic field
(3) Speedometer of automobiles (3) A circular coil is placed in a magnetic field
(4) X-ray crystallography (4) Through a circular coil, current is passed
 Electromagnetic Induction 113

(Concept Builder)

1. A square of side L meters lies in the x–y plane in a 4. There are two coils A and B as shown in figure. A
region, where the magnetic field is given by current starts flowing in B as shown, when A is moved
B  B (2iˆ  3 ˆj  4kˆ)T , where B is const ant. The towards B and stops when A stops moving. The current
0 0
magnitude of flux passing through the square is in A is counterclockwise. B is kept stationary when A
moves. We can infer that
(1) 2B0L2 Wb (2) 3B0L2 Wb A B
4B0L2 Wb v
(3) (4) 29 B0L2 Wb

(1) there is a constant current in the clockwise

2. A loop, made of straight edges has six corners at A(0, direction in A.
0, 0), B(L, 0, 0 ), C(L, L, 0), D(0, L, 0), (2) there is a varying current in A.
E(0, L, L) and F(0, 0, L). A magnetic field B  B0 (iˆ  kˆ)T (3) there is no current in A.
is present in the region. The flux passing through the (4) there is a constant current in the counter clockwise
loop ABCDEFA (in that order) is direction in A.
(1) B0L2 Wb (2) 2B0L2 Wb
5. Same as problem 4 except the coil A is made to rotate
(3) 2 B0L2 Wb (4) 4B0L2 Wb about a vertical axis (figure). No current flows in B if A
is at rest. The current in coil A, when the current in B
3. A cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about its axis (at t = 0) is counter clockwise and the coil A is as shown
(Figure). A wire is connected from the axis and is made at this instant, t = 0, is
to touch the cylindrical surface through a contact. Then A  B

axis
A
N (1) constant current clockwise.
bar (2) varying current clockwise.
magnet  (3) varying current counter clockwise.
(4) constant current counter clockwise.

S
6. The self inductance L of a solenoid of length l and area
(1) a direct current flows in the ammeter A. of cross section A, with a fixed number of turns N
increases as
(2) no current flows through the ammeter A.
(1) l and A increase.
(3) an alternating sinusoidal current flows through
(2) l decreases and A increases.
the ammeter A with a time period T = 2/.
(3) l increases and A decreases.
(4) a time varying non-sinusoidal current flows
(4) both l and A decrease.
through the ammeter A.
 114 Electromagnetic Induction

• Instructions for Questions 1 to 5 Reason : In the situation of statement-1, the direction

Given bel ow are two statements : one is labelled as in which the rod will slide is that which tends to maintain
Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R). constant flux through the loop. Providing a larger loop
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most area counteracts the decrease in magnetic flux. So the
appropriate answer from the options given below : rod moves to the right independent of the fact that the
direction of magnetic field is into the page or out of the
(1) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct page.
explanation of (A)
4. Assertion : Eddy currents is produced in any metallic
(2) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct conductor when magnetic flux is changed around it.
explanation of (A) Reason : Electric potential determines the flow of
(3) (A) is correct the (R) is not correct charge.
(4) (A) is not correct but (R) is correct 5. Assertion : The quantity L/R possesses dimensions
of time.
1. Assertion : Two coaxial conducting rings of different Reason : To reduce the rate of increases of current
radii are placed in space. The mutual inductance of through a solenoid should increase the time constant
both the rings is maximum if the rings are coplanar (L / R).
also.
Reason : For two coaxial conducting rings of different • Instructions for Questions 6 to 10
radii, the magnitude of magnetic flux in one ring due to Given below are two statements :
current in other ring is maximum when both rings are
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most
coplanar.
appropriate answer from the options given below :
2. Assertion : A resistance R is connected between the
(1) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
two ends of the parallel smooth conducting rails. A
conducting rod lies on these fixed horizontal rails and (2) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
a uniform constant magnetic field B exists (3) Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
perpendicular to the plane of the rails as shown in the (4) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
figure. If the rod is given avelocity v and released as
shown in figure, it will stop after some time. The total
6. Statement I : Faraday's laws are consequences of
work done by magnetic field is negative. conservation of energy.
B fixed Statement II : In a purely resistive ac circuit, the current
lags behind the e.m.f. in phase.
R v
7. Statement I : Only a change in magnetic flux will
maintain an induced current the coil.
Reason : If force acts opposite to direction of velocity Statement II : The presence of large magnetic flux
its work done is negative. through a coil maintains a current in the coil if the
circuit is continuous.
3. Assertion : Consider the arrangement shown below. A
smooth conducting rod, CD, is lying on a smooth U- 8. Statement I : Inductance coil are made of copper.
shaped conducting wire making good electrical contact Statement II : Induced current is more in wire having
with it. The U-shape conducting wire is fixed and lies less resistance.
in horizontal plane. There is a uniform and constant 9. Statement I : Self-inductance is called the inertia of
magnetic field B in vertical direction (perpendicular to electricity.
plane of page in figure). If the magnetic field strength Statement II : Self-inductance is the phenomenon,
is decreased, the rod moves towards right. according to which an opposing induced e.m.f. is
produced in a coil as a result of change in current or
D rod magnetic flux linked in the coil.
B
perpendicular 10. Statement I : When two coils are wound on each other,
to page the mutual induction between the coils is maximum.
Statement II : Mutual induction does not depend on
C the orientation of the coils.
 Electromagnetic Induction 115

(Direct from
NCERT)

Match the List – I and List – II and choose the correct 3. A long current carrying wire and a
combination from the options given. loop made of conducting wire are y
1. A square loop of conducting wire is placed in x-y plane, such that the B C
placed s ymmetrically near a long long wire is parallel to y-axis. List – I x
straight current carrying wire as shown. I I is regarding some changes made
in the position of loop and List – II A D
Match the statements in List – I with
indicates the resulting effects.
the corresponding results in List – II.
List - I List - II List – I List – II

(a) If the magnitude of (i) Current will induce in (a) If loop is moved away (i) current is induced in the
current I is increased clockwise direction in from the wire while loop in anticlockwise
the loop keeping in x-y plane, direction.
(b) If the magnitude of (ii) Current will induce in (b) If loop is moved (ii) current is induced in
current I is decreased anticlockwise direction toward the wire while the loop in clockwise
keeping in x-y plane direction.
in the loop
(c) If loop is rotated about (iii) no emf is induced in the
(c) If the loop is moved (iii) wire will attract the loop
x-axis, then just after this loop.
away from the wire
(d) If loop is rotated (iv) the wire will attrat or
(d) If the loop is moved (iv) wire will repel the loop about y-axis, then repel the loop.
towards the wire (v) loop will rotate when just after this
current changes.
(1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) – (ii), (d) – (iv)
(1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) –(ii), (d) – (iv) (2) (a) – (i, iii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (ii, iv)
(2) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (i, iii) ; (d) – (ii, iv) (3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iv); (c) – (iii); (d) – (iii)
(3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (iii); (c) – (ii, iii) ; (d) – (ii, iv) (4) (a) – (i); (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i); (d) – (iii)
(4) (a) – (i) ; (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i) ; (d) – (iii) 4. A conducting loop is held in a
2. The magnetic field in the cylindrical region shown in figure magnetic field such that the  Observer
increases at a constant rate of 10.0 mT/s Each side of the field is oriented perpendicular B (positive direction of field)
square loop abcd and defa has a length of 2.00 cm and to the area of the loop as shown
resistance of 2.00 . Correctly match the current in the in figure (a). At any instant,
wire ‘ad’ in four different situations as listed in List - I magnetic flux density over the
with the values given in List - II. entire area has the same value
but it varies with time as shown (a)
in figure (b).
e d c B
S1 S2
f a 60° 45° t4 t5 t6
b O t1 t2 t3 t
120°

List – I List – II (b)

List – I List – II
(a) the switch S1 is (i) 5 × 10–7 A, d to a
closed but S2 is open (a) Induced current in the (i) For t2 < t < t3
(b) S1 is open but S2 is (ii) 5 × 10–7 A, a to d coil is in the clockwise
closed (b) Induced current in the coil (ii) For t3 < t < t4
(c) both S1 and S2 are (iii) 2.5 × 10–8 A, d to a is in the anticlockwise sense
open (c) Induced current is zero (iii) For t5 < t < t6
(d) both S 1 and S2 are (iv) 2.5 × 10–8 A, a to d (d) Induced current is (iv) For t4 < t < t5
closed. (v) No current flows maximum
(1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (iv) (1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (iv)
(2) (a) – (i, iii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii) ; (d) – (ii, iv) (2) (a) – (i, iii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (ii, iv)
(3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii); (d) – (ii, iv) (3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii); (d) – (ii, iv)
(4) (a) – (i); (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i); (d) – (iii) (4) (a) – (iii); (b) – (i, ii); (c) – (iv); (d) – (iii)
 116 Electromagnetic Induction

(Previous Year Questions)

1. In an inductor of self-inductance L = 2 mH, current (1) 3.2 V (2) 4.8 V
changes with time according to relation i = t 2 e –1. At (3) 0.8 V (4) 1.6 V
what time emf is zero ? [AIPMT-2001] 8. A rectangular, a square, a circular and an elliptical loop,
(1) 4 s (2) 3 s all in the x y-plane, are moving out of a uniform magnetic
(3) 2 s (4) 1 s field with a constant velocity, v  viˆ . The magnetic
2. The magnetic flux through a circuit of resistance R field is directed along the during the passage of these
changes by an amount  in a time t. Then the total loops, out ot the field region, will not remain constant
quantity of electric charge q that passes any point in for [AIPMT-2009]
the circuit during the time t is represented by (1) the rectangular, circular and elliptical loops
[AIPMT-2004] (2) the circular and the elliptical loops
1   (3) only the elliptical loop
(1) q  (2) q 
R t R (4) any of the four loops
  9. A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform
(3) q  (4) q  R  magnetic field, B = 0.025 T with its plane perpendicular
t t
3. As a result of change in the magnetic flux linked to the to the loop. The radius of the loop is made to shrink at
closed loop shown in the figure, an emf V volt is induced a constant rate of 1 mms–1. The induced emf when the
in the loop. The work done (joule) in taking a charge q radius is 2 cm, is [AIPMT-2010]
coulomb once along the loop is [AIPMT-2005] (1) 2 V (2) V

(3) V (4) 2 µV
2
10. The current i in a coil varies with time as shown in the
figure. The variation of induced emf with time would
(1) qV (2) zero be [AIPMT-2011]
(3) 2 qV (4) qV/2 i
4. Two coils of self-inductances 2 mH and 8 mH are placed
so close together that the effective flux in one coil is
completely linked with the other. The mutual inductance t
0
between these coils is [AIPMT-2006] T/4 T/2 3T/4 T
(1) 10 mH (2) 6 mH
(3) 4 mH (4) 16 mH
5. A long solenoid has 500 turns. When a current of 2 A emf
is passed through it, the resulting magnetic flux linked
with each turn of the solenoid is 4 × 10–3 Wb. the self- t
(1) 0
inductance of the solenoid is [AIPMT-2008] T/4 T/2 3T/2 T
(1) 2.5 H (2) 2 H
emf
(3) 1 H (4) 4 H
6. A circular disc of radius 0.2 m is placed in ac uniform T/4 T/2 3T/2 T
(2) 0 t
1 2
magnetic field of induction (Wb/m ) in such a way

that its axis makes an angle of 60° with B. The magnetic emf
flux linked with the disc is [AIPMT-2008]
(1) 0.02 Wb (2) 0.06 Wb T/2 3T/4
(3) 0 t
(3) 0.08 Wb (4) 0.01 Wb T/4 T
7. A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform
emf
magnetic field 0.04 T with its plane perpendicular to
the magnetic field. The radius of the loop starts
shrinking at 2 mm s–1. The induced emf in the loop when T/4 T
(4) 0 t
T/2 3T/4
the radius is 2 cm is [AIPMT-2009]
 Electromagnetic Induction 117
11. The current (I) in the inductance is varying with time (1) abcd (2) adcb
according to the plot shown in figure. [AIPMT-2012] (3) The current will reverse its direction as the
electron goes past the coil
I
(4) No current induced
16. A rectangular coil of length 0.12 m and width 0.1 m
T/2 having 50 turns of wire is suspended vertically in a
uniform magnetic field of strength 0.2 Wb/m2. The coil
t T carries a current of 2 A. If the plane of the coil is inclined
Which one of the following is the correct variation of at an angle of 30° with the direction of the field, the
troque required to keep the coil in stable equilibrium
voltage with time in the coil ?
will [AIPMT-2015]
V V (1) 0.15 Nm (2) 0.20 Nm
(3) 0.24 Nm (4) 0.12 Nm
t
(1) (2) 17. A conducting square frame of side ‘a’ and a long
T/2 T
T/2 T straight wire carrying current I are located in the same
t plane as shown in the figure. The frame moves to the
V V right with a constant velocity ‘v’. The emf induced in
the frame will be proportional to [AIPMT-2015]
(3) (4) t
T/2 t T T x
T/2
12. A coil of resistance 400  is placed in a magnetic field. I
If the magnetic flux  (Wb) linked with the coil varies v
with time ti (second) as  = 50 t2 + 4. The current in the
coil at t = 2 s is [AIPMT-2012] a
(1) 0.5 A (2) 0.1 A 1 1
(3) 2 A (4) 1 A (1) (2)
x2 (2 x  a ) 2
13. A wire loop is rotated in magnetic field. The frequency 1 1
of change of direction of the induced emf is (3) (4)
(2 x  a ) 2 (2 x  a )(2 x  a )
(1) once per revolution [NEET-2013]
18. A uniform magnetic field is restricted within a region
(2) twice per revolution
of radius r. The magnetic field changes with time at a
(3) four times per revolution rate dB/dt. Loop 1 of radius R > r encloses the region
(4) six times per revolution r and loop 2 of radius R is outside the region of
14. A thin semicircular conducting ring (PQR) of radius r magnetic field as shown in the figure. Then, the emf
is falling with its plane vertical in a horizontal magnetic generated is [NEET-2016]
field B, as shown in figure. The potential difference
developed across the ring when its speed is v, is r R R
× × × × 1 2
Q B
× × × × (1) zero in loop 1 and zero in loop 2
r
dB 2 dB
× × × × (2)   r in loop 1 and   r 2 in loop 2
P R dt dt
(1) zero [AIPMT-2014] dB 2
(2) Bvr2 /2 and P is higher potential (3)   r in loop 1 and zero in loop 2
dt
(3) rBv and R is at higher potential dB 2
(4) 2rBv and R is at higher potential (4)   r in loop 1 and zero in loop 2
dt
15. An electron moves on a straight line path XY as shown. 19. Two identical charged spheres suspended from a
The abcd is a coil adjacent in the path of electron. common point by two massless strings of lengths l,
What will be the direction of current, if any induced in are initially at a distance d (d << 1) apart because of
the coil? [AIPMT-2015] their mutual repulsion. The charges begin to leak from
a the both the spheres at a constant rate. As a result, the
spheres approach each other wtih a velocity v. Then, v
varies as a function of the distance x between the
b d sphere, as [NEET-2016]
– 1/2
(1) v  x (2) v  x
c (3) v  x–1 (4) v  x 1/2
X Y
 118 Electromagnetic Induction
20. A square loop ABCD carrying a current i, is placed 27. The magnetic flux linked with a coil (in Wb) is given by
near and coplanar with a long straight conductor XY the equation  = 5t2 + 3t + 16. The magnitude of induced
carrying a current I, the net force on the loop will be emf in the coil at the fourth second will be [NEET-2020]
Y B C (1) 10 V (2) 33 V
(3) 43 V (4) 108 V
I i L 28. An inductor of inductance L, a capacitor of capacitance
C and a resistor of resistance 'R' are connected in series
X A D to an ac source of potential difference 'V' volts as
L/2 L shown in figure. Potential difference across L, C and R
0 Ii 20 IiL is 40 V, 10 V and 40 V, respectively. The amplitude of
(1) (2) [NEET-2016] current flowing through LCR series circuit is 10 2 A.
2 3
0 IiL 2 0 Ii The impedance of the circuit is : [NEET-2021]
(3) (4)
2 3
21. A long solenoid has 1000 turns. When a current of 4 A
flows through it, the magnetic flux linked with each
turn of the solenoid is 4 × 10 –3 Wb. The self-inductance
of the solenoid is [NEET-2016]
(1) 3 H (2) 2 H (1) 4 2 (2) 5/ 2 
(3) 1 H (4) 4 H (3) 4  (4) 5 
22. A long solenoid of diameter 0.1 m has 2 × 104 turns per 29. A step down transformer connected to an ac mains
metre. At the centre of the solenoid, a coil of 100 turns supply of 220 V is made to operate at 11V, 44 W lamp.
and radius 0.01 m is placed with its axis coinciding Ignoring power losses in the transformer, what is the
with the solenoid axis. The current in the solenoid current in the primary circuit ? [NEET-2021]
reduced at a constant rate to 0 A from 4 A in 0.05 s. If (1) 0.2 A (2) 0.4 A
the resistance of the coil is 10  2 , the total charge
(3) 2A (4) 4A
flowing through the coil during this time is [NEET-2017]
30. Two conducting circular loops of radii R1 and R2 are
(1) 32 C (2) 16 µC
placed in the same plane with their centres coinciding.
(3) 32 µC (4) 16 C If R1 >> R2, the mutual inductance M between them will
23. A 800 turn coil of effective area 0.05 m 2 is kept be directly proportional to : [NEET-2021]
perpendicular to a magnetic field 5 × 10–5 T. When the
R1 R2
plane of the coil is rotated by 90º around any of its (1) (2)
coplanar axis in 0.1 s, the e.m.f. induced in the coil will R2 R1
be: [NEET-2019] R12 R22
(1) 2 × 10 –3 V (2) 0.02 V (3) (4)
R2 R1
(3) 2 V (4) 0.2 V 31. A body of mass 60 g experiences a gravitational force
24. A cycle wheel of radius 0.5 m is rotated with constant of 3.0 N, when placed at a particular point. The
angular velocity of 10 rad/s in a region of magnetic magnitude of the gravitational field intensity at that
field of 0.1 T which is perpendicular to the plane of the point is: [NEET-2022]
wheel. The e.m.f. generated between its centre and the (1) 0.05 N/kg (2) 50 N/kg
rim is, [NEET-2019] (3) 20 N/kg (4) 180 N/kg
(1) Zero (2) 0.25 V 32. A big circular coil of 1000 turns and average radius
(3) 0.125 V (4) 0.5 V 10 m is rotating about its horizontal diameter at
25. In which of the following devices, the eddy current 2 rad s –1. If the vertical component of earth's magnetic
effect is not used? [NEET-2019] field at that place is 2 × 10–5 T and electrical resistance
(1) electromagnet (2) electric heater of the coil is 12.56 , then the maximum induced
(3) induction furnace current in the coil will be : [NEET-2022]
(4) magnetic braking in train
(1) 1.5 A (2) 1 A
26. A wheel with 20 metallic spokes each 1 m long is rotated
(3) 2 A (4) 0.25 A
with a speed of 120 rpm in a plane perpendicular to a
magnetic field of 0.4 G. The induced emf between the 33. The magnetic flux linked to a circular coil of radius R
axle and rim of the wheel will be (1 G = 10–4 T) is : [NEET-2022]
3 2
[NEET-2020]  = 2t + 4t + 2t + 5 Wb
(1) 2.51 V (2) 2.51 × 10–4 V The magnitude of induced emf in the coil at t = 5 s is:
(3) 2.51 × 10–5 V (4) 4.0 × 10–5 (1) 108 V (2) 197 V
(3) 150 V (4) 192 V
Electromagnetic Induction 119

6.14
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 01 41. (2) 42. (4) 43. (3) 44. (3) 45. (1)
1. (4) 2. (4) 3. (3) 4. (3) 5. (1) 46. (4) 47. (1) 48. (1) 49. (3) 50. (1)
6. (4) 7. (4) 8. (2) 9. (1) 10. (3)
NCERT EXEMPLAR OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 02 1. (3) 2. (2) 3. (2) 4. (4) 5. (1)
11. (3) 12. (2) 13. (2) 14. (3) 15. (2) 6. (2)
16. (3) 17. (4) 18. (1)
ASSERTION–REASON & STATEMENT QUESTIONS
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 03 1. (1) 2. (4) 3. (1) 4. (2) 5. (2)
19. (4) 20. (4) 21. (2) 22. (1) 23. (4) 6. (3) 7. (3) 8. (1) 9. (2) 10. (3)
24. (4) 25. (3) 26. (3) 27. (3) 28. (1)
MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS FROM NCERT
1. (2) 2. (1) 3. (3) 4. (4)
1. (3) 2. (4) 3. (2) 4. (4) 5. (2)
6. (3) 7. (1) 8. (3) 9. (1) 10. (2) ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
11. (1) 12. (2) 13. (4) 14. (3) 15. (2) 1. (3) 2. (2) 3. (1) 4. (3) 5. (3)
16. (2) 17. (2) 18. (3) 19. (4) 20. (4) 6. (1) 7. (1) 8. (2) 9. (2) 10. (4)
21. (2) 22. (3) 23. (2) 24. (3) 25. (4) 11. (4) 12. (1) 13. (2) 14. (4) 15. (4)
26. (4) 27. (4) 28. (2) 29. (1) 30. (4) 16. (2) 17. (4) 18. (3) 19. (2) 20. (4)
21. (3) 22. (3) 23. (2) 24. (3) 25. (2)
31. (4) 32. (3) 33. (3) 34. (3) 35. (3)
26. (2) 27. (3) 28. (4) 29. (1) 30. (4)
36. (1) 37. (2) 38. (2) 39. (4) 40. (4)
31. (2) 32. (2) 33. (4)
120 Alternating Current

ALTERNATING
CURRENT
Chapter 07
Percentage of Questions in Last 34 Years’ in NEET / AIPMT from this Chapter

Percentage
A • Power in A.C. circuits, Resonance 33%
)
7%
(1
D

B • A.C., Circuits, LCR Series circuits, 30%

A (33%)
LC Oscillations
C (20%)

C • Eddy Current, Transformer 20%

B (30%)

D • A.C. Generator, Alternating current, terms 17%

related to alternating current

WHAT DO YOU WANT TO KNOW? 7.9 TRANSFORMERS

7.1 INTRODUCTION 7.10 SYNOPSIS

7.2 AC VOLTAGE APPLIED TO A RESISTOR 7.11 MISCELLANEOUS Questions from NCERT

7.3 REPRESENTATION OF AC CURRENT & 7.12 NCERT Exemplar Questions

VOLTAGE BY ROTATING VECTOR PHASORS
7.13 ASSERTION-REASON & STATEMENT
7.4 AC VOLTAGE APPLIED TO AN INDUCTOR BASED Questions from NCERT

7.5 AC VOLTAGE APPLIED TO A CAPACITOR 7.14 MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS

7.6 AC VOLTAGE APPLIED TO A SERIES LCR 7.15 ARCHIVE QUESTIONS

CIRCUIT
7.16 ANSWER KEY
7.6.3 Resonance

7.7 POWER IN AC CIRCUIT : THE POWER

FACTOR

7.8 LC OSCILLATIONS
Alternating
Current : I Current
I 0 sin(t  ) RMS value of alternating Mean or average value of Peak current (I0)121
and
current and voltage alternating current & voltage voltage (V0) : The
Voltage V  VR2  VC2 I V 2I 2V maximum value of
I rms  0 Vrms  0 I mean  0 Vmean  0
2 2   current and voltage
Impedance Z  R 2  X 2C I0=2 Irms V0=2 Vrms
1
Phase difference :   tan 1 Alternating Transformer Device Step-up Ns E s Ip
CR current (I) and trans- K 1 K   
Changes a low N p E p Is
R2 alternating voltage of high former
Power factor : cos   voltage (V)
R 2  X 2C current into a high Step-down Np E p Is
I = I0 sin t; voltage of low trans- K  1 K   
Leading quantity : Current current and former N s E s Ip
V = V0 sin t
vice-versa
Current : I  I 0 sin(t  )
LC Circuit
Voltage V  R 2 ( VL  VC ) 2
ALTERNATING Power in
Voltage: V = VL – VC CURRENT an Ac. Impedance Z  R 2 ( X L  X C ) 2
Impedance: Z = XL – XC Direction of current Circuit X  XC
changes alternatively Pav = Vrms Phase difference : L
Phase difference: =90º R
and its magnitude Irms cos  at resonance X L  X C  Z min  R
Power factor: cos  = 0 changes continuously
Leading quantity: Either Band  width :   R ;
voltage or current L
Quality factor : Q  1 L
AC Circuit
Current : I  I 0 sin(t  ) R C

Voltage V  VR2  VL2

Inductive (L) Circuit Capacitive (C) Circuit Resistive (R) Circuit
Impedance Z  R 2  X 2L Current= I=I0 sin (t+/2) Current = I = I0 sin t
L Phase difference between Phase difference between
Phase difference :   tan 1 Phase difference between V and I :  = 90º or –/2 V and I :  = 0º
R V and I :  = 90º or /2 Power factor : cos  = 0 Power factor : cos  = 1
R Power factor : cos  = 0 Power : P = 0 VI
Power factor : cos   Power : P  0 0
R 2  X 2L Power : P = 0 Phasor : Current leads the 2
Phasor : Voltage leads the voltage by /2 Phasor : Current and
Leading quantity : voltage current by /2 voltage both in same phase

7.1 P.No.: 233

 When a resistor is connected across the terminals of a battery, a current is established in the circuit. The
current has a unique direction, it goes from the positive terminal to the negative terminal via the external
resistor. The magnitude of the current also remains almost constant. If the direction of the current in a
resistor or in any other element changes alternately, the current is called an alternating current (AC). In this
chapter, we shall study the alternating current that varies sinusoidally with time. Such a current is given by
i = i0 sin (t + ).
i

t
T
 The current repeats its value after each time interval T = 2/. This time interval is called the time period.
The current is positive for half the time period and is negative for the remaining half period. This means, its
direction reverses after each half time period. The maximum value of the current is i0 which is called the
peak current or the current amplitude. To get sinusoidally varying alternating current, we need a source
which can generate sinusoidally varying emf. An AC generator, also called an AC dynamo, can be used as
such a source. It converts mechanical energy into electrical energy, producing an alternating emg.
 122 Alternating Current
AC AND DC CURRENT
 A current that changes its direction periodically is called alternating current (AC). If a current maintains its
direction constant it is called direct current (DC).

i i

constant dc periodic dc
BASIC PRINCIPLE OF AC GENERATION
 Alternating voltage is generated by rotating a coil of conducting wire in a strong magnetic field. The
magnetic flux linked with the coil changes with time and an alternating emf is thus induced. Instantaneous
flux linked with coil is
 
  ( A  B) n
 ABn cos( t   0 )
where A = area of the coil (in m2)
B = magnetic field (in tesla), n = number of turns

2
 = angular frequency =  2 ƒ (in rad s–1)
T
ƒ = frequency (in hertz); 0 = initial phase angle
With the change of time cos (t + 0) changes consequently an
emf V is induced. According to Faraday’s law  = t
d
V
dt
d
 [ Abn cos(t   0 )]  Abn sin(t   0 )  V  Vm sin(t   0 )
dt
Here Vm = voltage amplitude of sinusoidal voltage or the peak value of ac voltage
where Vm – ABn

ALTERNATING CURRENT AND VOLTAGE

 Voltage or current is said to be alternating if it is change continously in magnitude and perodically in
direction with time. It can be represented by a sine curve or cosine curve
I = I0 sin t or I = I0 cos t
where I = Instantaneous value of current at time t, I0 = Amplitude or peak value

 = Angular frequency   2  2 ƒ T = time period ; ƒ = frequency

T
I I
I0 3 I0

T
T/2 (3/4)T T 2 T
T 3T
T/4 t 4 4 t

–I0 –I0
I as a sine function of t I as a cosine function of t
 Alternating Current 123
AMPLITUDE OF AC
 The maximum value of current in either direction is called peak value or the amplitude of current. It is
represented by I0.
Peak to peak value = 2I0

PERIODIC TIME
 The time taken by alternating current to complete one cycle of variation is called periodic time or time period
of the current.

FREQUENCY
 The number of cycle completed by an alternating current in one second is called the frequency of the
current.
Unit : cycle/s ; (Hz)
In India : ƒ = 50 Hz, supply voltage = 220 volt
In USA : ƒ = 60 Hz ,supply voltage = 110 volt

Condition required for Current/ Voltage to be Alternating

 Amplitude is constant  Alternate half cycle is positive and half negative
The alternating current continuously varies in magnitude and periodically reverses its direction.
I sinosudial AC I triangular AC

+ +
– t –

square wave AC saw tooth wave

I I

t t

I0 I0 I0

t t t
mixture of AC and DC
Not AC (direction not change) Not AC (not periodic)

AVERAGE VALUE OR MEAN VALUE

 The mean value of A.C over any half cycle (either positive or negative) is that value of DC which would send
same amount of charge through a circuit as is sent by the AC through same circuit in the same time.
T /2

 Idt
0
Average value of current for half cycle < I > = T /2

 dt
0
 124 Alternating Current
Average value of I = I0 sin t over the positive half cycle :
T

 2
I 0 sin t dt 2 I0 T
2I
I av  0
T
   cos t 02  0
2
T 
 dt
0

 For symmetric AC, average value over full cycle = 0,

Average value of sinusoidal AC
As the average value of AC
Full cycle (+ve) half cycle (–ve) half cycle over a complete cycle is zero,
it is always defined over a
2I 0 2I 0 half cycle which must be
0
  either positive or negative.

MAXIMUM VALUE
 I = a sin IMax. = a
 I = a + b sin   IMax. = a + b ( if a and b > 0 )
 I = a sin  + b cos   IMax. = a 2  b2
 I = a sin2   IMax. = a (a > 0)

Root Mean square (rms) Value

 It is value of DC which would produce same heat in given resistance in given time as is done by the
alternating current when passed through the same resistance for the same time.
T
 I 2 dt
0
I rms  T rms value = Virtual value = Apparent value
 dt
0

 rms value of I = I0 sin t :

T
 ( I 0 sin t ) 2 dt T
I rms  0 I 02 T 1 T 1  cos 2t  1  t sin 2t  I
sin t dt = I 0
2
 dt  I 0   0

T
dt
=
T  0 T 
0  2 

 
T  2 2  2  0 2
0

Current Average Peak RMS Angular Frequency

I0
I1  I 0 sin t 0 I0 
2
I0 I0 I0
I 2  I 0 sin t cos t  sin 2t 0 
2 2 2 2
I0
I 3  I 0 sin t  I 0 cos t 0 2 I0 
2
 If nothing is mentioned then values printed in a.c circuit on electrical appliances, any given or unknown
values, reading of AC meters are assumed to be RMS.
Peak value
 For above varieties of current, rms value =
2
Alternating Current 125

 AC can't be used in
1. Charging of battery or capacitor (as its average value = 0)
2. Electrolysis and electroplating (Due to large inertia, ions can not follow frequency of A.C)

Minimum, at that instant when they are near their peak values
 The rate of change of A.C.
Maximum, at that instant when they change their direction.

 For alternating current I0 > Irms > Iav.

 Average value over half cycle is zero if one quarter is positive and the other quarter is negative.

+
–

 Average value of symmetrical AC for a cycle is zero that is why average potential difference on any
element in A.C circuit is zero.
 The instrument based on heating effect of current are works on both A.C and D.C supply and also provides
same heating for same value of A.C (rms) and D.C. that's why a bulb is bright equally in D.C. and A.C. of
same value.
 If the frequency of AC is f then it becomes zero 2f times in one second and the direction of current changes
2ƒ times in one second. Also it become maximum 2f times in one second.

Find the average value of current shown graphically, from t = 0 to t = 2 sec.

i
(Amp)
10

0 1 2
t (sec)

From the i – t graph, area from t = 0 to t = 2 sec

1
= × 2 × 10 = 10 Amp. sec.
2
10
 Average Current = = 5 Amp.
2

2
Find the average value of current from t = 0 to t  , if the current varies as i = Im sin t .

126 Alternating Current

i
2

Im  2  +
I m sin tdt
 
1  cos 
  p/w 2p/w
0
 i   0 0 t
2 2 –
 
It can be seen graphically that the area of i – t graph of one cycle is zero.
 < i > in one cycle = 0.

Show graphically that the average of sinusoidally varying current in half cycle may or may not be zero

+ +
0 – t

Part A Part B
Figure shows two parts A and B, each half cycle. In part A we can see that the net area is zero
 < i > in part A is zero.
In part B, area is positive hence in this part < i >  0.

  3
Find the average value of current i = Im sin t from (i) t = 0 to t = (ii) t = to t = .
 2 2

3
2
 /
Im     I m sin tdt
 I m sin tdt  1  cos     
     2I m
 
2
(i) i  0
 (ii)  i   
 0.
 /  / 



Current in an A.C. circuit is given by i  2 2 sin   t   , then the average value of current during time
 4
t = 0 to t = 1 sec is:
Alternating Current 127

1 1
i dt   4
i  2 2  sin   t   
0
1 0  4 

ROOT MEAN SQUARE VALUE :

t2
2
f dt
 Root Mean Square Value of a function, from t1 to t2, is defined as ƒrms = t1 .
t2  t1

2
Find the rms value of current from t = 0 to t = , if the current varies as i = Im sin t .


2 / 

 I m2 sin 2 tdt
0 I m2 I
irms    m
2 /  2 2

  3
Find the rms value of current i = Im sin t from (i) t = 0 to t = (ii) t = to t = .
 2 2

 / 3 /2

 I m2 sin 2 tdt  I
2
m sin 2 tdt
(i) 0 I m2 I (ii) i    I m2 I
irms    m rms
/2
  m
 / 2 2  / 2 2
Note :
1. The r m s values for one cycle and half cycle (either positive half cycle or negative half cycle) is same.
2. From the above two Ex.s note that for sinusoidal functions rms value (Also called effective value)
peak value I
 or I rms  m
2 2

Find the effective value of current i = 2 sin 100 t + 2 cos (100 t + 30º).

The equation can be written as i = 2 sin 100 t + 2 sin (100 t + 120º)

So phase difference  = 120º
 128 Alternating Current

( I m ) res  A12  A22  2 A1 A2 cos 

 1 2
 4  4  2  2  2     2, so effective value or rms value   2A
 2 2
SOME IMPORTANT WAVE FORMS AND THEIR RMS AND AVERAGE VALUE

Nature of wave form Wave–form RMS Value Average or mean

I0 2I 0
Sinusoidal +  0707I
.
0  2 2
0  0637I
. 0
– 

I0 I0
Half wave rectifired 0
 05I
. 0  0318I
. 0
 2 2 

I0 2I 0
Full wave rectifired 0  2 2
 0707I
. 0  0637I
.


Square or Rectangular +
–
I0 I0

I0 I0
Saw Tooth wave 0
 2
3 2

PHASOR DIAGRAMS
 Generally currents and voltages in ac circuits are represented in the form of phasors or anticlockwise
rotating vectors. The length of arrow represents the peak value of the quantity and its projection on x and y
axis gives its instantaneous value.
 For example let I = I 0 sin t, then it will be represented as shown in the figure. Length of arrow is I 0 which
represents the peak value of I. Its projection on y-axis is I0 sin t which represents the instantaneous value.
t is the phase angle which increases with time.
y

IA sin wt
I0

wt
I0 cos wt
x
Note : If the equation of current were in cosine form as I = I0 cos t, then projection on x-axis will represent
the instantaneous value.
 Alternating Current 129
are the instantaneous values of voltage and current,
01 then the rms values of voltage and current are
respectively
1. The rms value of AC which when passed through a
(1) 70.7 V, 70.7 mA (2) 70.7 V, 70.7 A
resistor produces heat, which is twice that produced
by a steady current of 1.414 amp in the same resistor is (3) 141.4 V, 141.4 mA (4) 141.4 V, 141.4 A
(1) 2 A (2) 3.46 A 7. The instantaneous values of current and voltage in an
(3) 2.818 A (4) 1.732 A  
AC circuit are given by I  6sin 100t   ,
2. The rms value of current in 50 Hz AC circuit is 6 A. The  4
average value of AC current over a cycle is  
V  5sin 100t   then
3  4
(1) 6 2 (2) (1) current leads the voltage by 45º
 2
6 (2) voltage leads the current by 90º
(3) Zero (4) (3) current leads the voltage by 90º
 2
3. An alternating current is given by i = i1 cos t + i2 sin (4) voltage leads the current by 45º
t. The rms current is given by 8. The equation of emf in an AC circuit is given by E = 60
i1  i2 | i1  i2 | sin (100t). What is the minimum time taken for the emf
(1) (2) to change from +30 V to –30 V?
2 2
E
i12  i22 i12  i22
(3) (4) +60
2 2 t
4. The instantaneous voltage of a 50 Hz generator giving –60
peal voltage as 300 V. The generator equation for this
voltage is (1) (1/100) s (2) 200 s
(1) V = 50 sin 300t (2) V = 300 sin 100t (3) 100 s (4) (1/200) s
(3) V = 6 sin 100t (4) V = 50 sin 100t 9. If instantaneous current is given by i = 4 cos (t + )
5. The alternating current in a circuit is given by amperes, then the r.m.s. value of current is
I = 50 sin 314 t. The peak value and frequency of the
current are (1) 4 amperes (2) 2 2 amperes
(1) I0 = 25 and f = 100 Hz (2) I0 = 50 and f = 50 Hz (3) 4 2 amperes (4) Zero amperes
(3) I0 = 50 and f = 100 Hz (4) I0 = 25 and f = 50 Hz 10. In an ac circuit, peak value of voltage is 423 volts. Its
effective voltage is
 
6. If E = 100 sin (100 t) volt and I  100sin 100t   mA (1) 400 volts (2) 323 volts
 3
(3) 300 volts (4) 340 volts

AC CIRCUITS
 Basic AC circuit elements are resistors, indicators and capacitor we will discuss the behaviour of each of
them when connected in ac circuits.

7.2 P.No.: 234

 A resistor connected to a source e of ac voltage as shown in the circuit diagram. The symbol for an ac source
on a circuit diagram is . For simplicity, we consider a source which produces sinusoidally varying potential
difference across its terminals. Let this potential difference, also called ac voltage, be given by
V = V0 sin t ...(i)
where V0 is the amplitude of the sinusoidal voltage and  is its angular frequency.
130 Alternating Current

E R

AC voltage applied to a resistor

The instantaneous potential drop across the resistor R is
V0 sin t = IR
V0
or I sin t
R
I = I0 sin t ...(ii)
where I is the instantaneous current and the current amplitude I0 is given by
V V0
I0  0 ...(iii)
R
Equation (iii) is just Ohm’s law which for resistors work I0 V
equally well for both ac and dc voltages. The voltage across I
a pure resistor and the current through it, given by equation
(i) and (ii) are ploted as a function of time in figure. O  2 t
Note, that both V and I reach zero, minimum and maximum
values at the same time. Clearly, the voltage and current are
in phase for a circuit containing pure resistance.
We see that,. like the applied voltage, the current varies sinusoidally and has corresponding positive and
negative values during each cycle. Thus, the sum of the instantaneous current values over one complete
cycle is zero, and the average current is zero. The fact that the average current is zero, however, does not
mean that the average power is zero and that there is no dissipation of electrical energy. As you know, joule
heating is given by I2R and depends on I2 (which is always positive whether I is positive or negative) and not
on I. Thus there is Joule heating and dissipation of electrical energy when an ac current passes through a
resistor.
The instantaneous power dissipated in the resistor is
P  I 2 R  I 02 R sin 2 t ...(iv)
The average value of Power P over a cycle is
 1
P  I 02 R  I rms
2
R ...(v)
2
Where the bar over a letter (here, P) denotes its average value.
To express ac power in the same form as dc power (P = I2R), as special value of current is used. It is called,
root mean square (rms) or effective current and is denoted by Irms.
Similarly, we define the rms voltage or effective voltage
From equation (iii), we have
V0 = I 0R ...(vi)
V0 I0
or  R ...(vii)
2 2
or Vrms = Irms R ...(viii)
In terms of rms values, the equation for power and relation between current and voltage in ac circuits are
essentially the same as those for the dc case.
Alternating Current 131
In fact, the Irms or rms current is the equivalent dc current that would produce same average power loss as
the alternating current. Equation (v) can also be written as
2
Vrms
P (since Vrms = Irms R) ...(ix)
R

A bulb is rated 60 W at 220 V/30 Hz. Find the maximum value of instantaneous current through the filament ?

Vmax  220 2  311 V

2202 220  220 2420

R    806.67 
P 60 2
Vmax 311
I   0.39 A
R 806.67

A light bulb is rated at 200 W for a 220 V supply. Find

(a) The resistance of the bulb
(b) The peak voltage of the source; and
(c) The rms current through the bulb.

(a) We are given P = 100 W and V = 220 V. The resistance of the bulb is
2
Vrms (220 V ) 2
R   242 
P 200 W
(b) The peak voltage of the source is
Vm  2 Vmax  311 V
(c) Since, P = Irms Vrms
P 200 W
I rms    0.90 A
Vrms 220 V

7.3 P.No.: 237

 In the previous section, we saw that the current through a resistor is in phase with the ac voltage. But this is
not so in the case of an inductor, a capacitor or a combination. In order to show phase relationship betwen
voltage and current in an ac circuit, we use the motion of phasors. The analysis of an ac circuit is facilitated
by the use of a phasor diagram. a phasor is a vector which rotates about the origin with angular speed , as
shown in figure. The vertical components of phasors V and I represent the sinusoidally varying quantities V
and I. The magnitudes of phasors V and I represent the amplitudes or the peak values V0 and I0 of these
oscillating quantities. Figure (a) shows the voltage and their relationship at time t1 i.e., corresponding to the
circuit show in figure for the case of an ac source connected to a resistor. The projection of voltage and
current phasors on vertical axis, i.e., V0 sin t and I0 sin t, respectively represent the instaneous value of
voltage and current at that instant. As they rotate with frequency , curves in figure (b) are generated which
132 Alternating Current
represent the sinusoidal variation of voltage and current with time.

7.4 P.No.-237

 An ac source connected to an inductor as shown in the circuit below. Usually, inductors have appreciable
resistance in their windings but we shall assume that this is ideal inductor (having zero resistance). Thus, the
circuit is a purely inductive ac circuit. Let the voltage across the source be V = V0 sin t. Using the loop
equation (t) = 0, and since there is no resistor in the circuit.
...(x)
dI
V L 0
dt

V ~ L

An AC source connected to an inductor

where the second term is the self-induced emf in the inductor, and L is the self-inductance of the coil.
Combining equation (i) and (x), we have
dI V V0
  sin t ...(xi)
dt L L
V0 V0
dI  sin t dt  I  cos(t )
L L
 
Using  cos(t )  sin  t   , we have
 2

V0    
I sin  t    I  I m sin  t   ...(xii)
L  2  2

V0
where I m   is the amplitude of the current. The quantity L is analogous to the resistance and is called
L
inductive reactance, denoted by XL :
X L   L  2 fL ...(xiii)
Alternating Current 133
The dimension of inductive reactance is the same as that of resistance and SI unit is ohm (). The inductive
reactance limits the current in a pure inductive circuit in the same way as does the resistance in a pure
resistive circuit. The inductive resistance is the directly proportional to the inductance frequency of the
voltage source.
A comparision of equation (i) and (ii) for the source voltage and the current in an inductor shows that the
 1
current lags the voltage by or one-quarter   cycle. Figure (a) shows the voltage and the current
2  4

phasors in the present case at instant t. The current phasor I is
behind the voltage phasor V. When rotated
2
with frequency  counter-clockwise, they generate the voltage and current given by equation (1) and (xii),
respectively and as shown in figure (b).

T  / 2 
We see that current reaches its maximum value later than the voltage by one-fourth of a period   .
4  
You have seen that an inductor has reactance that limits current similar to resistance in a dc circuit. Does it
also consume power like a resistance ? Let us try to find out.
The instantaneous power supplied to the inductor is

  IV
PL  IV  I m sin  t  V0 sin(t )   I 0V0 cos(t ).sin(t )   0 0 sin(2t ) ...(xiv)
 2 2
So, the average power over a complete cycle is zero
Since the average of sin (2t) over a complete cycle is zero.
Thus, the average power supplied to an inductor over one complete cycle is zero.
Physically, this result means the following, During the first quarter of each current cycle, the flux through the
inductor builds up and sets up a magnetic field and energy is stored in the inductor. In the next quarter of
cycle, as the current decreases, the flux decreases and the stored energy is returned to the source. Thus, in
each half cycle, the energy which is withdrawn from the source is returned to it without any dissipation of
power.

A pure inductor of 50.0 mH is connected to a source of 220 V. Find the inductive resistance and rms current
in the circuit if the frequency of the source is 50 Hz.
134 Alternating Current

The inductive reactance.

X L  2 ƒ L  2  3.14  50  50  102   15.7 

Vrms 220V
The rms current in the circuit is I rms    14.01 A
X L 15.7

7.5 P.No.-241

 An ac source e connected to a capacitor only, a purely capacitive ac circuit is as shown.

A B

 C

An AC source connected to a capacitor

When the capacitor is connected to an ac source, as in figure, it limits or regulates the current, but does not
completely prevent the flow of charge. The capacitor is alternately charged and discharged as the current
reverses each half cycle. Let q(t) be the charge on the capacitor at any time t. The instantaneous voltage
V(t) across the capacitor is
q (t )
V (t )   q (t )  CV (t )  CV0 sin  t ...(xv)
C
dq
To find the current, we use the relation I 
dt
d
I (V0C sin t )  CV0 cos(t )
dt

 
Using the relation, cos(t )  sin  t   , we have
 2

 
I  I 0 sin  t   ...(xvi)
 2
where the amplitude of the oscillating current is
V0
I0 
( I / C )

V0
Comparing it to I 0  for a purely resistive circuitmm we find that (I / C) plays the role of resistance.
R
It is called capacitive reactance and is denoted by Xc,
1 1
Xc   ...(xvii)
C 2 ƒC
Alternating Current 135
So that the amplitude of the current is
V0
I0  ...(xviii)
Xc
The dimension of capacitive reactance is the same as that of resistance and its SI unit is Ohm (). The
capacitive reactance limits the amplitude of the current in a purely capacitive circuit in the same way as
does the resistance in a purely resistive circuit. But it is inversely proportional to the frequency and the
capacitance.

V
V
I

t t
O t  
I

AS comparision of equation (XVI) with the equation of source voltage equation (i) shows that the current in
a capacitor leads the voltage by /2. Figure shows the phasor diagram at an instant t. here the current phasor
I is (/2) ahead of the voltage phasor V as they rotate counter clockwise. Figure shows the variation of
voltage and current with time. We see that the current reaches its maximum value earlier than the voltage by
one-fourth of a period.
The instantaneous power supplied to the capacitor is
Pc = IV = I0 cos (t) . V0 sin (t)
= I0 V0 cos (t) sin (t)
I 0V0
 sin(2t ) ...(xiv)
2
So, as in the case of an inductor, the average power over a cycle is zero.
Since average of sin 2t over a complete cycle is zero. As discussed in the case of an inductor, the energy
stored by a capacitor in each quarter period is returned to the source in the next quarter period.
Thus, we see that in the case of an inductor, the current lags the voltage by 90° and in the case of a capacitor,
the current leads the voltage by 90°.

30.0 µF capacitor is connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz source. Find the capacitive resistance and the current (rms
and peak) in the circuit. If the frequency is doubled, what happens to the capacitive reactance and the
current.

The capacitive reactance is

1
Xc   106 
2 fC
The rms current is
 136 Alternating Current

Vrms
irms   2.08A
Xc
The peak current is
I 0  2 I rms  2.96 A
This current oscillates betwen 2.96A and – 2.96A and is ahead of the voltage by 90°.
If the frequency is doubled, the capacitive reactance is halved and consequently, the current is doubled.

7.6 P.No.-244

 Figure shows a series LCR circuit connected to an ac source . As usual, we take the voltage of the source
to be V = V0 sin t.
R

e C

An series LCR circuit connected

to an ac source
If q is the charge on the capacitor and I the current, at time t, we have, from Kirchhoff’s loop rule :
dI q
L  IR   V ...(xx)
dt C
We want to determine the instantaneous current I and its phase relationship to the applied alternating
voltage V. We shall use the technique of phasors to solve equation (xx) to obtain the time - dependence of I.

Combination of Components (R-L or R-C or L-C)

TERM R-L R-C L-C

R L R L
C C
Circuit

I is same in R and L I is same in R and C I is same in L and C

VR
VL I VL
V I
Phasor diagram I
VC VC
VR
V 2  VR2  VL2 V 2  VR2  VC2 V = VL – VC (VL > VC)
V = VC – VL (VC > VL)
Alternating Current 137

       
Phase difference V leads I    0 to  V lags I     to 0  V lags I     if X C  X L 
 2  2   2 
in between V & I Z  R 2  X L2 Z  R 2  X C2 Z | X L  X C |

  
Impedance     , if X L  X C 
 2 
Variation of Z with f as f, Z as f ,   as f , Z first then
Z Z Z

R R
f f f
At very low f Z  R ( X L  0) Z  XC Z  XC
At very high f Z  XL Z  R ( X C  0) Z  XL

Calculate the impedance of the circuit shown in the figure. 40 

30 

Z  R 2  ( X c ) 2  (30)2  (40) 2  2500  50 

If XL = 50  and XC = 40 . Calculate effective value of current in given circuit.

XL = 50  XC = 40 
Z = XL – XC = 10 
V0 40 4
I0    4 A  I rms  2 2A
Z 10 2 V = 40 sin 100 volt

In given circuit calculate, voltage across inductor VR = 60 VL = ?

 V 2  VR2  VL2  VL2  V 2  VR2

VL  V 2  VR2  (100) 2  (60)2  6400  80 V V = 100 2 sin t volt

 138 Alternating Current

In given circuit find out : (i) impedance of circuit (ii) current in circuit 6 8

(i) Z  R 2  X C2  (6) 2  (8) 2  10 

(ii) V0 20 2
V  IZ  I    2 A. So I m   2A V = 20 sin  t volt
Z 10 2

When 10 V, dc is applied across a coil current through it is 2.5 A, if 10 V, 50 Hz A.C. is applied current
reduces to 2 A. Calculate reactance of the coil.

10
For 10 V D.C.  V = IR  Resistance of coil R   4 .
2.5
V 20
For 10 V A.C.  V = IZ  Z   5
I 10

 Z  R 2  X L2  5  R 2  X L2  25  X L2  52  42  X L  3 

When an alternating voltage of 220 V is applied across a device X, a current of 0.5 A flows through the
circuit and is in phase with the applied voltage. When the same voltage is applied across another device Y,
the same current again flows through the circuit but it leads the applied voltage by /2 radians.
(a) Name the devices X and Y.
(b) Calculate the current flowing in the circuit when same voltage is applied across the series
combination of X and Y.

(a) X is resistor and Y is a capacitor

(b) Since the current in the two devices is the same (0.5 A at 220 volt)
When R and C are in series across the same voltage then
220 Vrms 220 220
R  XC   440   I rms     0.35 A
0.5 2
R  XC2 2
(440)  (440) 2
440 2

L C R
INDUCTANCE, CAPACITANCE AND RESISTANCE IN SERIES
 (L-C-R series circuit)
A circuit containing a series combination of an resistance R, a coil of
inductance L and a capacitor of capacitance C, connected with a source
of alternating e.m.f. of peak value of E0, as shown in figure. A.C. source
 Phasor Diagram For Series L-C-R circuit
Let in series LCR circuit applied alternating emf is E = E0 sin t
Alternating Current 139
E = E0 sin t.
As L, C and R are joined in series, therefore, current at any instant through the three elements has the same
amplitude and phase.
 However voltage across each element bears a different phase relationship with the current.
Let at any instant of time t the current in the circuit is I
Y
Let at this time t the potential differences across L, C, and R
VL Q
VL = I XL, VC = I XC and VR = I R
Now, VR is in phase with current I but VL leads I by 90°
While VC legs behind I by 90°.
The vector OP represents VR (which is in phase with I) the vector
O X
OQ represent VL (which leads I by 90°) VR P
and the vector OS represents VC (which legs behind I by 90°) VC S
VL and VC are opposite to each other.
If VL > VC (as shown in figure) the their resultant will be (VL – VC)
Y
which is represented by OT.
VL Q
Finally, the vector OK represents the resultant of VR and (VL – VC), T
that is, the resultant of all the three = applied e.m.f. K
)
mf

(VL – VC)
e
2 2 2 2 E lied
Thus E  V  (VL  VC )  I R  ( X L  X C )  I  pp
R
R 2  ( X L  X C )2 (a
E

2 O X
2 2  2 1  VR P
Impedance Z  R  ( X L  X C )  R    L 
 C 
VC
The phasor diagram also shown that in LCR circuit the applied e.m.f.
XL  XC
leads the current I by a phase angle  where tan  
R
SERIES LCR AND PARALLEL LCR COMBINATION
Series L-C-R circuit Parallel L-C-R circuit
 Circuit diagram

R
L C
R L
C

I same for R, L & C V same for R, L & C

 Phasor diagram
VL IC
I V
VR IR
VC IL

1. If VL > VC then 2. If IC > IL then

140 Alternating Current

VL – VC I IC – IL V
VR IR
2. If VC > VL then 2. If IL > IC then

VC – VL VR I IL – IC IR V

3. V  VR2  (VL  VC )2 3. I  I R2  ( I L  I C ) 2

Impedance Z  R 2  ( X L  X C ) 2 Admittance Y  G 2  ( S L  SC ) 2

X L  X C VL  VC S L  SC I L  I C
tan    tan   
R VR G IR
4. Impedance triangle 4. Admittance triangle

 G
Z
X = XL – XC SL – SC
 Y
R

SERIES PARALLEL
(i) (a) If XL > XC then V leads I,  (positive) (a) If SL > SC (XL < XC), then V leads I,  (positive)
circuit nature inductive circuit nature inductive
(b) If XC > XL then V lags I,  (negative) (b) If SC > SL (XC < XL), then V lags I,  (negative)
circuit nature capacitive circuit nature capacitive
(ii) In A.C. circuit voltage for L or C may be greater than source voltage or current but it happens only
when circuit contains L and C both and on R, it is never greater than source voltage or current.
(iii) In parallel A.C. circuit phase difference between IL and IC is .

Find out the impedance of given circuit.

4 9 6

Z  R 2  ( X L  X C )2  42  (9  6)2  42  32  25  5 
( XL > XC  Inductive)

Find out impedance of given circuit. 3

2
6
2 2 1 1 12
Y  G  ( S L  SC )    6
36  6 3 

2 6
Y   Z  (capacitive, because XL > XC)
6 2
Alternating Current 141

Find out reading of A C ammeter and also calculate the potential difference across resistance and capacitor.

V0 100 10 20 10

Z  R 2  ( X L  X C ) 2  10 2   I 0    A 10
Z 10 2 2
10 A
 ammeter reads RMS value, so its reading  2 2  5 A

So VR = 5 × 10 = 50 V and VC = 5 × 10 = 50 V E = 100 sin wt 100 pt volt

In LCR circuit with an AC source R = 300 , C = 20 µF, L = 1.0 H, Erms = 50 V and ƒ = 50/ Hz. Find RMS
current in the circuit.

Erms Erms 50
I rms   
Z  1 
2
 50 1 
2

R 2   L  3002   2   1 
 C   50 
20  106  2  

  

 50 50 1
I rms     0.1 A
 103 
2
100 9  16 10
(300) 2  100 
 2 

Calculate impedance of the given circuit :

5V 12 V
240 
Z 120
(i) (ii) I = 2A

Z=?

0.2F 1H 3

(iii)
V = 100 sin t volt

(i) It is parallel circuit so Y is evaluated

1 1 1
Y  S L  SC     Z = 240  (inductive)
120 240 240
 142 Alternating Current

Vs 13
(ii) Vs2 = 625 + 144 = 169  Vs = 13 volt therefore Z    6.5 
I 2
(iii) R = 3 , XL = L = 1 as ( = 1)
1 1
XC   5 So, Z2 = R2 + (XL – XC)2 = 32 + (1 – 5)2 = 25  Z = 5 
C (0.2) 1

02 (4) glows more brightly

16. A capacitor of capacitance 10 µF is connected to an
11. For a given frequency, the inductive reactance of a AC source and an AC ammeter. If the source voltage
coil at 100 H is 25 . For the same frequency, the varies as V = 50 2 sin 100 t, the reading of the ammeter
inductive reactance at 200 H will be is
(1) 25  (2) 50  (1) 50 mA (2) 70.7 mA
(3) 100  (4) Zero (3) 5.0 mA (4) 7.07 mA
12. In the case of an inductor,
(1) voltage lags the current by /2 17. An alternating emf e = 220 2 sin 100 t V is applied to
(2) voltage leads the current by /2 a capacitor of 1 µF. The current flowing through the
capacitor is
(3) voltage leads the current by /3
(4) voltage leads the current by /4 (1) 22 mA (2) 12 mA
13. If an alternating voltage V = V0 sin t is applied across (3) 32 mA (4) 42 mA
an inductance L, the current through the inductance 18. A capacitor of capacity C has reactance X. If the
will be capacitance and frequency become d ouble, then
reactance will be
 
(1) I = I0 sin t (2) I  I 0 sin  t   (1) 4X (2) X/2
 2
(3) X/4 (4) 2X
 
(3) I  I 0 sin  t   (4) I = I0 sin (t + ) 19. A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 283 V and angular
 2
frequency 320/s is applied to a series LCR circuit.
14. A pure inductance coil of 30 mH is connected to an AC
Given that R = 5 , L = 25 mH and C = 100 µF. The total
source of 220 V. The rms current in the coil is
impedance, and phase difference between the voltage
(1) 50.35 A (2) 23.4 A across the source and the current will respectively be
(3) 30.5 A (4) 12.3 A
15. In the A.C. circuit shown, keeping ‘K’ pressed, if an 5 8
(1) 10  and tan–1   (2) 10  and tan–1  
iron rod is inserted into the coil, the bulb in the circuit 3 3
Rod 5
Bulb Coil (3) 7  and tan–1   (4) 7  and 45º
3
20. A 50 Hz AC signal is applied in a circuit of inductance
K of (1/) H and resistance 2100 ohm. The impedance
A.C.
(1) gets damaged offered by the circuit is
(2) glows less brightly (1) 1500 ohm (2) 1700 ohm
(3) glows with same brightness (as before the rod is (3) 2102 ohm (4) 2500 ohm
inserted)

7.6.3 P.No.: 248

 A circuit is said to be resonant when the natural frequency of circuit is equal to frequency of the applied
voltage. For resonance both L and C must be present in circuit.
 There are two types of resonance :
1. Series Resonance 2. Parallel Resonance
Alternating Current 143
SERIES RESONANCE
 At Resonance
1. XL = XC 2. VL = VC 3.  = 0 (V and I in same phase)
V
4. Zmin = R (impedance minimum) 5. Imax = (current maximum)
R
 Resonance frequency
1 1 1 1
 X L  X C  r L   r2   r   ƒr 
r C LC LC 2 LC
 Variation of Z with ƒ
1. If ƒ < ƒr, then XL < XC ; circuit nature capacitive, ƒ (negative)
2. At ƒ = ƒr, then XL = XC ; circuit nature Resistive, ƒ = zero
Z
3. If ƒ > ƒr, then XL > XC ; circuit nature is inductive, ƒ (positive)
Variation of I with ƒ as ƒ increase, Z first decreases then increase R
fr f
Imax

Imax
2 Imax = V
R
 I as ƒ increase, I first increase then decreases
ƒ

f1 fr f2 f
At resonance impedance of the series resonant circuit is minimum so it is called 'acceptor circuit' as it most
readily accepts that current out of many currents whose frequency is equal to its natural frequency. In radio
or TV tuning we receive the desired station by making the frequency of the circuit equal to that of the desired
station.

 Half power frequencies

The frequencies at which, power become half of its maximum value called half power frequencies
 Band width = ƒ = ƒ2 – ƒ1
 Quality factor Q : Q-factor of AC circuit basically gives an idea about stored energy & lost energy.
maximum energy stored per cycle
Q  2
maximum energy lost per cycle
1. It represents the sharpness of resonance.
2. It is unit less and dimension less quantity
I
( X L ) r ( X C ) r 2 ƒ r L 1 L ƒ r ƒr R1
3. Q      
R R R R C  ƒ band width

 Magnification R1 < R2 < R3

At resonance VL or VC = QE (where E = supplied voltage) R2
So at resonance Magnification factor = Q-factor
 Sharpness
Sharpness  Quality factor  Magnification factor R3
R decrease  Q increases  Sharpness increases ƒr ƒ
144 Alternating Current
PARALLEL RESONANCE
 At resonance
1. SL = SC 2. IL = IC C
3.  = 0 4. Zmax = R (impedance maximum)
V L R
5. Imin = (current minimum)
R
1
 Resonant frequency : ƒ r 
2 LC
 Variation of Z with ƒ as ƒ increases, Z first increases then decreases

Z I

V
I min 
R

ƒr ƒr ƒ

1. If ƒ < ƒr, then SL > SC, ƒ (positive), circuit nature is inductive

2. If ƒ > ƒr, then SC > SL, ƒ (negative), circuit nature capacitive.
 Variation of I with ƒ as ƒ increases, I first decreases then increases

1 1 R2 L 1 R2
Note : For this circuit ƒ r   2  Z max  For resonance  2
2 LC L RC LC L

1. Series resonance circuit gives voltage amplificaltion while parallel resonance circuit gives current am-
plification.
2. At resonance current does not depend on L and C, it depends only on R and V.
3. At half power frequencies : net reactance = net resistance.
4. As R increases, bandwidth increases
5. To obtain resonance in a circuit following parameter can be altered :
(i) L (ii) C (iii) frequency of source.
6. Two series LCR circuit of same resonance frequency ƒ are joined in series then resonance frequency of
series combination is also ƒ.
7. The series resonance circuit called acceptor whereas parallel resonance circuit called rejector circuit.
8. Unit of LC is second

For what frequency the voltage across the resistance R will be maximum. 1 1
F 
 
R
It happens at resonance
1 1
f    500 Hz
2 LC 1 1
2  106 
 
Alternating Current 145

A capacitor, a resistor and a 40 mH inductor are connected in series to an AC R = 220 

source of frequency 60Hz, calculate the capacitance of the capacitor, if the
current is in phase with the voltage. Also calculate the value of X and I. V1 V2 V3
300 V 300 V XV
I
At resonance

1 1 1 1 110 V, 60 Hz
L  ,C  2  2 2  2  176  F
C  L 4 ƒ L 4  (60)  40  103
2

V 110
V  VR  X  110 V and I   0.5 A
R 220

A coil, a capacitor and an A.C. source of rms voltage 24 V are connected in series. By varying the frequency
of the source, a maximum rms current 6 A is observed, If this coil is connected to a bettery of emf 12 V, and
internal resistance 4 , then calculate the current through the coil.

V V 24
At resonance current is maximum. I   Resistance of coil R   4
R I 6
E 12
When coil is connected to battery, suppose I current flow through it then I    1.5 A
Rr 44

Radio receiver receives a message at 300 m band. If the available inductance is 1 mH, then calculate
required capacitance.

Radio receives EM waves. (velocity of EM waves c = 3 × 108 m/s)

3  108 1 1
 c = ƒ  ƒ   106 Hz. Now ƒ   1 106  C  2  25 pF
300 2 LC 4 L  1011

C
In a L–C circuit parallel combination of inductance of 0.01 H and a
capacitor of 1 µF is connected to a variable frequency alternating
current source as shown in figure. Draw a rough sketch of the current A L
variation as the frequency is changed from 1 kHz to 3 kHz.
I
L and C are connected in parallel to the AC source,
1 1 104
So resonance frequency f     1.6 kHz
2 LC 2 0.01  106 2 1.6 kHz f
 146 Alternating Current
In case of parallel resonance, current in L–C circuit at resonance is zero.
So the I-ƒ curve will be as shown in figure.

7.7 P.No.-252
 The average power dissipation in LCR ac circuit
Let V = V0 sin t and I = I0 sin (t – )
Instantaneous power P = (V0 sin t) (I0 sin (t – ) = V0I0 sin t (sin t cos  – sin  cos t)
T
1 2
Average power < P > =  (V0 I 0 sin t cos   V0 I 0 sin t cos t sin )dt
T0
1 T 2 1
T
 1 
 V0 I 0   sin t cos  dt   sin t cos t sin  dt   V0 I 0  cos   0  sin  
T 0 T0  2 
V0 I 0 cos 
 P  Vrms I rms cos 
2
Instantaneous Average power/actual power/ Virtual power/ apparent Peak power
power dissipated power/power loss Power/rms Power
P = VI P = Vrms Irms cos  P = Vrms Irms
P = V0 I 0
1. Irms cos  is known as active part of current or wattfull current, workfull current. It is in phase with
voltage.
2. Irms sin  is known as inactive part of current, wattless current, workless current. It is in quadrature
(90°) with voltage.

POWER FACTOR :
 Average power P  Erms I rms cos   rms power × cos 

Average power R
Power factor (cos ) = and cos  
rms Power Z
Power factor : (i) is leading if I leads V (ii) is lagging if I lags V

1. Pav  Prms .
2. Power factor varies from 0 to 1
Pure / Power factor
 V Average
Ideal Power = cos 
R 0 V , I same Phase 1 (max.) Vrms. Irms

L  V leads I 0 0
2
3. 
C  V lags I 0 0
2

Choke coil – V leads I 0 0
2
4. At resonance power factor is maximum ( = 0 so cos  = 1) and Pav = Vrms Irms
Alternating Current 147

1
A voltage of 10 V and frequency 103 Hz is applied to µF capacitor in series with a resistor of 500 . Find

the power factor of the circuit and the power dissipated.

1 1
 XC    5000   Z  R 2  X C2  (500) 2  (500) 2  500 2 
2 ƒC 3 106
2  10 

R 500 1 (10)2 1 1
Power factor cos     , Power dissipated  Vrms I rms cos     W
Z 500 2 2 500 2 2 10

 
If V = 100 sin 100 t volt and I = 100 sin 100t   mA for an A.C. circuit then find out
 3
(a) phase difference between V and I (b) total impedance, reactance, resistance
(c) power factor and power dissipated (d) components contains by circuits


(a) Phase difference    (I leads V)
3
V0 100 1
(b) Total impedance Z   3
 1 k  Now resistance R  Z cos 60  1000   500 
I 0 100  10 2

3 500 R
reactance X  Z sin 60  1000    60°
2 3 X
(c)  = – 60°  Power factor = cos  = cos (– 60°) = 0.5 (leading) Z
100 0.1 1
Power dissipated P  Vrms I rms cos      2.5 W
2 2 2

(d) Circuit must contains R as   and as  is negative so C must be their, (L may exist but XC > XL)
2

1
If power factor of a R-L series circuit is when applied voltage is V = 100 sin 100 t volt and resistance of
2
circuit is 200 , then calculate the inductance of the circuit.

R 1 R
cos      Z  2 R  R 2  X L2  2 R  X L  3R
Z 2 Z
3R 3  200 2 3
 L  3R  L    H
 100 
 148 Alternating Current

A circuit consisting of an inductance and a resistance joined to a 200 volt supply (A.C.). It draws a current
of 10 ampere. If the power used in the circuit is 1500 watt. Calculate the wattless current.

Apparent power = 200 × 10 = 2000 W

True power 1500 3
 Power factor cos    
Apparent power 2000 4
2
 3  10 7
Wattless current  I rms sin   10 1     A
4 4

A coil has a power factor of 0.866 at 60 Hz. What will be power factor at 180 Hz.

Given that cos  = 0.866,  = 2ƒ = 2 × 60 = 120 rad/s,  '  2 ƒ '  2  180  360  rad/s
R
Now, cos    R  Z cos   0.866 Z
Z
But Z  R 2  ( L)2   L  Z 2  R 2  Z 2  (0.866 Z )2  0.5 Z
0.5 Z 0.5 Z
 L 
 120 
When the frequency is changed to  '  2  180  3  120  300 rad/s, then
inductive reactance  ' L  3 L  3  0.5Z  1.5
 New impedance Z '  [ R ' ( ' L) 2 ]  (0.866 Z )2  (1.5 Z )2  Z [(0.866) 2  (1.5) 2 ]  1.732 Z

R 0.866 Z
 New power factor    0.5
Z ' 1.732 Z
CHOKE COIL
 In a direct current circuit, current is reduced with the help of a tube light rod
resistance.
 Hence there is a loss of electrical energy I 2R per sec in the form
of heat in the resistance. But in an AC circuit the current can be
reduced by choke coil which involves very small amount of loss
of energy. Choke coil is a copper coil wound over a soft iron choke coil
laminated core. This coil is put in series with the circuit in which
current is to be reduced. It is also known as ballast.
 Circuit with a choke coil is a series L-R circuit. If resistance of choke coil = r (very small)

E
The current in the circuit I  with Z  ( R  r )2  ( L)2 . So due to large inductance L of the coil, the
Z
current in the circuit is decreased appreciably. However, due to small resistance of the coil r,
 The power loss in the choke
Alternating Current 149

r r r
Pav = Vrms Irms cos  0  cos     0
Z 2 2 2
r  L  L

1. Choke coil is a high inductance and negligible resistance coil.

2. Choke coil is used to control current in A.C. circuit at negligible power loss
3. Choke coil used only in A.C. and not in D.C. circuit
4. Choke coil is based on the principle of wattless current.
5. Iron cored choke coil is used generally at low frequency and air cored at high frequency.
6. Resistance of ideal choke coil is zero

A choke coil and a resistance are connected in series in an a.c circuit and a potential of 130 volt is applied to
the circuit. If the potential across the resistance is 50 V. What would be the potential difference across the
choke coil.

V  VR2  VL2  VL  V 2  VR2  (130) 2  (50) 2  120 V

An electric lamp which runs at 80V DC consumes 10 A current. The lamp is connected to 100 V – 50 Hz ac
source compute the inductance of the choke required.

V 80
Resistance of lamp R   8
I 10
Let Z be the impedance which would maintain a current of 10 A through the Lamp when it is run on
V 100
100 Volt a.c. then. Z    10  but Z  R 2  ( L)2
I 10
6 6
 (L)2 = Z2 – R2 = (10)2 – (8)2 = 36  L = 6  L    0.02 H
 2  50

Calculate the resistance or inductance required to operate a lamp (60 V, 10 W) from a source of (100 V,
50 Hz)

(a) Maximum voltage across lamp = 60V R

 VLamp + VR = 100  VR = 40 V

Wattage 10 1
Now current througth Lamp is    A
voltage 60 6 100 V, 50 Hz
 150 Alternating Current

1
But VR  IR  40  ( R)  R  240 
6 L

(b) Now i n this case ( VLamp)2 + (VL)2 = (V)2

(60)2 + (VL)2 = (100)2  VL = 80 V
100V, 50Hz
Also VL = IXL = XL , so XL = 80 × 6 = 480  = L (2ƒ)  L = 1.5 H
A capacitor of suitable capacitance replace a choke coil in an AC circuit, the average power con-
sumed in a capacitor is also zero. Hence, like a choke coil, a capacitor can reduce current in AC circuit
without power dissipation.
Cost of capacitor is much more than the cost of inductance of same reactance that's why choke coil is
used.

A choke coil of resistance R and inductance L is connected in series with a capacitor C and complete
combination is connected to a.c. voltage, Circuit resonates when angular frequency of supply is  = 0.
(a) Find out relation betwen 0, L and C
(b) What is phase difference between V and I at resonance, L, R C
does it change when resistance of choke coil is zero?

1 1
(a) At resonance condition X L  X C  0 L   0  V = V0 sin (volt)
0C LC
R R
(b)  cos     1    0 , No, It is always zero.
Z R

03 25. In series LCR circuit R = 18  and impedance is 33 .

An rms voltage 220 V is applied across the circuit. The
true power consumed in a.c. circuit is
21. A series LCR circuit is connected to an AC source and
is showing resonance. Then (1) 220 W (2) 400 W
(1) VR = 0 (2) VL = VR (3) 600 W (4) 800 W
(3) VC = VR (4) VL = VC 26. In an LCR circuit, at resonance, the power dissipated
across L or C is
22. The resonant frequency of a LCR circuit depends upon
(1) the maximum
(1) L and R (2) C and R
(2) the minimum
(3) L and C (4) L, C and R
(3) equal that across R
23. What is the resonance frequency of a driven LCR
oscillator? (4) greater than that across R
27. The self inductance of the motor of an electric fan is 10
1 1
(1) (2) H. In order to impart maximum power at 50 Hz, it should
LC 2LC be connected to a capacitance of
(3) (LC) –1/2 (4) (2LC)–1/2
(1) 1 µF (2) 2 µF
24. An LCR series circuit is under resonance. If Im is current
(3) 4 µF (4) 8 µF
amplitude, Vm is voltage amplitude, R is the resistance,
28. A series RLC circuit, driven with E rms = 120 V at
Z is the impedance, XL is the inductive reactance and
frequency 50 Hz, contains an inductance with XL = 100
XC is the capacitive reactance, then
, a capacitance with X C = 110  and an unknown
Vm resistance R. For what value of R, the power factor is
(1) Im = VmZ (2) I m 
XL 0.9?
Vm Vm (1) 20  (2) 42 
(3) Im  (4) Im 
XC R (3) 59  (4) 110 
 Alternating Current 151
29. A resistor of 500 , an inductance of 0.5 H are in series 30. If E0 is the peak emf, I0 is the peak current and  is the
with AC which is given by V  100 2 sin(1000t ) . The phase difference between them, then the average power
power factor of the combination is dissipation in the circuit is
1 E0 I 0
1 1 (1) E0 I 0 (2)
(1) (2) 2 2
2 3
1 1
(3) 0.5 (4) 0.6 (3) E0 I 0 sin  (4) E0 I 0 cos 
2 2

7.8 P.No.-255

 The oscillation of energy between capacitor (electric field energy) and inductor (magnetic field energy) is
called LC Oscillation.
I

C L t

UNDAMPED OSCILLATION
 When the circuit has no resistance, the energy taken once from the source and given to capacitor keeps on
oscillating between C and L then the oscillation produced will be of constant amplitude. These are called
undamped oscillation.
After switch is closed
Q di Q d 2Q d 2Q 1
 L 0  L 2 0 2  Q0
C dt C dt dt LC
d2x 
By comparing with standard equation of free oscillation  2   2 x  0 
 dt 
1 1
2  Frequency of oscillation ƒ 
LC 2 LC
Charge varies sinusoidally with time q = qm cos t
dq  
Current also varies periodically with I   qm cos  t  
dt  2
1 qm2
If initial charge on capacitor is qm then electrical energy strored in capacitor is U E 
2 C
At t = 0 switch is closed, capacitor is starts to discharge.
As the capacitor is fully discharged, the total electrical energy is stored in the inductor in the form of mag-
netic energy.
1
U B  LI m2 where Im = max. current
2
1 qm2 1 2
(Umax)EPE = (Umax)MPE   LI m
2 C 2

DAMPED OSCILLATION
 Practically, a circuit can not be entirely resistanceless, so some part of energy is lost in resistance and
amplitude of oscillation goes on decreasing. These are called damped oscillation.
152 Alternating Current
R L

1 R2
Angular frequency of oscillation    2
LC 4 L I

1 1 R2
Frequency of oscillation ƒ   2
2 LC 4 L t
1 R2
Oscillation to be real if  2 0
LC 4 L
1 R2
Hence for oscilation to be real  2
LC 4 L

1. In damped oscillation amplitude of oscillation decreases exponentially with time.

T 3T 5T
2. At t  , , , ..... energy stored is completely magnetic.
4 4 4
T 3T 5T
3. At t  , , , ..... energy is shared equally between L and C
8 8 8
  when charge is maximumum, current minimum 
4. Phase difference between charge and current is
2  when charge is minimum , current maximum 

An LC circuit contains a 20 mH inductor and a 50 µF capacitor with an initial charge of 10 mC. The
resistance of the circuit is negligible. Let the instant the circuit is closed to be t = 0.
(a) What is the total energy stored initially.
(b) What is the natural frequency of the circuit.
(c) At what time is the energy stored is completely magnetic.
(d) At what times is the total energy shared equally between inductor and the capacitor.

1 q 2 1 (10  103 ) 2
(a) UE     1.0 J
2 C 2 50  106
1 1
(b)    103 rad/sec  ƒ  159 Hz
3
LC 20  10  50
(c)  q = q0 cos t
Energy stored is completely magnetic (i.e. electrical energy is zero, q = 0)
T 3T 5 T 1
at t , , , ..... where T   6.3 ms
4 4 4 ƒ
Alternating Current 153

q0
(d) Energy is shared equally between L and C when charge on capacitor become
2

T 3T 5T
So, at t  , , , .... energy is shared equally between L and C
8 8 8

EDDY CURRENT
When a changing magnetic flux is applied to a bulk piece of conducting material then circulating currents
called eddy currents are induced in the material. Because the resistance of the bulk conductor is usually low,
eddy currents often have large magnitudes and heat up the conductor.
 These are circulating currents like eddies in water.
 Experimental concept given by Focault hence also named as “Focault current”.
 The production of eddy currents in a metallic block leads to the loss of electric energy in the form of heat.
 By Lamination, slotting processes the resistance path for circulation of eddy current increases, resulting in to
weakening them and also reducing losses causes by them

Cause excessive electro Gradual damping

Plane metal Slotted metal
plate plate B Feeble eddy currents

× × Strong eddy
×
× × × currents
× × × ×
×
× ×
× × ×
× ×

(A) Strong eddies produced (B) Feeble eddies (C) Solid metallic core (D) Laminated core

 Application of eddy currents : Though most of the times eddy currents are undesirable but they find some
useful applications as enumerated below
1. Dead-beat galvanometer : A dead beat galvanometer means one whose pointer comes to rest in the
final equilibrium position immediately without any oscillation about the equilibrium position when a current
is passed in its coil.
This is achieved by winding the coil on a metallic frame, the large eddy currents induced in the frame
provide electromagnetic damping.
2. Electric-brakes : When the train is running its wheel is moving in air and when the train is to be stopped
by electric breaks the wheel is made to move in a field created by electromagnet. Eddy currents induced
in the wheels due to the changing flux oppose the cause and stop the train.
3. Induction furnace : Joule's heat causes the melting of a metal piece placed in a rapidly changing magnetic
field.
4. Speedometer : In the speedometer of an automobile, a magnet is geared to the main shaft of the vehicle
and it rotates according to the speed of the vehicle. The magnet is mounted in an aluminium cylinder with
the help of hair springs. When the magnet rotates, it produces eddy currents in the drum and drags it
through an angle, which indicates the speed of the vehicle on a calibrated scale.
5. Energy meter : In energy meters, the armature coil carries a metallic aluminium disc which rotates
between the poles of a pair of permanent horse shoe magnets. As the armature rotates, the current
induced in the disc tends to oppose the motion of the armature coil. Due to this braking effect, deflection
is proportional to the energy consumed.
154 Alternating Current
AC GENERATOR / ALTERNATOR / DYNAMO
An electrical machine used to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy is known as ac generator/
alternator.
 Principle : It works on the principle of electromagnetic induction i.e., when a coil is rotated in uniform
magnetic field, an induced emf is produced in it.
 Construction : The main components of ac generator are
B C
1. Armature : Armature coil (ABCD) consists of large
number of turns of insulated copper wire wound over a
soft iron core.
2. Strong field magnet : A strong permanent magnet or an
electromagnet whose poles (N and S) are cylindrical in N A D S
shape in a field magnet. The armature coil rotates between
B1
the pole pieces of the field magnet. The uniform magnetic
R1
field provided by the field magnet is perpendicular to the
axis of rotation of the coil. RL Output

3. Slip rings : The two ends of the armature coil are R2

connected to two brass slip rings R1 and R2. These rings B2
rotate along with the armature coil.
4. Brushes : Two carbon brushes (B1 and B2), are pressed against the slip rings. The brushes are fixed
while slip rings rotate along with the armature. These brushes are connected to the load through which the
output is obtained.
 Working : When the armature coil ABCD rotates in the magnetic field provided by the strong field magnet,
it cuts the magnetic lines of force. Thus the magnetic flux linked with the coil changes and hence induced
emf is set up in the coil. The direction of the induced emf or the current in the coil is determined by the
Fleming’s right hand rule.
The current flows out through the brush B1 in one direction of half of the revolution and through the brush B2
in the next half revolution in the reverse direction. This process is repeated. Therefore, emf produced is of
alternating nature.
Nd
e  NBA sin t  e0 sin t where e0 = NBA 
dt
e e
i   0 sin t  i0 sin t R  Resistance of the circuit
R R

7.9 TRANSFORMERS P.No.: 259

It is a device which raises or lowers the voltage in ac circuits through mutual induction.
It consists of two coils wound on the same core. The alternating current passing through the primary creates a
continuously changing flux through the core. This changing flux induces an alternating emf in the secondary.
Laminated sheets
Loa d

Source ~ Input Output

Iron core
Alternating Current 155
 Transformer works on ac only and never on dc.
 It can increase or decrease either voltage or current but not both simultaneously.
 Transformer does not change the frequency of input ac.
 There is no electrical connection between the winding but they are linked magnetically.
 Effective resistance between primary and secondary winding is infinite.
dS d
 The flux per turn of each coil must be same i.e. S  P ;   P.
dt dt
 If NP = number of turns in primary, NS = number of turns in secondary, VP = applied (input) voltage to
primary, VS = Voltage across secondary (load voltage or output), eP = induced emf in primary ; eS = induced
emf in secondary,  = flux linked with primary as well as secondary, iP = current in primary; iS = current in
secondary (or load current)
As in an ideal transformer there is no loss of power i.e. Pout  Pin so VS iS  VPiP and VP  eP . VS  eS .
es N s Vs iP
Hence     k ; k  Transformation ratio (or turn ratio)
eP N P VP iS
TYPES OF TRANSFORMER

Step up transformer Step down transformer

It increases voltage and It decreases voltage and

d ecreases current increases current

P S P S

VS > VP VS < V P

NS > NP NS < NP

ES > EP ES < EP

i S < iP iS > iP

RS > RP RS < RP

t S > tP tS > tP
k >1 k<1

 Efficiency of transformer ( ) : Efficiency is defined as the ratio of output power and input power i.e.
Pout Vi
%  100  S S 100
Pin VPiP
For an ideal transformer Pout = Pin so   100% (But efficiency of practical transformer lies between 70% – 90%)
For practical transformer Pin  Pout  Plosses

So   Pout 100  Pout (P  P )

100  in L 100
Pin ( Pout  PL ) Pin
 156 Alternating Current
 Losses in transformer : In transformers some power is always lost due to, heating effect, flux leakage
eddy currents, hysteresis and humming.
1. Cu loss (i2R) : When current flows through the transformer windings some power is wasted in the form
of heat ( H  i 2 Rt ). To minimize this loss windings are made of thick Cu wires (To reduce resistance)
2. Eddy current loss : Some electrical power is wasted in the form of heat due to eddy currents, induced
in core, to minimize this loss transformers core are laminated and silicon is added to the core material as
it increases the resistivity. The material of the core is then called silicon-iron (steel).
3. Hystersis loss : The alternating current flowing through the coils magnetises and demagnetises the iron
core again and again. Therefore, during each cycle of magnetisation, some energy is lost due to hysteresis.
However, the loss of energy can be minimised by selecting the material of core, which has a narrow
hysterisis loop. Therefore core of transformer is made of soft iron. Now a days it is made of “Permalloy”
(Fe-22%, Ni-78%).
4. Magnetic flux leakage : Magnetic flux produced in the primary winding is not completely linked with
secondary because few magnetic lines of force complete their path in air only. To minimize this loss
secondary winding is kept inside the primary winding.
5. Humming losses : Due to the passage of alternating current, the core of the transformer starts vibrating
and produces humming sound. Thus, some part (may be very small) of the electrical energy is wasted in
the form of humming sounds produced by the vibrating core of the transformer.
 Uses of transformer : A transformer is used in almost all ac operations e.g.
1. In voltage regulators for TV, refrigerator, computer, air conditioner etc.
2. In the induction furnaces.
3. Step down transformer is used for welding purposes.
4. In the transmission of ac over long distance.
Transmission lines

Low Low House or

G High V High V V Load factory
V

Power Step up Step down

Station transformer
transformer
5. Fig.in
Step down and step up transformers are used 23.27
electrical power distribution.
6. Audio frequency transformers are used in radiography, television, radio, telephone etc.
7. Radio frequency transformers are used in radio communication.
8. Transformers are also used in impedance matching.

04
Current
Impedance

31. Out of the following graphs, which graph shows the

correct relation (graphical representation) for LC
parallel resonant circuit? min
0 0 Fr
Impedance

max Frequency Frequency

Current

(3) (4)
min

(1) (1) (2) (2)

0 Fr 0 Fr (3) (3) (4) (4)
Frequency Frequency
(1) (2)
 Alternating Current 157
32. The LC parallel resonant circuit
(1) has a very high impedance 1
(3) (4) LC
LC
(2) has a very high current
(3) acts as resistance of very low value 37. The resonance frequency of the tank circuit of an
oscillator when 10/2 mH and C = 0.04 µF are connected
(4) has zero impedance
in parallel is
33. A charged capacitor C = 30 µF is connected to an
(1) 250 kHz (2) 25 kHz
inductor L = 27 mH. The angular frequency of their
oscillations is (3) 2.5 kHz (4) 25 MHz
(1) 9.1 × 10 3 (2) 3.0 × 103 38. The output of a step down transformer is measured to
be 48 V when connected to a 12 W bulb. The value of
(3) 1.1 × 10 3 (4) 0.3 × 103
peak current is
34. A fully charged capacitor C with initial charge q 0 is
connected to a coil of self inductance L at t = 0. The 1
time at which the energy is stored equally between the (1) 2A (2) A
2 2
electric and the magnetic fields is
 1 1
(1) (2) LC (3) A (4) A
 LC 4 2
4
(3) 2 LC (4) LC 39. For an ideal step-down transformer, the quantity which
is constant for both the coils is
35. An LC circuit contains a 20 mH inductor and a 50 µF
capacitor with an initial charge of 10 mC. The resistance (1) current in the coils
of the circuit is negligible. Let the instant at which the (2) voltage across the coils
circuit which is closed be t = 0. At what time is the (3) resistance of coils
energy stored completely magnetic?
(4) power in the coils
(1) t=0 (2) t = 1.54 ms
40. A transformer is used to light a 100 W, 110 V lamp from
(3) t = 3.14 ms (4) t = 6.28 ms a 220 V supply. If the supply current is 0.6 A, the
36. The natural frequency (0) of oscillations in LC circuit efficiency of the transformer is
is given by (1) 66% (2) 76%
1 1 1 1 (3) 86% (4) 96%
(1) (2)
2 LC 2 LC

7.10 Synopsis
T

 Idt
0 1
T
Average value I av   Idt
T 0
 T

 dt
0

T
2
 I dt
0
RMS value I rms  T

 dt
0

2V0 V
For sinusoidal voltage V = V0 sin t : Vav  & Vrms  0
 2
2I0 I
For sinusoidal current I = I0 sin(t + ) : Iav  & I rms  0
 2
158 Alternating Current
 AC Circuits

I
I
V

V0
I sin t
R

V
I
V
I

V0  
I sin  t  
L  2

V
I
I
V

 
I  V0 Csin  t  
 2

 Impendance : Z = R 2  X 2 where X = reactance

 Series LCR Circuit
X = XL – XC

Z
2 2
Z = R 2   X L  XC  ; V  VR2   VL  VC 

R
 Power Factor = cos = R/Z At resonance : XL = XC  Z = R, V = VR
 LC Oscillation
L
q = q0 sin (t + ), I = I0 cos(t + ) I 0  q 0 

1 2 q2 q2 1
Energy = LI   0  LI20 = constant
2 2C 2C 2

1
Comparison with SHM q  x, I  v, L  m, C 
K C
Alternating Current 159
 Comparison of Damped Mechanical & Electrical Systems
(a) Series LCR circuit :

d 2 q R dq 1 V
2
  q  0 cos t
dt L dt LC L
compare with mechanical damped system equation

d 2 x b dx k F
2
  x  0 cos t
dt m dt m m
where b = damping coefficient.
Mechanical system Electrical system (series RLC)

Displacement (x) Charge (q)

Driving force (F) Driving voltage (V)
Kinetic energy Electromagnetic energy of moving charge
2
1 2 1  dq 
L
1 2
 mv    Li
2  2  dt  2

1 2 q2
Potential energy kx Energy of static charge
2 2C

mass (m) (1/C)

Power P = Fv Power P = VI
Damping (b) Resistance (R)

(b) Parallel LCR circuit : In this case

 dd  dd 11dd dd2  11 dd 11 V

I = IL + IC + IR =  CC    2
 2
  0sin
sint t
LL dtdt  dtdt RRdtdt dt RC
RC dt LCLC ZCZC
Displacement (x)  Flux linkage ()

 dx   d 
Velocity    Voltage  
 dt   dt 
Mass (m)  Capacitance (C)
Spring constant (k)  Reciprocal Industance (1/L)
Damping coefficient (b)  Reciprocal resistance (1/R)
Driving force (F)  Current (i)
 160 Alternating Current

1. The power is transmitted from a power house on high (1) 3A (2) 3 3A

voltage ac because
(1) Electric current travels faster at higher volts (3) 3 2A (4) 2 3A
(2) It is more economical due to less power wastage 10. A generator produces a voltage that is given by V =
(3) It is difficult to generate power at low voltage 240 sin 120 t, where t is in seconds. The frequency and
(4) Chances of stealing transmissio n lines are r.m.s. voltage are
minimized (1) 60 Hz and 240 V (2) 19 Hz and 120 V
2. The potential difference V and the current i flowing (3) 19 Hz and 170 V (4) 754 Hz and 70 V
through an instrument in an ac circuit of frequency ƒ
are given by V = 5 cos t volts and I = 2 sin t amperes 11. If E0 represents the peak value of the voltage in an ac
(where  = 2 ƒ). The power dissipated in the instrument circuit, the r.m.s. value of the voltage will be
is E0 E0
(1) Zero (2) 10 W (1) (2)
 2
(3) 5 W (4) 2.5 W E0 E0
3. In an ac circuit, V and I are given by V = 100 sin (100 t) (3) (4)
 2
  12. The peak value of 220 volts of ac mains is
volts, I  100sin 100t   mA. The power dissipated (1) 155.6 volts (2) 220.0 volts
 3
in circuit is (3) 311.0 volts (4) 440 volts
(1) 10 4 watt (2) 10 watt 13. A sinusoidal ac current flows through a resistor of
(3) 2.5 watt (4) 5 watt resistance R. If the peak current is Ip, then the power
dissipated is
4. Alternating current can not be measured by dc ammeter
because 1 2
(1) I p2 R cos (2) I pR
(1) ac cannot pass through dc ammeter 2
(2) Average value of complete cycle is zero 4 1 2
(3) I p2 R (4) I pR
(3) ac is virtual  
(4) ac changes its direction 14. A 40  electric heater is connected to a 200 V, 50 Hz
5. The resistance of a coil for dc is in ohms. In ac, the mains supply. The peak value of electric current flowing
resistance in the circuit is approximately
(1) Will remain same (2) Will increase (1) 2.5 A (2) 5.0 A
(3) Will decrease (4) Will be zero (3) 7 A (4) 10 A
6. If instantaneous current is given by i = 4 cos (t + ) 15. The frequency of ac mains in India is
amperes, then the r.m.s. value of current is (1) 30 c/s or Hz (2) 50 c/s or Hz
(1) 4 amperes (2) 2 2 amperes (3) 60 c/s or Hz (4) 120 c/s or Hz
16. The r.m.s. value of an ac of 50 Hz is 10 amp. The time
(3) 4 2 amperes (4) Zero amperes
taken by the alternating current in reaching from zero
7. In an ac circuit, peak value of voltage is 423 volts. Its to maximum value and the peak value of current will be
effective voltage is (1) 2 × 10–2 sec and 14.14 amp
(1) 400 volts (2) 323 volts (2) 1 × 10–2 sec and 7.07 amp
(3) 300 volts (4) 340 volts (3) 5 × 10–3 sec and 7.07 amp
8. In an ac circuit I = 100 sin 200 t. The time required for (4) 5 × 10–3 sec and 14.14 amp
the current to achieve its peak value will be 17. The root mean square value of the alternating current
1 1 is equal to
(1) sec (2) sec
100 200 (1) Twice the peak value
1 1 (2) Half the peak value
(3) sec (4) sec
300 400 1
9. The peak value of an Alternating current is 6 amp, then (3) times the peak value
2
r.m.s. value of current will be (4) Equal to the peak value
 Alternating Current 161
18. The peak value of an alternating e.m.f. E is given by E 26. Choke coil works on the principle of
= E0 cos t is 10 volts and its frequency is 50 Hz. At (1) Transient current (2) Self induction
1 (3) Mutual induction (4) Wattless current
time t  sec, the instantaneous e.m.f. is
600 27. A choke coil has
(1) 10 V (2) 5 3V (1) High inductance and low resistance
(3) 5V (4) 1V (2) Low inductance and high resistance
(3) High inductance and high resistance
 
19. If a current I given by I 0 sin  t   flows in an ac (4) Low inductance and low resistance
 2
28. Choke coil is used to control
circuit across which an ac potential of E = E0 sin t has
(1) ac (2) dc
been applied, then the power consumption P in the
(3) Both ac and dc (4) Neither ac nor dc
circuit will be
29. Current in the circuit is wattless, if
E0 I 0
(1) P  (2) P  2 E0 I 0 (1) Inductance in the circuit is zero
2 (2) Resistance in the circuit is zero
E0 I 0 (3) Current is alternating
(3) P  (4) P = 0
2 (4) Resistance and inductance both are zero
20. In an ac circuit, the instantaneous values of e.m.f. and 30. The phase angle between e.m.f. and current in LCR
  series ac circuit is
current are e = 200 sin 314 t volt and i  sin  314t  
 3 (1) 0 to  / 2 (2)  / 4
ampere. The average power consumed in watt is (3)  / 2 (4) 
(1) 200 (2) 100 31. A choke coil is preferred to a rheostat in ac circuit as
(3) 50 (4) 25 (1) It consumes almost zero power
21. An ac generator produced an output voltage E = (2) It increases current
170 sin 377 t volts, where t is in seconds. The frequency (3) It increases power
of ac voltage is
(4) It increases voltage
(1) 50 Hz (2) 110 Hz
32. An alternating e.m.f. is applied to purely capacitive
(3) 60 Hz (4) 230 Hz circuit. The phase relation between e.m.f. and current
22. In general in an alternating current circuit flowing in the circuit is or in a circuit containing
(1) The average value of current is zero capacitance only
(2) The average value of square of the current is zero (1) e.m.f. is ahead of current by  / 2
(3) Average power dissipation is zero (2) Current is ahead of e.m.f. by  / 2
(4) The phase difference between voltage and (3) Current lags behind e.m.f. by 
current is zero (4) Current is ahead of e.m.f. by 
23. An alternating current is given by the equation . 33. An ac source is connected to a resistive circuits. Which
i  i1 cos t  i2 sin t. The r.m.s. current is given by of the following is true
1 1 (1) Current leads the voltage and both are in same
(1) (i1  i2 ) (2) (i1  i2 ) 2 phase
2 2
1 2 2 1/ 2 1 2 2 1/ 2 (2) Current lags behind the voltage and both are in
(3) (i1  i2 ) (4) (i1  i2 ) same phase
2 2
(3) Current and voltage are in same phase
24. In an ac ci rcuit, the current i s given by
(4) Any of the above may be true depending upon
  the value of resistance
i  5sin 100t   and the ac potential is
 2 34. The average power dissipated in a pure inductor of
V  200sin (100) volt. Then the power consumption is inductance L when an ac current is passing through it,
(1) 20 watts (2) 40 watts is
(3) 1000 watts (4) 0 watt 1 2 1 2
(1) LI (2) LI
25. An electric lamp is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz supply. 2 4
Then the peak value of voltage is (3) 2LI 2 (4) Zero
(1) 210 V (2) 211 V
(Inductance of the coil L and current I)
(3) 311 V (4) 320 V
 162 Alternating Current
35. An alternating current of frequency ‘ƒ’ is flowing in a (1) Leads the e.m.f. by 90°
circuit containing a resistance R and a choke L in series. (2) Lags behind the e.m.f. by 90°
The impedance of this circuit is (3) Sometimes leads and sometime lags behind the
e.m.f.
(1) R + 2fL (2) R 2  4 2 f 2 L2 (4) Is in phase with the e.m.f.
44. A 20 volts ac is applied to a circuit consisting of a
(3) R 2  L2 (4) R 2  2 fL resistance and a coil with negligible resistance. If the
voltage across the resistance is 12 V, the voltage across
36. A resonant ac circuit contains a capacitor of capacitance
the coil is
10 –6 F and an inductor of 10 –4 H. The frequency of
(1) 16 volts (2) 10 volts
electrical oscillations will be
(3) 8 volts (4) 6 volts
(1) 10 5 Hz (2) 10 Hz 45. A resistance of 300  and an inductance of (1/) henry
5
10 10 are connected in series to a ac voltage of 20 volts and
(3) Hz (4) Hz 200 Hz frequency. The phase angle between the voltage
2 2
37. Power delivered by the source of the circuit becomes and current is
maximum, when 4 1 3
(1) tan 1 (2) tan
1 3 4
(1)  L  C (2) L  3
C 1 1 2
(3) tan (4) tan
2 2 5
 1 
(3) L    (4)  L  C 46. The power factor of LCR circuit at resonance is
 C 
38. An alternating voltage is connected in series with a (1) 0.707 (2) 1
resistance R and an inductance L. If the potential drop (3) Zero (4) 0.5
across the resistance is 200 V and across the inductance 47. An inductance of 1 mH a condenser of 10 µF and a
is 150 V, then the applied voltage is resistance of 50  are connected in series. The
(1) 350 V (2) 250 V reactances of inductor and condensers are same. The
(3) 500 V (4) 300 V
reactance of either of them will be
39. An inductive circuit contains resistance of 10  and
(1) 100  (2) 30 
an inductance of 20 H. If an ac voltage of 120 V and
frequency 60 Hz is applied to this circuit, the current (3) 3.2  (4) 10 
would be nearly 48. The natural frequency of a L-C circuit is equal to
(1) 0.32 amp (2) 0.016 amp
(3) 0.48 amp (4) 0.80 amp 1 1
(1) LC (2)
40. Same current is flowing in two alternating circuits. The 2 2 LC
first circuit contains only inductance and the other
contains only a capacitor. If the frequency of the e.m.f. 1 L 1 C
of ac is increased, the effect on the value of the current (3) (4)
2 C 2 L
will be
(1) Increases in the first circuit and decreases in the 49. An alternati ng voltage E  200 2 sin (100 t ) is
other
connected to a 1 microfarad capacitor through an ac
(2) Increases in both the circuits
ammeter. The reading of the ammeter shall be
(3) Decreases in both the circuits
(4) Decreases in the first circuit and increases in the (1) 10 mA (2) 20 mA
other (3) 40 mA (4) 80 mA
41. A capacitor is a perfect insulator for 50. An ac circuit consists of an inductor of inductance 0.5
(1) Alternating currents (2) Direct currents H and a capacitor of capacitance 8 µF in series. The
(3) Both ac and dc (4) None of these current in the circuit is maximum when the angular
42. In a circuit containing an inductance of zero resistance, frequency of ac source is
the e.m.f. of the applied ac voltage leads the current by
(1) 500 rad/sec (2) 2 × 105 rad/sec
(1) 90° (2) 45°
(3) 4000 rad/sec (4) 5000 rad/sec
(3) 30° (4) 0°
43. In a pure inductive circuit or In an ac circuit containing
inductance only, the current
 Alternating Current 163

(Concept Builder)

1. If the rms current in a 50 Hz ac circuit is 5 A, the value 4. To reduce the resonant frequency in an LCR series
of the current 1/300 seconds after its value becomes circuit with a generator
zero is (1) the generator frequency should be reduced.
(2) another capacitor should be added in parallel to
(1) 5 2 A (2) 5 3/ 2 A the first.
(3) 5/6 A (4) 5/ 2 A (3) the iron core of the inductor should be removed.
(4) dielectric in the capacitor should be removed.

2. An alternating current generator has an internal

5. Which of the following combinations should be
resistance Rg and an internal reactance Xg. It is used to
selected for better tuning of an LCR circuit used for
supply power to a passive load con sisting of a
communication?
resistance Rg and a reactance XL. For maximum power
to be delivered from the generator to the load, the value (1) R = 20 , L = 1.5 H, C = 35µF.
of XL is equal to (2) R = 25 , L = 2.5 H, C = 45µF.
(1) zero (2) Xg (3) R = 15 , L = 3.5 H, C = 30µF.
(4) R = 25 , L = 1.5 H, C = 45µF.
(3) –X g (4) Rg

6. An inductor of reactance 1 and a resistor of 2 are

3. When a voltage measuring device is connected to AC connected in series to the terminals of a 6 V (rms) a.c.
mains, the meter shows the steady input voltage of source. The power dissipated in the circuit is
220V. This means (1) 8 W (2) 12 W
(1) input voltage cannot be AC voltage, but a DC (3) 14.4 W (4) 18 W
voltage.
(2) maximum input voltage is 220V. 7. The output of a step-down transformer is measured to
(3) the meter reads not v but < v2 > and is calibrated be 24 V when connected to a 12 watt light bulb. The
value of the peak current is
to read  v2  .
(1) 1/ 2 A (2) 2A
(4) the pointer of the meter is stu ck by some
(3) 2A (4) 2 2 A
mechanical defect.
 164 Alternating Current

• Instructions for Questions 1 to 5 • Instructions for Questions 6 to 10

Given bel ow are two statements : one is labelled as Given below are two statements :
Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R).
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below :
appropriate answer from the options given below :
(1) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
(1) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct
explanation of (A) (2) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
(2) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct (3) Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
explanation of (A) (4) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
(3) (A) is correct the (R) is not correct
(4) (A) is not correct but (R) is correct 6. Statement I : When capacitive reactance is smaller than
the inductive reactance in LCR current, e.m.f. leads the
1. Assertion : An inductor is connected to an ac source. current.
When the magnitude of current decreases in the circuit, Statement II : The phase angle is the angle between
energy is absorbed by the ac source. the alternating e.m.f. and alternating current of the
Reason : When current through an inductor decreases, circuit.
the energy stored in inductor decreases.

7. Statement I : Chock coil is preferred over a resistor to

2. Assertion : Average power consumed in an ac circuit
is equal to average power consumed by resistors in adjust current in an ac circuit.
the circuit. Statement II : Power factor for inductance is zero.
Reason : Average power consumed by capacitor and
inductor in an ac circuit is zero. 8. Statement I : If the frequency of alternating current in
an ac circuit consisting of an inductance coil is
3. Assertion : In series LCR circuit resonance can take increased then current gets decreased.
place.
Statement II : The current is inversely proportional to
Reason : Resonance takes place if inductance and
capacitive reactances are equal and opposite. frequency of alternating current.

4. Assertion : The alternating current lags behind the 9. Statement I : An alternating current does not show
e.m.f. by a phase angle of /2, when ac flows through any magnetic effect.
an inductor.
Statement II : Alternating current varies with time.
Reason : The inductive reactance increases as the
frequency of ac source decreases.
10. Statement I : The dc and ac both can be measured by a
5. Assertion : Capacitor serves as a block for dc and hot wire instrument.
offers an easy path to ac. Statement II : The hot wire instrument is based on the
Reason : Capacitive reactance is i nversely principle of magnetic effect of current.
proportional to frequency.
 Alternating Current 165

(Direct from
NCERT)

Match the List – I and List – II and choose the correct rad s–1. The information of phase difference between the
combination from the options given. current and source voltage in each situation of List-I is
1. Match the following given in List-II. Match the circuit components in List-I
with corresponding results in List-II
List - I List - II
List - I List - II
(a) Inductance of a coil (i) Depends on resistivity
(b) Capacitance (ii) Depends on shape (a) (i) The magnitude of
(c) Impedance of coil (iii)Depends on medium 10  500 µF required phase
inserted difference is /2.
(d) Reactance of a (iv) Depends on external (b) (ii) The magnitude of
capacitor voltage source 5H required phase
(1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (iv) difference is /4.
(2) (a) – (ii, iii); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) – (i, ii, iii, iv) ; (d) – (ii, iii, iv) (c) (iii) The current leads in
(3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii); (d) – (ii, iv) 5H 3 µF phase to source voltage
(4) (a) – (i); (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i); (d) – (iii) (d) (iv) The current lags in
1 k 5H phase to source
2. In List-I, variation of current i with time t is given in the voltage.
figure. In List-II, root mean square current irms and average
(1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (iv)
current are given. Match List-I with corresponding
(2) (a) – (i, iii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (ii, iv)
quantities given in List-II
(3) (a) – (ii, iii); (b) – (i, iv); (c) – (i, iii); (d) – (ii, iv)
List - I List - II (4) (a) – (i); (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i); (d) – (iii)
i
100
i0 4. In series R-L-C circuit, R = 100 , C = µF and

O t i0 100
(a) T/2 T (i) irms  L mH are connected to an ac source as shown in
– i0 3 
figure. The rms value of ac voltage is 220 V and its
i frequency is 50 Hz. In List-I, some physical quantities are
i0 mentioned, while in List-II, information about quantities
3T/4 are provided. Match the entries of List-I with the entries
(b) O T/4 T/2 T
t (ii) Average current for
of List-II.
– i0 positive half cycle is i0
i L R C
i0
(c) (iii) Average current for
O t
T/2 T
– i0 positive half cycle is i0/2
220 V, 50 Hz
i List - I List - II
i0 (a) Average power dissipated (i) zero
(d) O t (iv) Full cycle average (b) Average power dissipated (ii) non-zero
T/2 T (c) Average power dissipated (iii) 163 SI units
current is zero
in the capacitor is
(1) (a) – (iv); (b) – (i, iv); (c) – (ii, iv); (d) – (ii) (d) The rms voltage across (iv) 265.7 SI units
(2) (a) – (i, iii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (ii, iv) the capacitor is
(3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii); (d) – (ii, iv) (1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (iv)
(4) (a) – (i); (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i); (d) – (iii) (2) (a) – (i, iii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (ii, iv)
3. Four different circuit components are given in each (3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, (iii); (c) – (ii, iii); (d) – (ii, iv)
situation of List-I and all the components are connected (4) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i); (c) – (i); (d) – (ii, iii)
across an ac source of same angular frequency  = 200
 166 Alternating Current

(Previous Year Questions)

1. A wire of resistance R is connected in series with an 8. What is the value of inductance L for which the current
inductor of reactance  L. Then quality factor of RL is maximum in a series LCR circuit with C = 10 µF and 
circuit is [AIPMT-2000] = 1000 s–1 ? [AIPMT-2006]
R L (1) 100 mH
(1) (2) (2) 1 mH
L R
R L (3) Cannot be calculated unless R is known
(3) 2 2 2 (4) (4) 10 mH
R  L R   2 L2
2
9. The primary and secondary coils of a transformer have
2. The reactance of a capacitor of capacitance C is X. If 50 and 1500 turns respectively. If the magnetic flux 
both the frequency and capacitance be doubled, then linkedwith the primary coil is given by  = 0 + 4 t,
new reactance will be [AIPMT-2001] where  is in weber, t is time in second and 0 is a
(1) X (2) 2X constant, the outpur voltage across the secondary coil
(3) 4 X (4) X/4 is [AIPMT-2007]
3. What is the cause of “Green house effect”? (1) 90 V (2) 120 V
[AIPMT-2002] (3) 220 V (4) 30 V
(1) Infrared rays (2) Ultraviolet rays 10. A transformer is used to light a 100 W and 110 V lamp
(3) X-rays (4) Radio-waves from a 220 V mains. If the main current is 0.5 A, the
4. For a series LCR circuit, the power loss at resonance is efficiency of the transformer is approximately
[AIPMT-2002] (1) 30% (2) 50% [AIPMT-2007]
(3) 90% (4) 10%
V2 11. The velocity of electromagnetic radiation in a medium
(1) (2) i2 C
1 of permittivity 0 and permeability 0 is given by
L 
C [AIPMT-2008]

V2 0
(3) i2 R (4) (1)
0 (2) 0 0
C
5. In a circuit, L, C and R are connected in series with an 1 0
alternating voltage source of frequency ƒ. the current (3) (4)
0 0 0
leads the voltage by 45°. The value of C is
[AIPMT-2005] 12. In an AC circuit the emf (V) and the current (i) at any
instant are given respectively by [AIPMT-2008]
1 1
(1) (2) V = V0 sin t, i = i0 sin (t – )
2 ƒ(2 ƒ L  R )  ƒ(2 ƒ L  R )
The average power in the circuit over one cycle of AC
1 1
(3) (4) is
2 ƒ(2 ƒ L  R )  ƒ(2 ƒ L  R )
6. The core of a transformer is laminated because V0i0 V0i0
(1) (2) sin 
[AIPMT-2006] 2 2
(1) energy loss es due to eddy currents may be V0i0
(3) cos  (4) V0 i0
minimised 2
(2) the weight of the transformer may be reduced 13. Power dissipated in an L-C-R series circuit connected
(3) rusting of the core may be prevented to an AC source of emf  is [AIPMT-2009]
(4) ratio of voltage in primary and secondary may
 2R  1 
2
be increased 2  2 R2   L  
(1)  2  1   (2)  C 
7. A coil of inductive reactance 31  has a resistance of 8  R   L   
. It is placed in series with a condenser of capacitative   C   R
reactance 25 . The combination is connected to an
AC source of 110 V. The power factor of the circuit is   1 
2
  2R
 2  R 2   L    2
(1) 0.56 (2) 0.64 [AIPMT-2006]   C   (4)  1 
(3) R 2   L 
(3) 0.80 (4) 0.33 
R  C 
 Alternating Current 167
14. A 220 V input is supplied to a transformer. The output 1. When capacitor is air filled.
circuit draws a current of 2.0 A at 440 V. If the efficiency 2. When capacitor is mica filled.
Current through resistor is i and voltage across
of the transformer is 80%, the current drawn by the
capacitor is V then
primary windings of the transformer is[AIPMT-2010]
(1) Va < Vb (2) Va > Vb
(1) 3.6 A (2) 2.8 A (3) ia > ib (4) Va = Vb
(3) 2.5 A (4) 5.0 A 22. A resistance ‘R’ draws power ‘P’ when connected to
15. In the given circuit, the reading of voltmeter V1 and V2 an AC source. If an inductance is now placed in series
are 300 V each. The reading to the voltmetmeter V3 and with the resistacne, such that the impedance of the
ammeter A are respectively [AIPMT-2010] circuit becomes ‘Z’ the power drawn will be
2
R R
(1) P  (2) P [AIPMT-2015]
Z
  Z
R
(3) P   (4) P
Z
23. A 100  resistance and a capacitor of 100  reactance
are connected in series across a 220 V source. When
(1) 150 V, 2.2 A (2) 220 V, 2.2 A the capacitor is 50% charged, the peak value of the
(3) 220 V, 2.0 A (4) 100 V, 2.0 A displacement current is [NEET-2016]
16. An AC voltage is applied to a resistance R and an (1) 2.2 A (2) 11 A
inductor L in series. If R and the inductive reactance (3) 4.4 A (4) 11 2 A
are both equal to 3 , the phase difference between 24. The potential differences across the res istance,
the applied voltage and the current in the circuit is capacitance and inductance are 80 V, 40 V and 100 V
(1) /4 (2) /2 [AIPMT-2011] respectively in an L-C-R circuit. The power factor of
(3) zero (4) /6 this circuit is [NEET-2016]
17. In an AC circuit an alternati ng voltage (1) 0.4 (2) 0.5
e  200 2 sin 100 t volt is connected to a capacitor of (3) 0.8 (4) 1.0
capacity 1 µF. The rms value of the current in the circuit 25. Which of the following combinations should be
is [AIPMT-2011] selected for better tuning of an L-C-R circuit used for
(1) 100 mA (2) 200 mA communication? [NEET 2016]
(3) 20 mA (4) 10 mA (1) R - 20 , L - 1.5 H, C = 35 µF
18. In an electrical circuit, R, L, C and an AC voltage source (2) R - 25 , L - 2.5 H, C = 45 F
are all connected in series. When L is removed from (3) R - 15 , L - 3.5 H, C = 30 F
the circuit, the phase difference between the voltage (4) R - 25 , L - 1.5 H, C = 45 F
and the current in the circuit is  /3. If instead, C is 26. An inductor 20 mH, a capacitor 50 µF and a resistor 40
removed from the circuit, the phase difference is again  are connected in series across a source of emf V = 10
/3. The power factor of the circuit is [AIPMT-2012] sin 340 t. The power loss in AC circuit is [NEET-2016]
(1) 1/2 (2) 1/ 2 (1) 0.67 W (2) 0.76 W
(3) 0.89 W (4) 0.51 W
(3) 1 (4) 3/2 27. Figure shows a circuit that contains three indentical
19. A coil of self-inductance L is connected in series with resistors with resistance R = 9.0  each, two identical
a bulb B and an AC source. Brightness of the bulb inductors with inductance L = 2.0 mH each, and an
decreases when [NEET-2013] ideal battery with emf  = 18 V. The current i through
(1) frequency of the AC source is decreased the battery just after the switch closed is [NEET-2017]
(2) number of turns in the coil is reduced
(3) a capacitance of reactance XC = XL is included in
the same circuit
(4) an iron rod is inserted in the coil
20. A transformer having efficiency of 90% is working on
200 V and 3 kW power supply. If the current in the
secondary coil is 6 A, the voltage across the secondary (1) 2 mA (2) 4 A
coil and the current in the primary coil respectively are (3) 2 A (4) 0 A
[AIPMT-2014] 28. An inductor 20 mH, a capacitor 100 µF and a resistor
(1) 300 V, 15 A (2) 450 V, 15 A 50 are connected in series across a source of emf,
(3) 450 V, 13.5 A (4) 600 V, 15 A V = 10 sin 314 t. The power loss in the circuit is
21. A series R-C circuit is connected to an alternating (1) 0.79 W (2) 0.43 W [NEET-2018]
voltage source. Consider two situation [AIPMT-2015] (3) 2.74 W (4) 1.13 W
 168 Alternating Current
29. The variation of e.m.f. with time for four types of 35. A series LCR circuit containing 5.0 H inductor, 80 µF
generators are shown in the figures. Which amongst capacitor and 40  resistor is connected to 230 V
them can be called AC? [NEET-2019] variable frequency ac source. The angular frequencies
of the source at which power transferred to the circuit
E E
is half the power at the resonant angular frequency are
t t likely to be : [NEET-2021]
(1) (2)
(1) 25 rad/s and 75 rad/s (2) 50 rad/s and 25 rad/s
(3) 46 rad/s and 54 rad/s (4) 42 rad/s and 58 rad/s
E E 36. The peak voltage of the ac source is equal to :
t t [NEET-2022]
(3) (4)
(1) the value of voltage supplied to the current
(1) only (1) (2) (1) and (4) (2) the rms value of the ac source
(3) (1), (2), (3), (4) (4) (1) and (2) (3) 2 times the rms value of the ac source
30. A circuit when connected to an AC source of 12V gives
a current of 0.2 A. The same circuit when connected to (4) 1/ 2 times the rms value of the ac source
a DC source of 12 V, gives a current of 0.4 A. The circuit 37. A series LCR circuit with inductance 10 H, capacitance
is: [NEET-2019] 10 µF, resistance 50  is connected to an ac source of
(1) Series LCR (2) Series LR voltage, V = 200 sin (100 t) volt. If the resonant
(3) Series RC (4) Series LC frequency of the LCR circuit is no and the frequency
of the ac source is n, then [NEET-2022]
31. A 40 µF capacitor is connected to a 200 V,50 Hz ac
supply. The rms value of the current in the circuit is, 50
(1) νO = ν = Hz
nearly: [NEET-2020] π
(1) 2.05 A (2) 2.5 A 50
(2) O  Hz,   50 Hz
(3) 25.1 A (4) 1.7 A 
32. A light bulb and an inductor coil are connected to an 100
ac source through a key as shown in the figure below. (3) ν = 100 Hz, ν O = Hz
π
The key is closed and after sometimes an iron rod is
(4)  O    50 Hz
inserted into the interior of the inductor. The glow of
the light bulb [NEET-2020] 38. Given below are statements : [NEET-2022]
Statement I : In an ac circuit, the current through a
capacitor leads the voltage across it.
Statemen t II : In a.c. circuits contain ing pure
capacitance only, the phase difference between the
current and the voltage is  :
(1) increases (2) decreases In the light of the above statements, choose the most
appropriate answer from the options given below :
(3) remains unchanged (4) will fluctuate
(1) Both statement-I and statement-II are correct
33. A series LCR circuit is connected to an ac voltage
source. When L is removed from the circuit, the phase (2) Both statement-I and statement-II are incorrect
difference between current and voltage, is /3. If instead (3) Statement-I is correct the statement-II is incorrect
C is removed from the circuit, the phase difference is (4) Statement-I is incorrect but statement-II is correct
again /3 between current and voltage. The power 39. An inductor of inductance 2 mH is connected to a 220
factor of the circuit is: [NEET-2020] V, 50 Hz a.c. source. Let the inductive reactance in the
(1) 0.5 (2) 1.0 circuit is X1. If a 220 V dc source replaces the ac source
(3) –1.0 (4) zero in the circuit, then the inductive reactance iin the circuit
34. A capacitor of capacitance 'C', is connected across an is X2. X1 and X2 respectively are : [NEET-2022]
ac source of voltage V, given by V = V 0 sin t The (1) 6.28 , zero (2) 6.28 , infinity
displacement current between the p lates of the (3) 0.628 , zero (4) 0.628 , infinity
capacitor, would then be given by : [NEET-2021] 40. A standard filament lamp consumes 100 W when
V connected to 200 V ac mains supply. The peak current
(1) I d  V0 C cos t (2) I d  0 cos t through the bulb will be : [NEET-2022]
C
V0 (1) 0.707 A (2) 1 A
(3) Id  sin t (4) I d  V0C sin t (3) 1.414 A (4) 2 A
C
Alternating Current 169

7.16
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 01 36. (3) 37. (2) 38. (2) 39. (2) 40. (4)
1. (1) 2. (3) 3. (4) 4. (2) 5. (2) 41. (2) 42. (1) 43. (2) 44. (1) 45. (1)
6. (1) 7. (3) 8. (1) 9. (2) 10. (3) 46. (2) 47. (4) 48. (2) 49. (2) 50. (1)

DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 02 NCERT EXEMPLAR OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS

11. (2) 12. (2) 13. (2) 14. (2) 15. (2) 1. (2) 2. (3) 3. (3) 4. (2) 5. (3)
16. (1) 17. (1) 18. (3) 19. (4) 20. (3) 6. (3) 7. (1)

DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 03 ASSERTION–REASON & STATEMENT QUESTIONS

21. (4) 22. (3) 23. (3) 24. (4) 25. (4) 1. (1) 2. (1) 3. (1) 4. (3) 5. (1)
26. (2) 27. (1) 28. (1) 29. (1) 30. (4) 6. (2) 7. (1) 8. (1) 9. (2) 10. (3)

DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 04 MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS

31. (4) 32. (1) 33. (3) 34. (2) 35. (2) 1. (2) 2. (1) 3. (3) 4. (4)
36. (3) 37. (2) 38. (2) 39. (4) 40. (2)
ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS FROM NCERT
1. (2) 2. (4) 3. (1) 4. (3) 5. (3)
1. (2) 2. (1) 3. (3) 4. (2) 5. (2) 6. (1) 7. (3) 8. (1) 9. (2) 10. (3)
6. (2) 7. (3) 8. (4) 9. (3) 10. (3) 11. (3) 12. (3) 13. (1) 14. (4) 15. (2)
11. (4) 12. (3) 13. (2) 14. (3) 15. (2) 16. (1) 17. (3) 18. (3) 19. (4) 20. (2)
16. (4) 17. (3) 18. (2) 19. (4) 20. (3) 21. (2) 22. (1) 23. (1) 24. (3) 25. (3)
21. (3) 22. (1) 23. (3) 24. (4) 25. (3) 26. (4) 27. (2) 28. (1) 29. (3) 30. (2)
26. (2) 27. (1) 28. (1) 29. (2) 30. (1) 31. (2) 32. (2) 33. (2) 34. (1) 35. (3)
36. (3) 37. (1) 38. (3) 39. (3) 40. (1)
31. (1) 32. (2) 33. (3) 34. (4) 35. (2)
170 Electromagnetic Waves

ELECTROMAGNETIC
WAVES
Chapter 08
Percentage of Questions in Last 34 Years’ in NEET / AIPMT from this Chapter

Percentage
A •phase,
Basics of Simple Harmonic Motion (Displacement,
velocity, acceleration, time period, frequency)
40%

C (23%)
B • Spring Pendulum 37%
A (40%)

C • Some systems executing Simple Harmonic 23%

B (37%) Motion (Simple pendulum, Seconds pendulum)

WHAT DO YOU WANT TO KNOW? 8.5 SYNOPSIS

8.1 INTRODUCTION 8.6 MISCELLANEOUS Questions from NCERT

8.2 DISPLACEMENT CURRENT & ORIGIN OF 8.7 NCERT Exemplar Questions

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
8.8 ASSERTION-REASON & STATEMENT
8.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES BASED Questions from NCERT

8.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM 8.9 MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS

8.4.1 Radio Waves 8.10 ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
8.4.2 Microwaves
8.11 ANSWER KEY
8.4.3 Infrared Waves
8.4.4 Visible Rays
8.4.5 Ultraviolet Rays
8.4.6 X-Rays
8.4.7 Gamma Rays
Radio waves
Electromagnetic Waves Radiation pressure Energy associated Do not require 171
Wavelength > 0.1 m exerted by an with an any material
Uses: in tele- electromagnetic wave electromagnetic medium for
communication energy associated wave propagation
with em waves (u)
P = speed of light in 1 1 B2
u  0 E 2 
Microwave 2 2 0 Produced
vacuum (c)
Wavelength 0.1m to 1mm by accelerated
Uses: in microwave charge
oven, RADAR

Infra-red
Wavelength 1 mm to Travels with
700 mm speed of light
Uses: treat muscular strain Different types of Characteristics in free space
electromagnetic of electromagnetic 1
Visible waves waves
C  
0 0
Wavelength: 700 nm to = 3 × 108 m/s
400 nm
Uses: to see objects In free space;
magnitude of
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES electric field (E)
Ultraviolet Constituted by mutually perpendicular
Wavelength: 400 nm to magnetic field (B)
time varying electric and magnetic fields = C (speed of light
1 nm
Uses: Preserve food in vacuum)
purifying water
Transverse in
nature
-rays Conduction current Displacement current (ID)
Wavelength: 1nm to 10–3 nm Arises due to flow of Due to time varying
Uses: Medical diagnosis Oscillating
electrons in a definite electric field electric and magnetic
closed path d fields are in phase
-rays I D  0 E
Wavelength: < 10–3 nm dt and their magnitudes
Uses: in medical bear constant ratio
science information E
C 0
on nuclear structure B0

8.1 P.No.: 269

 According to Maxwell's theory accelerated charge particles produce electromagnetic waves, where as oscillat-
ing charges also produce an electromagnetic wave, the frequency of the wave being the frequency of oscillation
of that source charge. The electromagnetic waves propagate in vacuum with speed equal to c = 3 × 108 ms–1. It
can be shown speed of electromagnetic waves is equal to the ratio of the magnitude of the electric field to the
magnitude of the magnetic feld i.e., c = (E / B).
 Electromagnetic waves obey the principle of superposition and therefore one can observe interfererne, diffraction
and polarization of such waves. Further electromagnetic waves are transverse waves. For an electromagnetic
wave, the instantaneous energy density associated with the magnetic field equals the instantaneous energy density
associated with the electric field. The rate of flow of energy in an electromagnetic wave is described by poynting
  
vector S  E  B / 0 . The intensity of an electromagnetic wave equals the average energy density multiplied
by the speed of light. The intensity represents the power (radiation power) per unit area of the outgoing wave
on each side of the sheet. The total rate of energy emitted per unit area of the conductor is shown to
c
be   µ0J2max.
 4
 172
8.2 Electromagnetic Waves
P.No.-270

 The origin of electromagnetic waves is related to the concept of displacement current. When a capacitor is
connected across a battery, through the connecting wire there is a flow of conduction current, while through
the gap between the plates of capacitor, there is flow of displacement cument. The conduction and displacement
currents are entirely different from each other. Displacement current produces magnetic field in the same
manner as the conduction current does.
 When a capacitor is allowed to charge in an electric circuit, the current flows through the connecting wires.
As the capacitor is charged, charge accumulates on the two plates of the capacitor and as a result, a changing
electric field is produced across the gap between its two plates. If a small compass needle is placed in the
gap between the two plates of a capacitor, it shows deflection indicating the presence of magnetic field. The
current due to flow of charge (conduction current) cannot pass across the gap between the two plates of the
capacitor.
 However, to explain the existence of magnetic field between the plates, Maxwell assumed the flow of current
across the gap between the plates of the capacitor also. This cument is called displacement current and is
due to varying electric field between the plates of the capacitor. The varying electric field across the plates
of the capacitor gives rise to the magnetic field.
 Maxwell's concept of displacement current makes a continuous flow of current in such an electric circuit. Thus,
through the connecting wires, there is a flow of conduction current iC (no displacement current) and through
the gap across the plates of the capacitor, there is flow of displacement current iD (no conduction cument).
In a circuit, the conduction current and displacement currents are always equal in magnitude.
   
 Modified Ampere's circuital law, is therefore,   B  dl   0 (iC  iD ) instead of   dl  0i.
B
 
 The relation  B  dl   (i
0 C  iD ) is called modified Ampere's circuital law or Ampere-Maxwell's Circuital law..
The displacement current arising due to varying electric field is,
E    E 
iD   0 A
t
  B  dl   0  iC   0 A 


t 
 The conduction and displacement currents are individually discontinuous, but the currents together possess
the property of continuity through any closed electric circuit. The displacement current is precisely equal to
the conduction current when the two are present in different parts of the circuit. The displacement current
arises due to the rate of change electric flux (or electric field) between the two plates of the capacitor. Conduction
current and displacement current both are the sources of magnetic field.
 The conduction current produces magnetic field due to changes in motion, whereas the displacement current
produces magnetic field due to time rate of change of eleectric field. In the space between the plates of
the capacitor, both the electric and magnetic fields exist. The time varying electric field between the plates
of the capacitor is directed perpendicular to the plane of the plates and the time-varying magnetic field produced
by the electric field is along the perimeter of a circle in a plane perpendicular to the plates of the capacitor.
 
 The time varying electric field ( E ) and magnetic field ( B ) are perpendicular to each other. The two mutually
perpendicular time varying electric and magnetic fields are represented as,
   
E  E0 sin(t  kx) and B  B0 sin(t  kx) respectively.
 The two fields combine to constitute electromagnetic waves, which propagate in space in a direction perpendicular
to E and B.

HERTZ EXPERIMENT
 In 1887, Heinrich Hertz, a German scientist, demonstrated the existence of electromagnetic waves. Two brass
plates are connected to a spark gap. The brass plates act as a capacitor. When the brass plates are charged
to a high potential, the air gap between the spark-gap becomes conducting and a spark passes. This passage
Electromagnetic Waves 173
of spark represents a sudden surge of electrons across the gap and the polarity of the plates is reversed. But,
since the air is still conducting, another spark passes and this process repeats until the energy is dissipated as
heat by the resistance of the gap. This oscillatory discharge across a spark gap generates electromagnetic waves.
 The frequency of oscillations depend on the capacity and the inductance of the circuit. To detect these waves,
Hertz used a very simple resonant circuit consisting of a circle of wire broken by a spark-gap. The diameter
of the circle is so chosen that its natural frequency is equal to the frequency of the oscillatory discharge. The
changing magnetic field of electromagnetic waves induces an electromotance in the detector.
 When this electromotance, is large, a spark passes across the gap. Thus, Hertz detectel the magnetic component
of the electromagnetic waves. By a series of experiments, Hertz showed that these waves are transverse and
can be reflected and focussed.

MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS P.No.: 273

 While atempting to express the laws of electricity and magnetism, Gauss’ law of eectrostatics, Gauss law of
magnetostatics, Ampere's circuital law and Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction in terms of electric and
magnetic fields and their sources, Maxwell noticed an inconsistency in Ampere’s circuital law, and an asymmetry
in the laws of electromagnetism.
 The concept of displacement current removed the inconsistency in Ampere’s circuital law and the laws of
electromagnetism also became symmetrical. The basic laws of physics were restated by Maxwell in the fornm
of differential equations called Maxwell's equations.
 These equations predict that the time and space dependent electric and magnetic fields propagate as transverse
waves, called electromagnetic waves which have velocity equal to,
1
c  3  108 ms –1
0 0
 The following four equations are known as Maxwel's equations -
  Qin
 Gauss' Law of electrostatics,  E  dS   0

 
 Gauss' Law of magnetostatics, 
  dS  0
E
  d
 Faraday's Law of electromagnetic induction,   dl   dtB
E
   E 
 Ampere-Maxwell's Law, 
 B  dl  0  I C   0 A t   0 ( IC  I D )
SOME IMPORTANT POINTS REGARDING THESE EQUATIONS
 The first equation relates the electric flux through an area with electric charges. Coulomb's law can be derived
from Gauss' law; hence it is considered to be the fundamental equation of electrostatics; however, it is a
general equation also applicable to induced electric fields for which the lines are closed loops.
 The second equation tells us that magnetic lines always form closed loops because here are no magnetic
monopoles (magnetic charges).
 Third equation tells us that changing magnetic flux induces an electric field. This field is different from electrostatic
field in two respects. First, the induced electrical lines are closed loop, whereas electrostatic field lines begin
from positive charges and end on negative charges. Second, the induced electric field is a nonconservative
 
field whereas electrostatic field is a conservative field. For a conservative field integral   E  dl is zero but
for induced electric field it is not zero.
 174 Electromagnetic Waves
   
 According to Ampere's law  B  dl   0 I . The line integral of B  dl along a closed loop is equal to µ0I,
where I is the net current flowing through a surface enclosed in that loop. Maxwell modified the above equation
   E  E
to  B  dl   0  I C   0 A   0 ( I C  I D ), where I D   0 A
 t  t
refers to displacement current.

 Maxwell's equations showed the relationship between electric and magnetic fields and the relation of electric
and magnetic fields to the charges and curent. Maxwell's theory showed that accelerated charges produce
electromagnetic waves. His theory predicts that electromagnetic waves always travel with a (in vacuum)
speed ‘c’, which is related to electric permittivity of free space 0 and the magnetic permeability of free
1
space µ0 by the equation c  .
 0 0
 Taking µ0 = 4 × 107 T m/A and 0 = 8.85419 × 10–12 C2 / N2m2, we find that c = 2.99792 × 108 m/s, which
is the speed of light in empty space. From this calculation we are led to the conclusion that light is an
electromagnetic wave.
 When an oscillating body produces a wave, the frequency of that wave is the frequency of oscillation of
the body. Hence, when oscillating charges produce an electromagnetic wave, the frequency of the wave is
the frequency of oscillation of that charge.

GAUSS' LAW OF ELECTROSTATICS

 It states that, the total electric flux through any closed surface is always equal to (1/0) times the net charge
enclosed by the surface,
  qin
 E  dS   0

In differential form,
  
div E    E 
0

   
 Ex  E y  E z 
x y z  0 (where  is volume charge density)

GAUSS' LAW OF MAGNETOSTATICS

 It states that, the net magnetic flux crossing any closed surface is always zero,
 
 B  dS  0  An isolated magnetic monopole does not exist.
In differential form,
    
div B    B  0  Bx  By  Bz  0
x y z

FARADAY'S LAW OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

 It states that the induced electromotance produced in a circuit is numerically equal to the rate of change
of magnetic flux through it,
dB
 
dt
 Electromagnetic Waves 175
 The negative sign indicates that the induced electromotance so produced opposes the rate of change of magnetic
flux. Since electromotance can be defined as the line integral of electric field, the above relation may be
expressed as,
  d B  
 B  dl  
dt
,     dl
B

 The law states that-the line integral of magnetic feld along a closed path is equal to the rate of change of
magnetic flux through the surface bounded by that closed path.

MAXWELL-AMPERE'S CIRCUITAL LAW

It states that the line integral of magnetic field along a closed path is equal to µ0 times the total current (sum
of conduction and displacement curents) threading the surface bounded by that closed path,
   E 
  dl  0  ic   0 A t 
B


  dE 
In differential form,   B    J   
 dt 

8.3 P.No.-274

 Maxwell gave the idea of electromagnetic waves, while Hertz and other scientists produced and studied these
waves experimentally. In 1865, Maxwell predicted the existence of electromagnetic waves, on the basis of
these equations. According to him, an accelerated charge produces a sinusoidal time varying magnetic field,
which in turn produces a sinusoidal time varying electric field.
 The two fields so produced are mutually perpendicular and are sources of each other. The mutually perpendicular
time varying electric and magnetic fields, constitute elecetromagnetic waves, which propagare in space in
a direction perpendicular to the direction of both the fields. The electromagnetic waves consist of sinusoidally
time varying electric and magnetic fields at right angles to each other as well as at right angles to the direction
of propagation of waves. The speed ot electromagnetic waves in free space is given by,
1 1
c  ms 1  3  108 ms 1
0 0 1.257  10  8.854  10 12
6

 According to Maxwell's equation representing Faraday's law, a changing magnetic field produces an electric
field; while according to equation representing Ampere-Maxwell's circuital law, a changing electric field produces
a magnetic field. It means that a change in either field produces the other field. Maxwell worked out from
his equations that variation in electric and magnetic fields would lead to a wave consisting of fluctuating electric
and magnetic fields perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the
wave. Such waves which can actually propagate in space even without any material medium are called
“electromagnetic waves”.

 Figure shows a graphical representation

of an electromagnetic wave in which the electric field vector E and
the magnetic field vector B are vibrating

along Y and Z-direction respectively and the wave is propagating
along X-direction. Both E and B vary with time and space and have the same frequency..
 Maxwell predicted also that electromagnetic waves would travel in free space (vacuum) with the speed of light.
He thus concluded that light itself is an electromagnetic wave which is transverse in nature. Other examples
of electromagnetic waves are radio waves, microwaves, infrared rays, ultraviolet rays, X-rays and -rays.
 176 Electromagnetic Waves
ENERGY TRANSPORT IN ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES (POYNTING VECTOR)
 Electromagnetic waves transport energy and transfer it to bodies on which they fall. The rate of energy

transport

per unit area in an electromagnetic wave is described by a vector S , called the Poynting vector S is defined
as,
 1  
S EB
0

 The S.I. unit of S is watt/meter (W m–2) and its direction at any point gives the direction of wave transport
 
at that point. Because in electromagnetic waves, E and B are perpendicular to each other, the magnitude
  
E  B is EB. Then the magnitude of S is,
1
S EB
0
in which S, E and B are instantaneous values. Now, we know that,
(E / B) = c (speed of light).
1
Thus, S  E2.
c0
 S is the measure of energy flow per unit area perpendicular to the propagation of a plane electromagnetic
wave. The average value of the time-varying quantity S is called the intensity I of the wave.
1 1
Thus, I  S  E2  2
Emax
c0 c0

MOMENTUM AND RADIATION PRESSURE

 An electromagnetic wave carries linear momentum, angular momentum as well as energy. Electromagnetic
waves give rise to pressure when they are reflected or absorbed at the surface of a body. First we consider
that the electromagnetic wave strikes the surface at nomal incidence and transports a total energy U to the
surtace in a time ‘t’ ; if the surface absorbs all the incident energy, the total momentum ‘p’ transported to
the surface has a magnitude,
U 
P    [complete absorption] ...(i)
c
 The pressure exerted on the surface is force per unit area (F / A). From Newton's second law, force is rate
of change of momentum,
F 1 dp 1 d  U  1 ( dU / dt )
P    
A A dt A dt  c  c A
[(dU / dt) / A] is the rate at which energy is arriving at the surface per unit area, which is the magnitude
of the Poynting vector. Thus, the radiation pressure P exerted on the pertectly absorbing surtace is,

S
P   ...(ii)
c
 If the surface is a perfect reflector and incidence is normal then the momentum transported to the surtace
is twice that given by equation (i). Therefore,
 2U 
P   [complete reflection] ...(iii)
 c 
Electromagnetic Waves 177
 The radiation pressure exerted on a perfectly reflecting surface for normal incidence of the wave is,
 2S 
P   ...(iv)
 c 
 For the case of oblique incidence, where change in momentum at the perfectly reflecting surface is 2 cos
, and the coresponding radiation pressure is,
2S
P cos where  is the angle of incidence
c

IMPORTANT FACTS ABOUT ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

 The electromagnetic waves are produced by accelerated charge.
 These waves do not require any material medium for their propagation.
1
 These waves travel in free space with a speed given by   whose value equals the speed of light.
0 0

 The direction of variations of electric and magnetic fields are perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular
to the direction of propagation. Thus, electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature.
 The variations in electric and magnetic fields occur simultaneously and the fields acquire their maximum values
E0 and B0 at the same place and at the same time. In free space the magnitudes of electric and magnetic
fields in electromagnetic waves are related by E / B = c.
 The energy in electromagnetic waves is divided, on the average, equally between electric and magnetic fields.
 In vacuum, the average electric energy density is (1/2)0 E2 and the average magnetic energy density is
B2/2µ0.
 The electric field vector is responsible for the optical effects of an electromagnetic wave.

8.4 P.No.-280

 The sunlight visible spectrum, discovered by Newton, extends in wavelength rougiy irom 4 × 10–7 m in the
violet region to 8 × 10–7 m in the red region. After Newton, it was found that sun's spectrum considerably
spread below the violet region and also above the red region. These parts of the spectrum are not visible by
our eye; so they are called ‘invisible spectra’ of sun. The part of smaller wavelength below violet is called the
‘ultraviolet spectrum’ and that of longer wavelength above red is called the ‘infra-red spectrum’.
 In 1865, Maxwell formulated the basic laws of electromagnetism in four equations, known as Maxwell equations,
and predicted that light is an electromagnetic wave. Thus, in Maxwell's time, visible light and ultraviolet
and infrared radiations were the only electromagnetic radiations known. After Maxwell's death in 1888, Hertz
for the first time generated and detected electromagnetic waves experimentally. These waves were about
6 m in wavelength and called 'radio waves.
 Later on X-rays (1895) and gamma rays (1898) were discovered. These were also found to travel in free
space with the speed of light and thus of electromagnetic nature. The range of wavelengths of all these
radiations is very large and on this basis they can be given an order. This order is called the ‘electromagnetic
spectrum’. It ranges from the small gamma rays to very long radio waves, with overlapping regions and
gaps in between. The visible spectrum is a very small part of the electromagnetic spectrum (figure).
The wavelength-ranges, frequency-ranges, methods of production, properties and uses of the various parts
of electromagnetic spectrum are summarised below -
8.4.1 P.No.: 281
Wavelength range – 1 × 10–1 m – 1 × 104 m
Frequency range – 3 × 109 Hz – 3 × 104 Hz
178 Electromagnetic Waves
Production – By oscillating electric circuits.
Properties – Reflection, diffraction.
Uses – In Radio and T.V. communication systems.
8.4.2 P.No.: 281
Wavelength range – 1 × 103 m – 3 × 10–1 m
Frequency range – 11
3 × 10 Hz – 1 × 10 Hz 9

Production – By oscillating curents in special vacuum tubes and by

electromagnetic oscillators in electric circuits.
Properties – Reflection, polarisation.
Uses – In radar, long-distance wireless communication via satellites
and microwave ovens.
8.4.3 P.No.: 282
Wavelength range – 8 × 10–7 m – 5 × 10 m
Frequency range – 4 × 1014 Hz – 6 × 1010 Hz
Production – From hot bodies.
Properties – Heating effect on thermopile and bolometer, reflection,
refraction, diffraction, penetration through fog.
Uses – In green houses to keep the plants warm and in warfare to look
through haze, fog or mist.
8.4.4 P.No.: 282
Wavelength range – 4× 10–7 –8 × 10–7 m
Frequency range – 16
8 × 10 – 4 × 10 Hz 14

Production – Radiated by excited atoms in gases and incandescent bodies.

Properties – Reflection, refraction, interference, diffraction, polarisatin
photoelectric effect, photographic action and sensation of sight.
Uses – Reveals the structure of molecules and arrangement of
electrons external shells of atoms.
8.4.5 P.No.: 282
Wavelength range – 1 × 10–8 m – 4 × 10–7 m
Frequency range – 3 × 10 19 Hz – 8 × 10 14 Hz
Production – By sun, vacuum spark an ionised gases.
Properties – All properties of gamma rays but less penetrating, produce
photo-electric effect.
Uses – In detection of invisible writing, forged documents, finger
prints and to preserve food stuffs.
8.4.6 P.No.: 283
Wavelength range – 1 × 10–11 m–3 × 10–8 m
Frequency range – 19
3 × 10 Hz – 1 × 10 Hz 16

Production – By sudden retardation of high-speed electrons at high-atomic

number target.
Properties – All properties of gamma rays but less penetrating
Uses – Reveals structures of inner atomic electron shells and crystals,
help in medical diagnosis.
Electromagnetic Waves 179

8.4.7 P.No.: 283

Wavelength range – 1× 10–14 m–1 × 10–10 m
Frequency range – 22
3 × 10 Hz – 3 × 10 Hz 18

Production – Disintegration of atomic nuclei.

Properties – Chemical reaction on photographic plates, fluorescence,
ionisation, diffraction, highly-penetrating and chargeless.
Uses – Provide information about structure of atomic nuclei.

8. LONG WAVES
Wavelength range – 5 × 10 4 m –
Frequency range – 60 Hz –
Production – Weak radiation from a.c. circuits.

The electric field associated with a plane electromagnetic wave is given by

Ex = 0, Ey = 0, Ez = E0 sin k (x – ct)
where E0 = 2.34 × 10–4 V m–1 and k = 9.72 × 106 m–1.
(a) Write the expressive for components of the magnetic field of the waves.
(b) Find the wavelength of the waves.
Solution
The components of electric field are given by
Ex = 0, Ey = 0, Ez = E0 sin k (x – ct)
Given : E0 = 2.34 × 10–4 V m–1 and k = 9.72 × 106 m–1
(a) The given electric field components show that the electromagnetic wave is propagating in the +ve x-direction.
Electric field vibrates along z-direction. Hence, the vibrations of magnetic field should be along y-direction.
 Bx = 0, Bz = 0
E0 2.34  104
B0    7.8  1013 T
c 3  108
k and c remain same for magnetic field also.
By  B0 sin k ( x  ct ) where B0  7.8  1013 T
k = 9.72 × 106 m–1
2 2
(b) k    6.46  107 m = 646 nm
 9.72  106

A parallel-plate capacitor with plate area A and separation between the plates d is charged by a constant current
I. Consider a plane surface of area (A/2) parallel to the plates and drawn symmetrically between the plates.
Find the displacement current through this area.
Solution
180 Electromagnetic Waves
Charge on the capacitor plates, q = It
Electric field between the plates at an instant t
 q It
E   A
 0 A 0 A 0
A/ 2
Electric flux through the given area
It A d/2 d/2
E  E  area 
A 0 2
It

2 0
d E d  It 
 Displacement current, I d   0  0  
dt dt  2 0 
1 I I
 0  .
2 0 2 4

In a plane electromagnetic wave, the electric field oscillates sinusoidally at a frequency of 2 × 1010 Hz and
amplitude 48 V m–1. Find the wavelength of the wave and amplitude of magnetic field.
Solution
(i) The speed of electromagnetic wave in free space is
3  108
c  v     1.5  102 m
2  1010
E0 48
(ii) Also, c  B0  8
 16  108 T
B0 3  10


In a region the electric field at some instant is E  (80iˆ  32 ˆj  64kˆ) Vm –1 and the magnetic field is

B  (0.2iˆ  0.08 ˆj  0.29kˆ)  T
(a) Show that these two fields are perpendicular to each other.
(b) Determine the speed of propagation of the wave
Solution
 
(a) E  B  (80iˆ  32 ˆj  64kˆ)  (0.2iˆ  0.08 ˆj  0.29kˆ)
= 80 × 0.2 + 32 × 0.08 – 64 × 0.29 = 0
 
Hence, B and E are perpendicular to one another (even when E  0 and B  0)

E 802  322  642 107.33  106

(b) c    2.971  108 ms 1
B ( 0.22  0.082  0.292 )  106 0.3613
Electromagnetic Waves 181

A point source of electromagnetic wave has an average power output of 600 W.

(a) Find the maximum value of electric field at a distance of 4 m from the source.
(b) What will be the maximum value of magnetic field?
(c) Find the average energy density of the wave at distance of 4 m from the source.
Solution
P = 600 W, r = 4 m,
P 600
Intensity, I  2
 2
 2.984 Wm2
4 r 4  4

1 21
(a) I   0 E02 c  E0 
2  0c

2  2.984
E0  12 8
 47.4 Vm1
8.854  10  3  10

1 2 0 I
(b) I  B02 c  B0 
2 0 c

1 I
(c) Energy density, uav   0 E02 
2 c
2.984
  9.94  109 J m –1
3  108

A radio station on the surface of earth radiates a sinusoidal wave with an average total power of 100 kW.
Assuming that the transmitter radiates equally in all directions above the ground, find the amplitudes of electric
and magnetic fields detected by a satellite at a distance of 150 km from the antenna.
Solution
A radio station radiates waves into the hemisphere shown. The centre of the hemisphere is located at the transmitter.
We use hemisphere, since we are considering only regions above the ground with radio station at the centre
Power transmitted, P = 100 kW, r = 150 km
Surface area of hemsiphere, A = 2r2 Satellite
km

P 100  103 Regions

Intensity, I    7.1  107 Wm 2
0
15

A 2  (150  103 ) 2 above ground

r=

1 Ground level
I   0 E02 c
2

2I 2  7.1  107
E0    23.12  103 V m 1
 0c 8.854  1012  3  108
 182 Electromagnetic Waves

E0 23.12  103
B0   8
 7.71  1011 T
c 3  10

Find the energy stored in a 60 cm length of a laswer beam operating at 10 mW.

Solution
Energy stored = Power × time
l 10  103  60  102
 U  P   2  1012 J
c 3  108

Light with an intensity of 28 × 104 W m–2 falls on a perfectly absorbing surface at normal incidence. If the
surface area is 10 cm2, find the average force exerted on the surface during a 45 minute exposure time.
Solution
I = 28 × 104 W m–2, A = 10 × 10–4 m2, t = 45 × 60 s
Total energy incident on the surface,
U = I × A × time = 28 × 104 × 10 × 10–4 × 45 × 60
= 7.56 × 105 J
U
Momentum imparted to the surface p 
c
p U 7.56  105
Force, exerted, F    8
 9.33  107 N
t ct 3  10  45  60

01 (2) For an electromagnetic wave propagating in +y

 1
1. Magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given direction, the electric field is E  E yz ( x, t ) yˆ and
 2
by B  B0 sin(kx  t ) ˆj T . Expression for corresponding
 1
electric field will be (Where c is speed of light) the magnetic field is B  Byz ( x, t ) zˆ
 2
(1) E   B0c sin(kx  t )kˆ V/m (3) For an electromagnetic wave propagating in +x
 directio n, the electric field is
(2) E  B c sin(kx  t )kˆ V/m
0
 1
 B0 E E yz ( y , z , t )( yˆ  zˆ ) and the magnetic field is
(3) E  sin(kx  t )kˆ V/m 2
c 
 B
1
Byz ( y, z , t )( yˆ  zˆ )
(4) E  B0c sin(kx  t )kˆ V/m 2
2. Consider an electromagnetic wave propagating in (4) For an electromagnetic wave propagating in +x
vacuum. Choose the correct statement. directio n, the electric field is
(1) For an electromagnetic wave propagating in +y  1
E E yz ( x, t )( yˆ  zˆ ) and the magnetic field is
 1 2
direction, the electric field is E  E yz ( x, t ) zˆ and
2  1
B Byz ( x, t )( yˆ  zˆ )
 1 2
the magnetic field is B  Byz ( x, t ) yˆ
2
 Electromagnetic Waves 183
3. An electromagnetic wave travelling in the x-direction 10. The best waves for emission of electrons from a surface
has frequency of 2 × 10 14 Hz and electric field amplitude (1) Microwaves (2) Ultra violet rays
of 27 V m–1. From the options given below, which one (3) Infrared rays (4) X-rays
describes the magnetic field for this wave? 11. Rank the following radiations according to their

(1) B (x, t) = (3 × 10–8 T) ĵ sin [2 (1.5 × 10–8 x – 2 × 1014 t)] associated energies, greatest first
 (1) Yellow light from a sodium lamp
(2) B (x, t) = (9 × 10–8 T) k̂ sin [2 (1.5 × 10–6 x – 2 × 1014 t)] (2) Gamma ray emitted by a radioactive nucleus

(3) B (x, t) = (9 × 10–8 T) iˆ sin [2 (1.5 × 10–8 x – 2 × 1014 t)] (3) Radio wave emitted by the antenna
(4) None of the above (4) Microwave beam emitted by radar
4. For an electromagnetic wave, which of the following (1) (2), (1), (4), (3) (2) (1), (2), (3), (4)
statements is true? (3) (3), (4), (1), (2) (4) (1), (2), (4), (3)
(1) Electric field is constant and magnetic field varies. 12. Choose the electromagnetic radiation relevant to
telecommunication.
(2) Magnetic field is constant and electric field varies.
(1) Ultraviolet (2) Infrared
(3) Both electric and magnetic fields are constant. (3) Visible (4) Microwave
(4) Both electric and magnetic fields vary. 13. Which of the following is the correct arrangement of
5. The magnetic field in a travelling electromagnetic wave the electromagnetic spectrum in the increasing order
has a peak value of 20 nT. The peak value of electric of frequency?
field strength is (1) Microwaves, infrared, radio waves, visible light,
(1) 12 V/m (2) 3 V/m X-rays
(3) 6 V/m (4) 9 V/m (2) Radio waves, microwaves, infrared, visible light,
6. An electromagnetic wave is propagating along x-axis. X-rays
 (3) X-rays, visible light, infrared, microwaves, radio
At x = 1 m and t = 0 s, its electric vector | E | = 6 V/m waves
then the magnitude of its magnetic vector is (4) Microwaves, radio waves, infrared, visible light,
(1) 2 × 10 –8 (2) 3 × 10–7 X-rays
(3) 6 × 10 –8
(4) 5 × 10–7 14. The part of the spectrum of the electromagnetic
radiation used to cook food is
7. The electric field of an electromagnetic wave travelling
through vacuum is given by the equation E = E 0 sin (1) ultraviolet rays (2) cosmic rays
(kx – t). The quantity that is independent of (3) X-rays (4) microwaves
wavelength is 15. The crystal structure can be studied by using
(1) k / (2) k (1) UV rays (2) X-rays
(3)  (4) t (3) IR radiation (4) Microwaves
16. A. The wavelength of microwaves is greater than that
8. The magnetic field of an electromagnetic wave is given
of UV-rays.
by By = 3×10–7 sin (103x + 6.28×1012 t). The wavelength
of the e.m. wave is B. The wavelength of IR rays is lesser than that of
UV-rays.
(1) 6.28 cm (2) 3.14 cm
C. The wavelength of microwaves is lesser than that
(3) 0.63 cm (4) 0.32 cm
of IR rays
9. Arrange the electromagnetic radiations per quantum D. Gamma rays has shortest wavelength in the
in the order of increasing energy: electromagnetic spectrum.
A : Blue light B : Yellow light Of the above statements,
C : X-ray D : Radiowave (1) A and B are true (2) B and C are true
(1) D, B, A, C (2) A, B, D, C (3) C and D are true (4) A and D are true
(3) C, A, B, D (4) B, A, D, C

8.5 Synopsis
 Cathode Rays :  K.E. of C.R. particle accelerated by a p.d V is
 Generated in a discharge tube in which a high vaccum
1 2 p2
is maintained. eV = mv 
2 2m
 They are electrons accelerated by high potential
 Can be deflected by Electric & magnetic fields.
difference (10 to 15 kV)
184 Electromagnetic Waves
 Electromagnetic Spectrum : Ordered arrangement of the Here P = power of source,
big family of electro magneti waves (EMW) either in A = Area, t = time taken
ascending order of frequencies or decending order of wave E = energy incident in t time = Nhv
lengths. N = no. of photon incident in t time
Speed of E.M.W. in vaccum : c = 3 × 108 m/s = v
N  h  n  h 
Intensity I   ....(ii)
At A

N
[ n = = no. of photon per sec.]
t
From equation (i) and (ii),

PP n  h  PP PP
  n   5 1024 J 1m 1 P

AA AA hh hchc

 Force exerted on perfectly reflecting surface

 2h  2P
 F  n   and
   c

F 2P 2I  P
Pressure =   I 
A cA c  A
 Force exerted on perfectly absorbing surface

Plancks Quantam Theory : A beam of EMW is a stream of P P  F P I

 n 
 F  and Pressure = A  Ac  c
discrete packets of energy called photons; each photon c hc 
having a frequancy v and energy = E = hv  When a beam of light is incident at angle  on perfectly
where h = planck's constant = 6.63 × 10–34 J-s. reflector surface
 According to Planck the energy of a photon is directly
proportional to the frequency of the radiation.

hc 12400 o
 hc o

E  eV  A   12400(A  eV) 
   e 
 Effective mass of photon

E hc h 1
m 2
 2  i.e. m 
c c  c 
So mass of violet light photon is greater than the mass 2IA cos 2 
F
c
of red light photon.    R   V 
 When a beam of light is incident at angle on perfectly
E hv h absorbing surface
 Linear momentum of photon p  
c c  IA cos 
F
E P c
 Intensity of light : I   ....(i)
At A
 Electromagnetic Waves 185

1. The ionosphere does not allow to pass the waves   c  c

which are termed as (1) , and (2) , and
    
(1) microwaves
c 2 
(2) visible light waves (3)  , 2 and (4) , and c
  
(3) (1) and (2) both
10. If 0 and 0 are the electric permittivity and magnetic
(4) amplitude modulated waves
2. Practically ozone layer absorbs the radi ation of permeability in free space,  and  are the corresponding
wavelength quantities in a medium, then index of refraction of the
(1) less than 3 × 10 –7 m medium is
(2) greater than 3 × 10–7 m  0 
(3) equal to 3 × 10 –7 m (1) (2)
0 0
(4) all the above
3. The waves which can travel directly along surface of  0 0 
(3) (4)
the earth are known as   0 0
(1) ground waves (2) X–rays 11. Dimension of 00 is :
(3)  –rays (4) sky waves (1) LT –1 (2) L–1 T
4. The ionosphere bends the e. m. waves having the (3) L2 T–2 (4) L–2 T2
frequencies 12. For television transmission, the frequency employed
(1) less than 40 MHz is normally in the range
(2) beyond 40 MHz (1) 30–300 MHz (2) 30–300 GHz
(3) nothing is certain (3) 300–300 kHz (4) 30–300 Hz
(4) depends on the moisture present 13. Red light differs from blue light in its
5. The S.I unit of displacement current is (1) speed (2) frequency
(1) H (2) A (3) intensity (4) amplitude
–1
(3) Fm (4) C 14. If an electromagnetic wave propagating through
6. Transmission of T. V. signals from the surface of the vacuum is described by
moon can be received on earth. But transmitted T. V. E = E0 sin (kx – t) ; B = B0 sin (kx – t),
Signals from Delhi can not be received beyond 110 km
(1) E0k = B0 (2) E0B0 = k
distance. The reason is
(3) E0 = B0k (4) E0B0 =  / k
(1) there is no atmosphere on the moon
15. The electromagnetic waves us ed in the
(2) strong gravitational effect on T. V. signals
telecommunication are
(3) T. V. signals travel along a straight line, they do
not follow the curvature of earth (1) ultraviolet (2) infra-red
(4) there is atmosphere around the earth (3) visible (4) microwaves.
7. The number of radio frequency carrier waves 16. A magnetic field can be produced by
transmitted by a television transmitter is (1) A charge at rest only
(1) three (2) two (2) A moving charge only
(3) o n e (4) four (2) a changing electric field
8. The speed of electromagnetic waves is independent of (4) both by (2) and (3)
(1) wavelength 17. Which of the following is independent of wavelength ?
(2) frequency (1) k (2) 
(3) intensity (3)  k (4) k / 
(4) medium, in which it travels 18. Finger prints on a piece of paper may be detected by
9. An electromagnetic radiation of frequency  , sprinkling flourescent powder on the paper and then
wavelength  , travelling with velocity c in air, enters a looking it into
glass slab of refractive index  . The frequency, (1) dark-light (2) sun-light
wavelength and velocity of light in the glass slab will (3) Infra-red-light (4) ultraviolet light
be respectively :
 186 Electromagnetic Waves
19. A uniform but time varying magnetic field B(t) exists in (1) is zero (2) decreases as 1/r
a circular region of radius a is directed into the plane (3) increases as r (4) decreases as 1/r 2
of the paper as shown. The magnitude of the induced 20. If 0 and 0 represent the permittivity and permeability
electric field at point P at a distance r from the centre
of vacuum and and m represent the permittivity and
of the circular region. permeability of medium, then refractive index of the
× × medium is given by
× × × ×
× × × × P
× × 0 0 
× ×× ×
× (1)
 (2)
0 0
× ×a ×
× ×
×
× × × × × ×  0 0
× × B (t)
×× × × × × (3)
0 0 (4)

× × ×
× ×
× × ×
 Electromagnetic Waves 187

(Concept Builder)

1. One requires 11eV of energy to dissociate a carbon electric field intensity produced by the radiations
monoxide molecule into carbon and oxygen atoms. The coming from 50 W bulb at the same distance is
minimum frequency of the appropriate electromagnetic
E
radiation to achieve the dissociation lies in (1) (2) 2E
(1) visible region. (2) infrared region. 2
(3) ultraviolet region. (4) microwave region. E
(3) (4) 2E
2
2. A linearly polarized electromagnetic wave given as
E  E0iˆ cos(kz  t ) is incident normally on a perfectly 5. If E and B represent electric and magnetic field vectors
reflecting infinite wall at z = a. Assuming that the of the elect romagnetic wave, the d irection of
material of the wall is optically inactive, the reflected propagation of electromagnetic wave is along
wave will be given as (1) E (2) B
(3) B × E (4) E × B
(1) Er   E0iˆ cos(kz  t )
6. The ratio of contributions made by the electric field
(2) Er  E0iˆ cos(kz  t )
and magnetic field components to the intensity of an
(3) Er   E0iˆ cos(kz  t ) EM wave is
(1) c : 1 (2) c2 : 1
(4) Er  E0iˆ sin(kz  t ) (3) 1:1 (4) c :1

3. Light with an energy flux of 20 W/cm2 falls on a non- 7. An EM wave radiates outwards from a dipole antenna,
reflecting surface at normal incidence. If the surface with E0 as the amplitude of its electric field vector. The
has an area of 30 cm2, the total momentum delivered electric field E 0 which transports significant energy
(for complete absorption) during 30 minutes is from the source falls off as
(1) 36 × 10–5 kg m/s. (2) 36 × 10–4 kg m/s.
4
(3) 108 × 10 kg m/s. (4) 1.08 × 107 kg m/s. 1 1
(1) (2)
r3 r2
4. The electric field intensity produced by the radiations
1
coming from 100 W bulb at a 3 m distance is E. The (3) (4) remains constant
r
 188 Electromagnetic Waves

• Instructions for Questions 1 to 3 • Instructions for Questions 4 to 6

Given bel ow are two statements : one is labelled as Given below are two statements :
Assertion (A) and the other is labelled as Reason (R).
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most
In the light of the above s tatements, choose the most appropriate answer from the options given below :
appropriate answer from the options given below :
(1) Both Statement I and Statement II are correct
(1) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct
explanation of (A) (2) Both Statement I and Statement II are incorrect
(2) Both (A) and (R) are correct but (R) is not the correct (3) Statement I is correct but Statement II is incorrect
explanation of (A) (4) Statement I is incorrect but Statement II is correct
(3) (A) is correct the (R) is not correct
(4) (A) is not correct but (R) is correct 4. Statement I : In an e.m. wave magnitude of magnetic

field vector B is much smaller than the magnitude of
1. Assertion : Sound waves are not electromagnetic 
waves. vector E.
Reason : Sound waves require a material medium for Statement II : This is because in an e.m. wave E/B = c
propagation. = 3 × 108 m/s.

2. Assertion : Displacement current arises on account of 5. Statement I : Electromagnetic waves exert pressure
change in electric flux. called radiation pressure.
Statement II : This is because they carry energy.
 dE 
Reason : I d 0  
 dt  6. Statement I : Electromagnetic waves are transverse in
nature.
3. Assertion : A changing electric field produces a Statement II : The electric and magnetic fields of an
magnetic field e.m. wave are perpendicular to each other and also
Reason : A changing magnetic field produces an electric perpendicular to the direction of wave propagation.
field.
Electromagnetic Waves 189

(Direct from
NCERT)

Match the List-I and List-II and choose the correct (4) (a) – (i); (b) – (iii, iv); (c) – (i); (d) – (iii)
combination from the options given.
1. Match List–I (Electromagnetic wave type) with List–II 2. Match the radio frequency bands in List–I with the mode
(its association / application) and select the correct option in which they are employed in List–II and mark the correct
from the choices gives below the lists option from the codes given below
List - I List - II List - I List - II
(a) Infrared waves (i) To treat muscular strain
(a) 300 Hz to 300 kHz (i) Space wave
(b) Radio waves (ii) For broadcasting
(b) 300 kHz to 3 MHz (ii) Sky wave
(c) X-rays (iii) To detect fracture of
(c) 3 MHz to 30 MHz (iii) Ground wave
bones
(d) 30 MHz to 3000 GHz
(d) Ultraviolet rays (iv) Absorbed by the ozone
layer of the atmosphere (1) (a) – (i); (b) – (i, ii); (c) – (i, iii); (d) – (iii)
(1) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (ii, iii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (iv) (2) (a) – (i); (b) – (ii); (c) – (iii); (d) – (iii)
(2) (a) – (i); (b) – (ii); (c) – (iii); (d) – (iv) (3) (a) – (iii); (b) – (i); (c) – (ii); (d) – (ii, i)
(3) (a) – (ii, iv); (b) – (i, iii); (c) – (ii, iii); (d) – (ii, iv) (4) (a) – (iii); (b) – (iii, ii); (c) – (ii); (d) – (i)
 190 Electromagnetic Waves

(Previous Year Questions)

1. The frequency of  -rays, X-rays and ultraviolet rays (4) moving along – x-direction with frequency 106 Hz
are a, b and c respectively. Then, [AIPMT-2000] and wavelength 200 m.
(1) a>b>c (2) a<b<c 8. Which of the following statement is false for the
(3) a=b=c (4) a>c>b properties of electromagnetic waves? [AIPMT-2010]
2. In a certain region of space electric field E and magnetic (1) Both electric and magnetic field vectors attain the
field B are perpendicular to each other and an electron maxima and minima at the same place and same
enters in region perpendicular to the direction of B and time
E both and moves undeflected, then velocity of (2) The energyin electromagnetic wave is divided
electron is [AIPMT-2001] equally between electric and magnetic vectors
|E| (3) Both electric and magnetic field vectors are parallel
(1) (2) E×B to each other and perpendicular to the direction
|B|
|B| of propagation of wave
(3) (4) E.B (4) These waves do not require any material medium
|E|
3. The velocity of electromagnetic wave is along the for propoagation
direction of [AIPMT-2002] 9. The decreasi ng order of wavelength of infrared,
(1) B×E (2) E×B microwave, ultraviolet and gamma rays is
(3) E (4) B [AIPMT-2011]
4. Which of the following has minimum wave length? (1) gamma rays, ultraviolet, infrared, microwaves
[AIPMT-2002] (2) microwaves, gamma rays, infrared, ultraviolet
(1) X-rays (2) Ultraviolet rays (3) infrared, microwave, ultraviolet, gamma rays
(3) -rays (4) Cosmic rays (4) microwave, infrared, ultraviolet, gamma rays
5. Which of the following rays are not electromagnetic 10. The electric and the magnetic field, associated with an
waves? [AIPMT-2003] electromagnetic wave, propagating along the +z-axis,
(1)  -rays (3) Heat rays can be represented by [AIPMT-2011]
(3) X-rays (4) -rays (1) [ E  E0kˆ, B  B0iˆ] (2) [ E  E0 ˆj , B  B0 ˆj ]
6. If  v,  x and  m represent the wavelengths of visible
light, X-rays and microwaves respectively, then (3) [ E  E0 ˆj , B  B0 kˆ] (4) [ E  E0iˆ, B  B0 ˆj ]
[AIPMT-2005] 11. The electric field associated with an electro magnetic
(1)  m > x > v (2)  v > m > x wave in vacuum is given by 40 cos (kz – 6 × 10 8 t),
where E, z and t are in volt/metre and second
(3)  m > v > x (4)  v > x > m
respectively. The value of wave vector k is
7. The electric field part of an electromagnetic wave in a (1) 2 m–1 (2) 0.5 m–1[AIPMT-2012]
medium is represented by Ex = 0; (3) 6 m –1
(4) 3 m–1
N  rad   12. The condition under which a microwave oven heats
2 rad  
E y  2.5 cos  2  106  t     10 x ; up a food item containing water molecules most
C  m   s  
efficiently is [NEET-2013]
EZ = 0. The wave is [AIPMT-2009] (1) the frequency of the microwave must match the
resonant frequency of the water molecules
(1) moving along y-direction with frequency 2  × 106
(2) the frequency of the microwave has no relation
Hz and wavelength 200 m
with natural frequency of water molecules
(2) moving along x-direction with frequency 106 Hz (3) microwave are heat waves, so always produce
and wavelength 100 m heating
(3) moving along x-direction with frequency 106 Hz (4) infra-red waves prodcue heating in a microwave
and wavelength 200 m oven
 Electromagnetic Waves 191
2
13. The energy of the EM waves is of the order of 15 keV. 20. Light with an average flux of 20 W/cm falls on a non-
To which part of the spectrum does it belong? reflecting surface at normal incidence having surface area
20 cm2. The energy received by the surface during time
[AIPMT-2015]
span of 1 minute is [NEET-2020]
(1) X-rays (2) Infrared rass (1) 12 × 103 J (2) 24 × 103 J
(3) Ultraviolet rays (4)  -rays (3) 48 × 103 J (4) 10 × 103 J
14. Out of the following options which one can be used to 21. The ratio of contributions made by the electric field and
produce a propagating electromagnetic wave? magnetic field components to the intensity of an
electromagnetic wave is (c = speed of electromagnetic
(1) A stationary charge [NEET-2016] waves) [NEET-2020]
(2) A chargeless particle (1) 1 : 1 (2) 1 : c
(3) An accelerating charge (3) 1 : c2 (4) c : 1
(4) A charge moving at constant velocity 22. The E.M. wave with shortest wavelength among the
following is, [NEET-2020]
15. In an electromagnetic wave in free space the root mean (1) Microwaves (2) Ultraviolet rays
square value of the electric field is Erms = 6 V/m. The (3) X-rays (4) Gamma-rays
peak value of the magnetic field is [NEET-2017] 23. For a plane electromagnetic wave propagating in x-
(1) 1.41 × 10 –8 T (2) 2.83 × 10–8 T direction, which one of the following combination gives
(3) 0.70 × 10 –8 T (4) 4.23 × 10–8 T the correct possible directions for electric field (E) and
magnetic field (B) respectively? [NEET-2021]
16. An em wave is propagating in a medium with a velocity
 (1) ˆj  k,
ˆ ˆj  kˆ (2) ˆj  k,
ˆ  ˆj  kˆ
v  viˆ . The instantaneous oscillating electric field of this
em wave is along +Y axis. Then the direction of oscillating ˆj  k,
ˆ  ˆj  kˆ
(3) (4) ˆj  k,
ˆ  ˆj  kˆ
magnetic field of the em wave will be along [NEET-2018]
(1) – Z direction (2) + Z direction 24. The magnetic field of a plane electromagnetic wave is given

(3) – Y direction (4) – X direction by B  3  108 cos(1.6  103 x  48  1010 t)ˆj, then the
17. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 20 µF is being associated electric field will be : [NEET-2022]
charged by a voltage source whose potential is changing
at the rate of 3 V/s. The conduction current through the (1) 3  108 cos(1.6  103 x  48  1010 t)iˆ V / m
connecting wires, and the displacement current through
(2) 3  108 sin(1.6  103 x  48  1010 t)i V / m
the plates of the capacitor, would be, respectively:
[NEET-2019] (3) 9sin(1.6  103 x  48  1010 t)kˆ V / m
(1) 60 µA, zero (2) zero, zero
(3) zero, 60 µA (4) 60 µA, 60 Ma (4) 9cos(1.6  103 x  48  1010 t)kˆ V / m
18. Which colour of the light has the longest wavelength? 25. The ratio of the magnitude of the magnetic field and
(1) green (2) violet [NEET-2019] electric field intensity of a plane electromagnetic wave in
(3) red (4) blue free space of permeability µ0 and permittivity 0 is (Given
that c - velocity of light in free space) [NEET-2022]
19. The magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given
by, 1
(1) c (2)
By = 2 × 10–7 sin ( × 103 x + 3 × 1011 t)T c
Calculate the wavelength. [NEET-2020]
c  00
(1)  × 10–3 m (2)  × 103 m (3) (4)
00 c
(3) 2 × 10–3 m (4) 2 × 103 m
192 Electromagnetic Waves

8.11
DAILY PRACTICE PROBLEM (DPP) – 01 ASSERTION–REASON & STATEMENT QUESTIONS
1. (4) 2. (4) 3. (4) 4. (4) 5. (3) 1. (1) 2. (1) 3. (2) 4. (1) 5. (2)
6. (1) 7. (1) 8. (3) 9. (1) 10. (4) 6. (1)
11. (1) 12. (4) 13. (2) 14. (4) 15. (2)
16. (4) MATRIX TYPE QUESTIONS

MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS FROM NCERT 1. (2) 2. (4)

1. (4) 2. (1) 3. (1) 4. (2) 5. (2)
ARCHIVE QUESTIONS
6. (3) 7. (2) 8. (3) 9. (2) 10. (4)
1. (1) 2. (1) 3. (2) 4. (4) 5. (1)
11. (4) 12. (1) 13. (2) 14. (1) 15. (4)
6. (3) 7. (3) 8. (3) 9. (4) 10. (4)
16. (4) 17. (4) 18. (4) 19. (2) 20. (2)
11. (1) 12. (1) 13. (1) 14. (3) 15. (2)
NCERT EXEMPLAR OBJECTIVE TYPE QUESTIONS 16. (2) 17. (4) 18. (3) 19. (3) 20. (2)
21. (1) 22. (4) 23. (2) 24. (4) 25. (2)
1. (3) 2. (4) 3. (2) 4. (3) 5. (4)
6. (3) 7. (3)